Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
LFZP 111/2/3/4
Optimho Distance Protection
Service Manual
R5911-D
SERVICE MANUAL
R5911D
Service Manual
LFZP11x
R5911D
Issue
Page 1 of 1
Issue control
Issue
A-C
D
Date
to 1996
1996/97
Author
Support Engineers
Publicity/Support Engineers
Changes
Origination
Formatting and changes to
all chapters
Service Manual
LFZP11x
R5911D
Contents
Page 1 of 1
CHAPTER 1
APPLICATIONS NOTES
(R4056K included)
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 4
COMMISSIONING
CHAPTER 5
CUSTOMER VARIANTS
CHAPTER 1
APPLICATION NOTES
(PUBLICATION R4056 INCLUDED)
OPTIMHO
Static Distance Protection Relays
OPTIMHO
Static Distance Protection Relays
Features
Full scheme distance relays with
18, 12, 9 or 6 measuring units.
Phase and ground distance or
phase distance protection.
Single or multiple zones.
Optional directional earth fault
protection.
Benefits
Wide model range for accurate
matching to applications.
Remote interrogation reduces
need for site visits.
Precise fault location, even on
double-circuit lines together with
fault information reduces outage
time.
Accurate fault information
provides for in-depth fault
analysis.
Summary Chart
Transmission and
sub transmission
main protection
Sub-transmission
and distribution
main protection
Back
up
only
LFZP Model
111
112
113
114
121
122
123
131
132
151
Phase distance
Ground distance
DEF
Fault location
Fault location with mutual compensation
Overhead lines
Underground cables
18
18
18
12
12
12
12
Independent zones Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z2
Z2
Z2
Z2
Z2
Z2
Z3
Z3
Z3
Z3
Z3
Z3
Z3
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1X
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z2
Z2
Z2
Z3
24
24
24
24
16
16
16
16
16
Blocking 2
q/m
q/m
D/N
Reversible zones
Single pole tripping
VT supervision
3 phase fuse blow supervision
Power swing blocking
Basic
Z1 Extension
Acceleration
PUR
PUR Unblock
Schemes
POR1
POR1 Unblock
POR2
POR2 WI Trip
POR2 Unblock
POR2 WI Trip Unblock
Blocking
Distance
Characteristic
Z3 Phase
Z3 Ground
Negative sequence volts
DEF
polarising
Q/L
Applications of Optimho
Principles of Operation
Hardware Structure
Optimised Performance
with Distorted Signals
The phase comparators and level
detectors use logic processing to
achieve immunity from maloperation
due to noise, such as harmonic
distortion, travelling wave effects,
high and low frequency capacitor
voltage transformer transients and
current transformer saturation.
Operation of the phase comparators
and level detectors can only occur if
the input signals are dominated by
power frequency components.
Filters are used to insure this
dominance and to optimise
operating times.
AC inputs
VA VB VC
VN
Analogue
input
module
A B C
N
p
User interface
7 Optical isolators
Zone 3 board
+ Power swing blocking
Status
inputs
Digital bus
Analogue bus
Settings from
digital bus
Quadrilateral
ground fault board
8 Output relays
DEF board
8 Output relays
8 Output relays
Trips.
alarms,
etc.
Fully screened
power supply
unit enclosure
Terminal blocks
Terminal block
Analogue
input module
Measurement
and control
boards in fully
screened
compartment
Output auxiliary
relays and
status input
optical isolators
User interface
on hinged front
panel
2 x 16 character
liquid crystal display
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
ALARM
RELAY AVAILABLE
SET
PARALLEL
RESET
ACCEPT/READ
SERIAL
Test sockets
Menu Options
Schemes Available
Settings
The setting options allow the user to
select functions to suit each
application. The available options
depend upon the model of
Optimho, but usually include:
scheme type
which distance zones are
enabled (up to 5 zones)
whether ground fault time
delayed zones (if fitted) are
enabled
direction of reach-stepped zones
or of Zone 3 (if fitted)
whether start indications are
required for remote faults which
do not result in a trip.
eight independent groups of
settings which are stored in the
relay memory and are selectable
from the menu.
The menu is adaptive; for example,
if Zone 2 is not required and has
been disabled, its time setting is
automatically removed from the
menu.
Distance Characteristics
The phase comparator is arranged to produce several types of distance
characteristics for the different models of Optimho. For further information see
Summary, Page 3.
Characteristic
type
Description
X
Numbers are source impedance/relay setting ratios
12
24
60
R
Figure 5: Resistive expansion of partially cross-polarized mho under fault conditions for solidly grounded systems
7
Remote Communications
Zone 1
Direction
al line
Zones 1
Zone 3 reverse
R8521
KITZ 103
K-Bus to Optimho Interface
R8532
OptiCom 100/140
Settings Database
and File Transfer
R5928
R
&2
X
Zone 3
a
0.41
0.67
Load
area
R
KITZ 101/102
Interface Unit
RH Resist
Zone 2
ive reach
ive reach
Zone 3
LH Resist
Zone 3
reverse
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
+
_
KITZ101/102
KBUS/IEC 60870 Interface
Typical K
series relay
150R
2 TX
3 RX
7 Signal GND
1 Protective GND
When Fitted
Typical K
series relay
Terminals
54
Terminals
54
56
56
Screen
Screen Link
All
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
KITZ103 KBUS
LFZP 100 (Optimho)
Interface *
+
_
150R
2 TX
3 RX
7 Signal GND
1 Protective GND
All
KITZ 103
2
3
7
1
Screen
1 Protective ground
1 Protective ground
2 Transmitted data
2 Received data
3 Received data
2 Transmitted data
7 Signal ground
7 Signal ground
Figure 8: Typical application diagram: KBUS/LFZP 100 (Optimho) Interface Type KITZ 103
Polarising
The partial cross polarising signal
used in various distance
characteristics is a square wave
derived from a healthy phase
reference and 16% of the amplitude
of the prefault voltage. This wave is
added to the faulty phase voltage,
and dominates it for close-up
unbalanced fault conditions.
This provides a clear directional
reference even in the presence of
capacitor voltage transformer
transients.
The partial synchronous polarising is
similar to partial cross polarising but
is effective for 3-phase faults.
Synchronous polarising is derived
from prefault voltage and is
available for 16 cycles after fault
incidence to cover breaker failure
protection time.
Several cycles must elapse from
system energisation before
synchronous polarising is available,
so switch-on-to-fault logic is
arranged to provide protection for
close-up 3-phase faults during this
initial period.
100
100
50
50
10
10
Curve 4
Curve 1
Curve 5
Curve 6
Curve 7
1
0.5
0.5
Curve 2
Curve 8
Curve 3
0.1
0.1
1
5
10
Current (Multipule of s)
IEC curves
t = 0.14
0.02 1
t = 13.5
1
t = 80
21
50
100
5
10
Current (Multipule of s)
American curves
Curve 5
US moderate inverse
Curve 6
US standard inverse
Curve 7
US very inverse
Curve 8
US extremely inverse
50
100
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
Source impedence
Relay setting = 30
Source impedence
=1
Relay setting
Maximum
Mean
Maxim
um
0.02
0.01
0.00
0.02
Mean
Minimum
Minimum
0.01
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
0.00
100
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
100
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
Source impedence
= 30
Relay setting
Maximum
Mean
Minimum
0.02
Maximum
0.02
0.01
0.00
Source impedence
=1
Relay setting
Mean
Minimum
0.01
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
0.00
100
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
100
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
0.04
Source impedence
Relay setting
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
= 30
Maximum
Mean
0.02
=1
imum
Max
Mean
0.02
Minimum
Minimum
0.01
0.01
0.00
Source impedence
Relay setting
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
0.00
100
11
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
100
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
0.04
Operating
Time
(s) 0.03
Source impedence
= 30
Relay setting
Maximum
Mean
0.02
Maximum
Mean
0.02
Minimum
Minimum
0.01
0.00
Source impedence
=1
Relay setting
0.01
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
0.00
100
Self-Monitoring and
Voltage Transformer
Fuse/MCB Supervision
12
20
40
60
80
Fault location (% of relay setting)
100
Contact Arrangements
Most models are pre-programed to
give a choice of at least two output
contact arrangements. One of these
is arranged to give direct access to
the relays measuring units via the
output relay contacts, so that a
customers existing protection
scheme can be operated in
conjunction with Optimho if
required. The other arrangements
take advantage of the Optimhos
own integral scheme logic.
Other Options
START
Ground Fault Distance?
No
Yes
Underground
cables?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Go to
chart 2
DEF Scheme?
Yes
No
Yes
No
LFZP 131
With DEF
OK for open-delta
Or 3limb VTs
Optional fault locaton
LFZP 132
With DEF
OK for open-delta
Or 3limb VTs
Optional fault locaton
Yes
No
Quadrilateral ground
fault elements?
Yes
Quadrilateral ground
fault elements?
Yes
No
LFZP 121
Optional fault
location
LFZP 122
Optional fault
location
No
LFZP 111
Optional DEF.
Optional fault location
No
LFZP 112
Optional DEF.
Optional fault locator
LFZP 114
Optional DEF.
Optional fault locator
Selection Chart 1
13
START
Underground cables?
No
Yes
Any of the following?
*single pole tripping?
*PUR scheme?
*POR scheme?
*unblocking scheme?
Go to chart 1
* blocking scheme?
* power swing blocking?
* capacitor voltage
transformers?
Yes
No
LFZP 113
Optional fault location
Optional DEF
LFZP 123
Optional fault location
No DEF
Selection Chart 2
START
Single Zone Distance?
No
Yes
Go to chart 1
No
Yes
Any of the following:
*single pole tripping?
*power swing blocking?
*DEF?
Offset characteristic?
No
Yes
Either of the following:
*offset characteristic?
*power swing blocking?
Yes
No
LFZP 112
Optional DEF.
Optional fault
location
LFZP 114
Optional DEF.
Optional fault
location
LFZP 131
with DEF.
Optional fault
location
Offset characteristic
Yes
No
LFZP 151
No fault
location
LFZP 122
Optional fault
location
Selection Chart 3
14
LFZP 132
with DEF.
Optional fault
location
A
B
P1
S2
C
B
Phase rotation
A B
MMLG
Test block or
Equivalent
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
LFZP 111
19
20
21
22
2A9 2A10
23
2A11 2A12
a b
24
2A21 2A22
25
2A23 2A24
26
Fuses
or MCB
2B21 2B22
15
2B23 2B24
16
2B25 2B26
17
2B27 2B28
18
2A25 2A26
S1
S2
P2
27
2A27 2A28
28
P1
DEF current polarisation when required
+
2A13 2A14 A13
2B13 2B14
CRX
2B9 2B10 17
19 74
COX
2B7
2B8
13
15 70
RZ1X
2B1
2B2
11 66
MCB
IPD
2B11 2B12
2B3
2B4
R1
58
78
21
62
23 82
2A 18
49
2B17
2B18
77
14
DC supply
2A16 2A15
2B16 2B15
76
Signal receive
Channel out of service
72
60
68
Breaker open
80
Relay blocked
64
84
Reset indications
Signal send
51
2A 20
2A 19
79
2B20
2B 19
Any Trip
a
b
c
Fuses
or MCB
Alternative voltage
transformer connection
for LFZP 131 & 132
15
16
17
18
Test block
CRX
COX
RZIX
CBAUX
MCB
RI
IPD
LFZP
Technical Data
Ratings
AC voltage Vn:
AC current
In:
Frequency fn:
50Hz or 60Hz
DC Supply Vx(1):
Operative
withstand
Maximum
48/54V
37.5 to 60V
64.8V
110/125V
87.5 to 137.5V
150V
220/250V
175 to 275V
300V
AC voltage:
AC current:
Burdens
AC voltage circuits:
AC current circuits:
DC supply (1):
DC supply (2):
Distance elements
0.2
0.04
0.1
0.02
Reverse Zone 3
Overhead line models
16
KZN
Z ZL1
= L0
KZPh
3ZL1
Where ZL0 and ZL1 are the phasor values of zero and positive sequence
impedance of the protected line.
Quadrilateral resistive reach settings:
Right hand reach = KR.5/In
Range of factors:
Left-hand reach
Left-hand reach
KZPh
KZN
KZ1
KZ1X
KZ1Y
KZ2
KZ3
KZ3
KR
1 to 30 in steps of 1
17
Reach:
105%
Timer ranges:
Zone
Zone
Zone
Zone
1X timer
1Y timer
2 timer
3 timer
Timer accuracy:
Operating time:
18
Is = 0.05In to 0.80In:
Current: +10% 0%
Operating time: definite time 3% over 1.3Is to 31Is
curves 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
curve 3
Setting:
M range:
50 to 85 in steps of 5
Accuracy
Menu choices allow instantaneous trip and alarm and indication for faults
occurring on line energisation, whether bus or line voltage transformers are
used:
SOTF enabled either 0.2s or 110s after line de-energised
(110s prevents SOTF action on auto-reclosure).
SOTF trip via measuring elements.
SOTF trip via current and voltage level detectors.
Output contacts
Carry continuously
5A ac or dc.
Break
ac: 1250VA
dc: 50W resistive
25W L/R = 0.04s
Subject to a maxima of 5A
and 300V
Durability
Loaded contact
Unloaded contact
20
Dielectric withstand
IEC 60255-5:1977
ANSI C37.90:1978
Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5:1977
Electrical environment
DC supply interruption
IEC 60255-11:1979
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3
21
Atmospheric environment
Temperature
IEC 60255-6:1988
IEC 60068-2-1:1990
Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974
Dry Heat
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Enclosure protection
IEC 60529:1989
Mechanical environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Response Class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Class 1
22
29-31
RIA
97Y
RIA
97Y
RIA
97Y
RIA
97Y
29-33
VTS
97X
VTS
97X
Def Trip
67N
VTS
97X
29-35
Dist Trip
21
Z1
Dist Trip
21
Trip
94T
37-39
Trip A
94A
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
41-43
Trip B
94B
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
45-47
Trip C
94C
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
Trip
94T
49-51
Signal Send
85X
Signal Send
85X
Signal Send
85X
Any Trip 94
53-55
SOTF
98
SOTF
98
SOTF
98
Start
30-32
Time delayed
21/67N(T)
Z1X + Z1Y(T)
Z1X/Z1Y(T)
Z1X/Z1Y/Z2(T) (Note 2)
30-34
DEF Trip
67N
Z2(T)
Z2(T)
Z3(T)
Z3(T) (Note 3)
30-36
Aided Trip
94Y
Z3(T)
Z3(T)
Def(T)
67N(T)
38-40
Trip A
94A
Aided Trip
94Y
Aided Trip
94Y
42-44
Trip B
94B
Trip
94T
Any Trip
94
46-48
Trip C
94C
Any Trip
94
Signal Stop
85Y (Note 4)
50-52
Bar
96
Bar
96
Bar
96
54-56
Start
99
Start
99
Start
99
57-59
Trip A
94A
57-61
Trip B
94B
57-63
Trip C
94C
65-67
Trip A
94A
69-71
Trip B
94B
73-75
Trip C
94C
77-79
Any Trip
94
81-83
PSB
95
LFZP 131,132
LFZP 151
99
Notes:
1. When 3 phase tripping scheme is used,
94A, 94B, 94C and 94 all respond as 94T.
2. Z1X/Z1Y(T) in LFZP 132.
3. Z2(T) in LFZP 132.
4. Trip 94T in LFZP 132.
Key to contact functions.
97Y
94Y
Aided trip.
97X
94
Any trip
95
94A
21
Distance trip.
94B
67N
DEF trip.
94C
98
94T
Z1
Zone 1 trip.
96
Block autoreclose.
Z1X(T)
85X
Signal send.
Z1Y(T)
85Y
Signal stop.
Z2(T)
99
23
177.00
Ribbon cable
1
2
3
4
Input/
Output
Hinged
panel
11 9 7 5
10 8 6
Processing
57
T.B.
29
T.B.
84
56
25 way 'D'
connector
414.00
AC
input
13
Power supply
M4 earth
connections
12
T.B.
Front view
Front view
10.00
168.00
159.00
4 Holes
4,4
Rear view
32.00
Board
Ref
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
or
or
312.00
411.00 362.60
157.00
24.20
14
25
13
Description
Board No.
Opto isolator
Output relay
Output relay
Output relay
Assy fault locator module
3 Zone gnd fault quad
See below
Level detector
Directional earth fault
1 Zone offset lenticular
Processor
AC input 2
AC input 1
2 Zone mho ph & gnd
1 Zone mho reversible
Zone 3 ph (2 channel)
ZJ0133
ZJ0140 003
ZJ0140 001
ZJ0140 002
GJ0277 000
ZJ0132
28
27
Bottom view
ZJ0136
ZJ0139
ZJ0131
ZJ0138
ZJ0135
ZJ0134
ZJ0130
ZJ0146
ZJ0129
28 way max
Each way accepting:2M4 Ring terminals
or
24,8 x 0,8
Snap-on terminals
or
1 Ring+
1 Snap-on terminal
Board
Ref
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
or
or
Hinged panel
414.00
32.00
312.00
177.00
(4U)
157.00
10.00
Front view
Side view
M4 earth connection
1 2
Ribbon
cable
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Input/
Processing
AC
Output
Input
Front view (panel removed)
24.20
T.B.
Power supply
Rear view
29
57
T.B.
T.B.
56
84
Board No.
Opto isolator
Output relay
Output relay
Output relay
Assy fault locator module
3 Zone gnd fault quad
See below
Level detector
Directional earth fault
1 Zone offset lenticular
Processor
AC input 2
AC input 1
2 Zone mho ph & gnd
1 Zone mho reversible
Zone 3 ph (2 channel)
ZJ0133
ZJ0140 003
ZJ0140 001
ZJ0140 002
GJ0277 000
ZJ0132
ZJ0136
ZJ0139
ZJ0131
ZJ0138
ZJ0135
ZJ0134
ZJ0130
ZJ0146
ZJ0129
25 way 'D'
connector
411.00
362.60
4 Holes 4,4
Description
159.00 168.00
14
13
25
27
28
28 way max
Each way accepting:2M4 Ring terminals
or
24,8 x 0,8
Snap-on terminals
or
1 Ring+
1 Snap-on terminal
Board
Ref
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
or
or
483.00
34.00
465.10
177.00
(4U)
312.00
157.00
101.60
Hinged panel
37.70
Front view
Fixing slot
10,6 long x 7 wide
1 2
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Input/
Output
12
13
Processing
10.00
Side view
M4 earth connection
Power supply
T.B.
T.B.
AC
input
Rear view
T.B.
25 way 'D'
connector
14
13
25
Description
Board No.
Opto isolator
Output relay
Output relay
Output relay
Assy fault locator module
3 Zone gnd fault quad
See below
Level detector
Directional earth fault
1 Zone offset lenticular
Processor
AC input 2
AC input 1
2 Zone mho ph & gnd
1 Zone mho reversible
Zone 3 ph (2 channel)
ZJ0133
ZJ0140 003
ZJ0140 001
ZJ0140 002
GJ0277 000
ZJ0132
27
28
ZJ0136
ZJ0139
ZJ0165
ZJ0138
ZJ0135
ZJ0134
ZJ0130
ZJ0146
ZJ0129
28 way max
Each way accepting:2M4 Ring terminals
or
24,8 x 0,8
Snap-on terminals
or
1 Ring+
1 Snap-on terminal
10
28 way max
Each way accepting:
2 - M4 ring terminals
or
2 - 4,8 x 0,8 Snap-on terminals
or
1 - Ring + 1 - Snap-on terminal
M4 earth connection
120
2
155
121
27
15
36.3
28
Perforated cover
Note: Where the box is to be fitted into a
Midos scheme it should be positioned
between relays, not at a tier end.
Rack mounting schemes require the
addition of joining strips and spacers.
Cases
The relay is housed in a multimodule Midos case suitable for rack
or panel mounting, as shown in
Figure 15.
Weight: 15kg.
Other Information
An LFZP accessory kit is available to
facilitate commissioning and test.
26
Information Required
with Order
LFZP model required (see Summary
Chart page 3)
Whether DEF required (if optional
for model selected)
Whether fault location required
(if optional for model selected)
Nominal current rating In: 1A or 5A
Frequency fn: 50Hz or 60Hz
Voltage of dc supply Vx(1):
48/54V, 110/125V or 220/250V
Voltage of dc supply Vx(2):
48/54V, 110/125V or 220/250V
Mounting arrangements: rack, panel
horizontal, panel vertical, semi
projection
Whether the block auto-reclose
contact 961 is to be a normallyopen or normally-closed contact
Whether the signal send contact
85X-1 is to be a normally-open or
normally-closed contact
Advice is available when the
information requested above is
difficult to specify
Requests for advice should include:
current and voltage transformer
ratios
positive and zero sequence
impedances of the protected
feeder or full details of the feeder
lengths and construction
source impedances or fault levels
for both minimum and maximum
plant conditions
27
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 1.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 1 of 89
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
For the protection of high voltage transmission lines and underground cables, a
selection of four Optimho distance models are available in order to provide a wide
range of relay characteristics and options. Three models are for the protection of
overhead transmission lines, two with 18 comparators and up to five zones of
protection and one with 12 comparators and up to four zones of protection. The fourth
model is for the protection of underground cables, with 18 comparators and up to five
zones of protection. All models are provided with single and three phase tripping.
Section 2.
RELAY CHARACTERISTIC
The correct relay model selection for the preferred relay characteristics and options is
shown on the Selection Chart in the form of a flow-chart, which clearly identifies the
relay type reference and the optional facilities that are available. All models are
provided with Power Swing Blocking and Voltage Transformer Supervision, except
model LFZP114, which is provided with Voltage Transformer Supervision only.
Section 3.
It is a general purpose relay, normally recommended for the protection of any length
transmission line, where the values of arc-resistance and tower footing resistance
required to be measured are outside the reach of the mho characteristic.
As shown in Figure 1, this relay has partially cross-polarised shaped mho
characteristics for the Zone 1 and Zone 2 phase units. This type of characteristic has a
'shield' shape when plotted on the impedance plane, exhibiting a strong resistive
expansion under fault conditions for tolerance of arc-resistance. A digitally generated
synchronous memory system is used for partial polarisation on three phase faults, to
provide similar strong resistive expansion and to ensure directional response for
close-up faults.
The Zone 1 and Zone 2 earth fault units have quadrilateral characteristics, with
independent settings for reach at the relay characteristic angle and resistive coverage.
The quadrilateral characteristic gives extra tolerance to the measurement of high
resistance faults, where the expansion of the mho shielded characteristic may be found
inadequate.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 2 of 89
X
X
Z3
Z3
Z2
Z2
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
Z1
R
Z3'
Z3'
PHASE FAULTS
GROUND FAULTS
Z2
Z2
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
Z1
Z3'
Z3'
PHASE FAULTS
GROUND FAULTS
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 3 of 89
To avoid any problem of overreach or underreach on resistive earth faults when there
is an infeed to the fault from a remote source, the reactance line of the Zone 1
quadrilateral automatically tilts to compensate for the pre-fault power flow. The Zone 1
quadrilaterals are inhibited for double phase to earth faults to eliminate overreach,
tripping being performed via the phase fault units which measure accurately under
these conditions.
The Zone 3 units for phase faults have offset lenticular characteristics which permit the
relay to be applied to long heavily loaded transmission lines without encroachment
into the load impedance. It has a variable aspect ratio, including an offset circular
setting.
For earth faults, the Zone 3 units are offset quadrilaterals similar in design to the
quadrilaterals used for Zone 1 and Zone 2. In the scheme, the facility is provided for
the Zone 3 units to be set directionally in the reverse direction for use in the Blocking
schemes or in the Permissive Overreach scheme with Weak Infeed.
As an alternative, the earth fault units are provided with mho comparators for Zone 1
and Zone 2 and offset lenticular for Zone 3. The choice of relay characteristics being
performed in the relay menu.
Selection of the quadrilateral characteristic automatically disables the mho/lenticular
ground comparators, which are only automatically enabled if a failure occurs in the
quadrilateral comparators. Thus, the quadrilateral comparators are backed up by the
mho/lenticular comparators. This back-up feature is not available when the selection is
made of mho/lenticular for earth faults.
Section 4.
This relay is recommended for the protection of medium and long, transmission lines
including heavily loaded lines, where load encroachment is to be avoided, as shown
in Figure 2, this relay has partially cross-polarised shaped mho characteristics for the
Zone 1 and Zone 2 units. This type of characteristics has a 'shield' shape when plotted
on the impedance plane, exhibiting a strong resistive expansion under fault conditions
for tolerance of arc-resistance.
A digitally generated synchronous memory system is used for partial polarisation on
three phase faults, to provide similar strong resistive expansion and to ensure correct
directional response for close-up faults.
The Zone 3 units have offset lenticular characteristics, which permit the relay to be
applied to long transmission lines. The lenticular shape has a variable aspect ratio,
including an offset circular setting. The Zone 3 may also be set as a reverse looking
shield characteristic for use in the Blocking schemes or for use in the Permissive
Overreach Scheme with Weak Infeed.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 5.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 4 of 89
It is a cost effective relay recommended for use when the application does not require
a response to faults in the reverse direction. The application of this relay does not
extend to busbar back-up and it has no facilities for use in schemes requiring Weak
Infeed, Blocking or Power Swing Blocking features.
As shown in Figure 3, this relay has partially cross-polarised shaped mho
characteristics for Zone 1 and Zone 2 units, which have a 'shield' shape when plotted
on the impedance plane, exhibiting strong resistive expansion under fault conditions
for tolerance of arc-resistance. A digitally generated synchronous memory system is
used for partial polarisation on three phase faults, to provide similar strong resistive
expansion and ensure correct directional response for close-up faults.
Application possibilities without the optional Directional Earth Fault protection includes
the use of phase selector for the Phase comparison scheme P10 to allow single pole
tripping. Also, with Zone 1 disabled, the relay can be used for back-up protection of
shunt reactors, or with the two zones enabled for the protection of power transformers
and transformer feeders.
Section 6.
This relay is intended for protection of underground cables feeders and, as shown in
Figure 4, has partially cross-polarised shaped mho characteristics for Zone 1 and
Zone 2. The relay has a lower minimum impedance setting to cater for the generally
lower impedance of cables per unit length and an extended range of residual
compensation setting angles. The Zone 3 has an offset lenticular characteristic with an
alternative setting for a reverse 'shield' mho characteristic. Directional Earth Fault
protection is available for this model for hybrid systems where the characterisitcs of the
overhead sections dominate. The Fault Locator option is available for this version,
primarily for metering purposes (see section 4.5.8 in chapter 2), as its accuracy for
power systems containing cable sections can not be guaranteed.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 5 of 89
X
Z3
Z2
Z1Y
Z1X
Z1
R
Z3'
Z3'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 6 of 89
Z2
Z1Y
Z1X
Z1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 7 of 89
X
Z3
Z2
Z1Y
Z1X
Z1
R
Z3'
Z3'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 7.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 8 of 89
Available as an option on LFZP111, 112, 113 and 114, this additional feature as
shown in Figure 5 offers instantaneous and time delayed tripping at selectable current
levels. A choice of an aided tripping scheme, either permissive overreach or blocking
is also provided, sharing the same signalling channel as the distance scheme.
When required to co-ordinate with the earth fault distance time delayed zones, the
Directional Earth Fault protection should be set to definite time delayed tripping.
However, if co-ordination with the earth fault distance is not required, for example, the
earth fault distance time delayed zones are disabled, a choice may be made between
8 inverse overcurrent curves.
With the directional earth fault protection fitted and the distance time delayed earth
fault elements disabled, the relay can be used for phase fault distance plus directional
earth fault protection, an arrangement common in many parts of the world. The Zone
1 earth fault protection is retained to give independent earth fault protection for faults
within the protected section. To prevent any possibility of overreach caused by mutual
inductance with a parallel line earthed at both ends, the residual compensation may
be set to zero.
The directional element has an in-built choice of polarising signals, which can be
negative sequence voltage, zero sequence current, zero sequence voltage and dual
zero sequence current and voltage. The negative sequence voltage polarising is
particularly valuable, because it is unaffected by mutual induction from parallel
transmission circuits. Zero sequence voltage polarising is included for compatibility
with other protection relays. The operating quantity of the directional element can
either be zero sequence current or negative sequence current depending on the
method of polarising the directional element. Thus, with negative sequence voltage
polarisation, the operating quantity is negative sequence current, whereas for zero
sequence voltage and/or zero sequence current polarisation, the operating quantity is
zero sequence current.
In the scheme, the non-directional earth fault element operates on zero sequence
current, irrespective of the method of polarising the directional element. When
negative sequence voltage polarising is selected, an automatic check is made for the
presence of negative sequence fault current, since zero sequence current can be
induced by a fault in a parallel line.
The sensitivity of the forward looking directional element used in the aided schemes is
based on DEF.F and CRX only. The DEF Forward comparator can be enabled by
either low set or high set (LDLSID or LDHSID) level detectors. DEF reverse sensitivity is
based on the DEF LOWEST (LDLSID).
To guard against incorrect tripping caused by magnetizing inrush currents when
in-zone power transformers are present, a selectable magnetizing inrush guard feature
is fitted.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 9 of 89
DEF T BU
DEF R
DEF F
B
DEF F
DEF R
DEF T BU
DEF T BU
DEF R
DEF F
B
DEF F
DEF R
DEF T BU
BLOCKING SCHEME
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.1
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 10 of 89
Section 8.
a)
Parallel lines with galvanic isolation but with high mutual coupling, where
maloperation of directional earth fault relays supplied with zero sequence
components has been experienced.
b)
Parallel lines where the combination of source and line impedance for a
double phase to earth fault on one line, causes the positive and negative
sequence currents in the healthy line to flow in one direction and the zero
sequence current in the opposite direction. Thus, resulting in maloperation
of zero sequence polarised DEF schemes operating in the Permissive
Overreach mode and sharing with the distance scheme, a common
signalling channel.
SCHEMES AVAILABLE
With the compliment of a signalling channel, models LFZP111, LFZP112 and LFZP113
have a selection of twelve schemes, whereas model LFZP114 has a choice of six. Each
being suitable for either three phase or single/three phase tripping. The schemes
available are:
MODELS LFZP111, LFZP112 AND LFZP113
BASIC DISTANCE
Basic Distance
Z1 EXTENSION
Zone 1 Extension
PUR
Permissive Underreach
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 11 of 89
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 1
Permissive Overreach
POR 1 UNBLOCK
POR 2
POR 2 UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
MODEL LFZP114
BASIC
Basic Distance
Z1 EXTENSION
PUR
Zone 1 extension
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 1
Permissive Overreach
POR 1 UNBLOCK
Permissive Underreach
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
SECTION 9.
9.1
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 12 of 89
TRANSMISSION LINES
9.2
Section 10.
UNDERGROUND CABLES
Underground cables differ from overhead lines in that their zero sequence impedance
angle can be vastly different from the positive sequence impedance angle. This angle
difference between the cable impedances can cause large errors in the measurement
of the earth fault units if the relay residual compensation is based on scalar
impedances only. To ensure correct measurement under earth fault conditions, the
relay needs to be compensated with both residual and a angular compensation, so
that the measurement is made along the earth loop impedance and not the positive
sequence impedance of the cable. These two methods of compensation are provided
in the Optimho relay.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 11.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 13 of 89
Although in most applications the reach accuracy of the relay distance comparators is
5%, greater errors can occur as a result of voltage and current transformer errors
and inaccuracies in line data from which the relay settings are calculated. To prevent
the possibility of relays tripping instantaneously for faults in the next line, it is usual
practice to set the Zone 1 reach of the relay to 80% of the protected line section and
rely on Zone 2 to cover the remaining 20% of the line. With a signal aided distance
scheme arrangement, the Zone 2 distance comparators could provide fast tripping at
both ends of the line for end zone faults.
Note Z2 must be set greater than or equal to Z1 when the Quadrilateral characteristic
is required.
Section 12.
ZONE 1 EXTENSION
Section 13.
To cater for the possibility that more than three zones of protection may be required,
the relay is provided with the option of one or two additional reach-stepped zones,
which are obtained via the Zone 1 comparators by extending their reach from Zone 1
to Z1X and/or Z1Y after suitable time delays. The two timers are started by Zone 2
and Zone 3 comparators.
Section 14.
As a general rule, the Zone 2 impedance reach is set to cover the protected line plus
50% of the shortest adjacent line. The reasoning behind the value of 50% is that Zone
2 should be able to cover at least 20% of the adjacent line, even in the presence of
typical additional infeed at the remote terminal of the protected line.
One case of additional infeed at the remote terminal occurs when the protected line is
paralleled by another line. When a fault occurs in the adjacent line, approximately
equal currents will flow in each of the parallel lines. The relay on the protected line
looking towards the fault will see an impedance which will be the sum of the protected
line impedance, plus twice the impedance of the adjacent line to the fault. If the Zone
2 reach is set to cover 50% of the adjacent line impedance, then in this parallel infeed
case, Zone 2 will effectively cover 25% of the adjacent line.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 14 of 89
In most situations, if the relay reaches 20% into the adjacent line, then faults at the
remote terminal of the protected line will be well within Zone 2 reach and so fast
operation of the Zone 2 comparators will be achieved. This is important if signal aided
tripping schemes are used.
In some situations where the protected line is long and the adjacent line is short, then
a 50% reach into the adjacent line will only be a very small overreach of the protected
line. If the protected line is paralleled by another line, then it may be that the zero
sequence mutual coupling between the two lines will be sufficient to prevent the Zone
2 comparators from seeing an earth fault at the remote terminal of the line until the
remote circuit breaker trips, preventing earth fault current flowing in the healthy
parallel circuit. In such a case, the Zone 2 setting may need to be increased slightly, to
avoid sequential or time delayed clearance of the fault at the terminal remote from the
fault.
In a parallel line situation, a fault on one line which is cleared sequentially can cause
a fault current reversal in the healthy line. If the Zone 2 settings are greater than 150%
of the protected line impedance and the Permissive Overreach, Unblocking or
Blocking scheme is used, then a fault current reversal in the healthy circuit could cause
that circuit to be incorrectly tripped unless special steps are taken. The Permissive
Overreach, the Unblocking and the Blocking schemes have been designed with
current reversal guards to prevent such maloperations. The operation of these current
reversal guards is explained in detail later, when considering some logic timer
settings. It is also recommended that Z2 reach is set such that it cannot see through a
star-delta transformer located at the remote end of the line.
Section 15.
The Zone 3 forward reach should normally be set to 1.2 times the sum of the protected
line impedance and the impedance of the longest adjacent line in order to provide an
overall time delayed back-up protection. The reverse Zone 3 offset provides back-up
protection for the busbars behind the relay and would typically be set to 25% of the
Zone 1 setting for short transmission lines (up to 30km) and 10% for long transmission
lines.
When the Blocking or Permissive Overreach with Weak Infeed scheme is being used,
Zone 3 is required to provide a blocking function when it operates without Zone 2 to
prevent the protection scheme operating for external faults. The reverse Zone 3 reach
in this case must be set to reach further than Zone 2 of the relay at the opposite end of
the line. It must also ensure that any resistive faults behind the relay that are seen by
Zone 2 of the remote end relay are also seen by the Zone 3 of the local relay, to
prevent tripping of the healthy line for external faults. As a general guide for the above
applications, it is recommended that the reverse Zone 3 reach be set directionally in
the reverse direction to the same value as the Zone 2 setting of the remote end relay.
However, if preferred, the blocking scheme Zone 3 reach can also be set
non-directionally with an offset.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 16.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 15 of 89
The Power Swing Blocking feature can be selected by means of the relay menu
displayed on the LCD indicator to any of the following conditions:
a)
b)
c)
The inner Power Swing Blocking impedance characteristic is formed by the A-B Zone 3
or Zone 2 phase fault characteristic. The additional Power Swing Blocking starter
characteristic Zone 6 is set concentric with the Zone 3 characteristic, as shown in
Figure 6a, when it is set in the forward direction as an offset lenticular/mho, but it is
set concentric with the Zone 2 mho characteristic, as shown in Figure 6b when the
Zone 3 is set reverse looking as a directional mho.
If the power system A-B phase impedance locus enters the operating area of the starter
characteristic, which has an adjustable timer setting of 20-90 milliseconds but
normally set at 50 milliseconds, and takes longer than this value to pass into the fault
characteristic, then the Power Swing Blocking unit will block the selected zones if the
A-B phase impedance does eventually pass into the fault characteristic area.
It is important to note that when the Zone 3 is set forward looking, the PSB unit is
controlled by the Zone 3 characteristic, but when the Zone 3 is set reverse looking, the
PSB unit is controlled by the Zone 2 characteristic. The purpose of the reverse looking
Zone 3 in the blocking scheme being simply to control the signal transmission and in
the Permissive Overreach scheme the Weak Infeed and current reversal guard logic.
The reversed looking Zone 3 can be selected to provide time delayed back-up if
required.
When the Power Swing Blocking feature is used, it is necessary to ensure that the
phase fault characteristic will not allow the starting characteristic to encroach into the
minimum load impedance. A minimum of 10% safety margin should be maintained
between the Power Swing Blocking starter characteristic and the minimum load
impedance.
The Power Swing Blocking feature is overridden under the following power system
conditions:
a)
b)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 16 of 89
Z6R
Z3R
Z1
Z2 Z3F
Z3R
Z6R
Z1
Z2 Z6F
Z6F
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 17 of 89
It is important to note that when Power Swing Blocking and DEF are provided with the
distance scheme, but the DEF is not used, it is essential to set the 3Io (low set) current
level detector, which is ganged to the I2 current level detector required to override the
Power Swing Blocking unit under fault conditions.
The recommended settings for the Power Swing Blocking characteristic Zone 6 forward
and reverse reach can be obtained from the following expressions:
With Zone 3 set looking in forward direction:
Zone 6 forward reach = 1.3 x Zone 3 forward reach
Zone 6 reverse reach = 0.3 x Zone 3 forward reach + Zone 3
reverse reach
With Zone 3 set looking in the reverse direction:
Zone 6 forward reach = 1.3 x Zone 2 forward reach
Zone 6 reverse reach = 0.3 x Zone 2 forward reach
With these impedance settings, the recommended timer setting TZ6 is 50ms.
When a zone is blocked during a power swing the blocking is performed at the input
to the scheme logic, i.e. the scheme logic effectively does not register operation of the
blocked zone. As a consequence, all functions derived from the blocked zones, e.g.
signal send, start contacts etc. will also be inhabited during the swing condition.
Section 17.
The resistive reach should be set to cover the desired level of earth fault resistance,
which would comprise arc-resistance and tower footing resistance. A 10% impedance
margin should be observed between the resistive reach and the minimum load
impedance.
In addition, to ensure Zone 1 reach accuracy the resistive reach should not be greater
than 15 times the Zone 1 ground loop reach, for single-point grounded radial
distribution systems. A maximum of 4 times the Zone 1 ground loop reach is
recommended for multiple grounded systems.
17.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 18 of 89
A qualitative analysis of the purpose of reach line compensation for Zone1 is given in
Figure 7.
Section 18.
The Zone 3 aspect ratio of the lenticular characteristic will need to be adjusted when it
is envisaged that there will be load encroachment problems on the Zone 3 or Power
Swing Blocking starter characteristic for a long line application. The Zone 3 aspect
ratio a/b should be set so that with the required Zone 3 forward and reverse reach
settings, the Zone 3 characteristic or, if used, the Power Swing Blocking starter has a
10% safety margin separating it from the load impedance region.
Section 19.
Maximum accuracy and sensitivity is obtained by setting the relay angle THETA Ph
equal to or to the nearest setting of the line positive sequence angle /ZL1 and THETA
N equal to or to the nearest value of /KN.ZL1 where KN is the residual compensation
factor.
Section 20.
The time settings TZ2 and TZ3 determine the time delay from detection of a fault by the
relevant zone to the operation of the trip output unit.
The relay operates for the majority of Zone 1 faults within 16-30 milliseconds. The
Zone 2 time delay should be set to allow for the longest Zone 1 operating time, or if
applicable the longest aided trip time and the circuit breaker operating times.
Generally, a Zone 2 time delay setting of 0.2-0.3 seconds is satisfactory, but longer
times may be required if the Zone 2 overlaps slower forms of protection.
Zone 3 is generally intended to provide back-up protection, even if it is being used as
a reverse 'looking' blocking element. It may be overlapping other forms of protection
such as Inverse Definite Minimum Time overcurrent relays. The Zone 3 time delay will
depend on the system to which the relay is applied, but in any case it will be longer
than the Zone 2 time delay and will typically have a setting of one second.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 19 of 89
PRE-FAULT
POWER FLOW
A
R
jX
RF
B
KRF
x
R
RF
jX
B
x
KRF
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 21.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 20 of 89
This feature is enabled by the scheme logic when the line circuit breaker has been
open for a certain time. To determine whether the line circuit breaker is open, the relay
"looks" for an "All Poles Dead" condition (voltage and level detectors have reset on
each phase). For the case where a busbar VT is used "pole dead" signals will not be
produced, but a normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be used via an
opto-isolator input, to inform the relay that the circuit breaker is open.
For single pole tripping applications, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts of each
breaker pole should be wired in series and connected to the relay, so that the relay is
made aware that all three poles of the breaker are open.
The SOTF feature becomes enabled 200 milliseconds or 110 seconds after the relay
detects the local circuit breaker has opened, depending on the setting of an option in
the relay menu display.
In the majority of applications, the SOTF enable timer will be set to 200 milliseconds,
so that the feature will be available as soon as possible after the line becomes dead.
With this short time setting, the SOTF feature will be enabled during auto-reclose dead
time, so that upon reclosure a SOTF trip is possible. This is usually advantageous for
most distance schemes, since a persistent fault at the remote end of a protected line
section can be cleared instantaneously after reclosure of the local breaker, rather than
after Zone 2 time delay.
When it is desired that a SOTF trip indication is not given after auto-reclosure, or two
shot auto-reclose is used, then the 110 seconds SOTF enable timer option should be
used. This will ensure that the SOTF feature could not be enabled during the
auto-reclose dead time. If a SOTF trip was allowed to occur on auto-reclosure, the
distance relay would also give a 'block auto-reclose' signal to the auto-reclose relay
and any second auto-reclose shot would be prevented.
SOTF tripping is only possible for the initial 250 milliseconds after the circuit breaker
closure. During this time, an instantaneous trip can occur in line with the selection
made in the relay menu. The three options available are:
a)
b)
Tripping via the operation of any current level detector provided that its
corresponding voltage level detector has not picked up within 20ms.
c)
Tripping via the operation of any distance comparator or any current level
detector provided that its corresponding voltage level detector has not
picked up within 20ms.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 21 of 89
With the relay set to give a SOTF trip for any distance comparator operation, then any
fault existing on the protected line, including a close-up three phase bolted fault would
be cleared. For the latter fault, where line voltage transformers are used, there would
be no memory voltage to allow Zone 1 or Zone 2 distance comparator operation, but
Zone 3 will operate if set forward looking as it has an offset to cover the busbars.
When the Zone 3 is set reverse looking, as a directional mho, the SOTF should be set
to give a trip via any current level detector as the Zone 3 comparators would not
operate for a close-up three phase fault on the protected line. Faults at the remote end
of the line will also be cleared instantaneously by a SOTF trip when the local circuit
breaker is closed.
In some situations, it may be possible for the magnetizing inrush current of banked
transformers at the end of a line or particularly of teed-off transformers, to cause
transient operation of the Zone 3 comparators on line energisation, resulting in an
incorrect SOTF trip. In such a situation, the SOTF trip option should be chosen, so that
SOTF tripping will only occur when a current level detector picks up without the
corresponding voltage level detector picking up.
Section 22.
With the relay cover off, the distance scheme logic programs are selected by using the
keypad and liquid crystal display on the front of the relay case. Operation of the
horizontal and vertical keys on either side of the centre SET key will gain access into
the relay menu structure and enable the user to set the relay scheme logic and settings.
With the relay cover on, access to the keypad is prevented, but it is possible to read
the relay settings and reset the relay via the two through cover push buttons labelled
'ACCEPT/READ' and 'RESET'.
Section 23.
23.1
Basic distance
(See Figure 8)
Generally applied when no auto-reclose is used
The scheme can be used without a signalling channel
The scheme is suitable for single circuit and double circuit lines fed from either one
or both ends
A major disadvantage is that not all faults within a protected section can be cleared
instantaneously
It can be provided with up to five zones by the use of three independent zones and
two optional reach-stepped zones
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
23.2
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 22 of 89
Zone 1 extension
(See Figure 9)
Generally applied when no signalling channel is available and high speed
auto-reclose is used
Normally the Zone 1 comparators reach is extended to overreach the remote end
of the protected line by the action of the Z1X reach-stepped zone which is set to
cover 120% of the protected line length
After a fault clearance, the auto-reclose relay gives a reset signal to the zone
extension logic so that the Zone 1 comparators fall back to normal Zone 1 reach
setting of 80% of the protected line
On the basis that most overhead line faults are transient in duration, the scheme will
allow fast clearance of most faults along the protected line and also those just outside
the line. Lack of discrimination is generally accepted as reclosure of the circuit
breakers will take place and the power system network restored if the fault was
transient. In the event of a permanent fault, upon reclosure the faulted line will be
taken out of service by the distance protection as in the BASIC scheme.
The scheme would not normally be used for cable circuits, although its use might be
considered for hybrid circuits
It can be provided with up to five zones by the use of three independent zones and
two reach-stepped zones
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 23 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
RELAY A
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
RELAY B
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z3
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
TZ3
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 24 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
Z1 EXT
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
Z1 EXT
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z3
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
TZ3
TZ3
RESET Z1 EXT.
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1
Z1 EXT,Z1X
Z1Y
RESET Z1 EXT.
Z1X,EXT Z1
Z1
Z1Y
TZ1X
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
23.3
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 25 of 89
23.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 26 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
CRX
Z1
SIGNALLING
CRX
Z1
CHANNEL
CTX
CTX
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z2
TZ2
Z3
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 27 of 89
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 28 of 89
communication receive logic. This signal when passed to the distance scheme logic
provides an immediate trip if the associated Zone 2 comparator had operated.
In the Permissive Overreach scheme, this condition will also produce output CRX2 to
permit tripping via the DEF scheme, if used to complement the distance scheme for
high resistance faults.
In the event of the permissive trip signal being shorted out by an internal fault, both the
guard and the trip signals would be lost. Under this condition, the communication
receive logic will give a permissive trip output via CRX1 for a short period, lasting from
the time setting of TDW (0-98 milliseconds) to the time setting of T2 (150 milliseconds)
after which the PSD line goes high and the permissive distance scheme is disabled.
The time delay of TDW is necessary in order to prevent the possibility of spurious
tripping during transient loss of guard signal (set typically to 10 milliseconds). To
activate the scheme, the guard signal must be present for the time of T1 (200ms).
23.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 29 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
CRX
CRX
CB
OPEN
&
CTX
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
CTX
&
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z2
TZ2
Z3
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
Figure 12
CB
OPEN
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
23.6
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 30 of 89
23.7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 31 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
Z3
Z3
&
CB
OPEN
&
CRX
CRX
CTX
CTX
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
&
1
&
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z2
Z2
TZ2
Z3
Figure 13
CB
OPEN
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1
Z1Y
TZ1Y
Z3
POR 2 Simplified distance scheme logic with Zone 3 reversed reach and
weak infeed echo
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 32 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
&
CB
OPEN
&
CTX
&
CRX
CRX
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
CTX
CB
OPEN
&
Z3
Z3
LDOV
&
&
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z2
TZ2
Z3
Figure 14
LDOV
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 33 of 89
To provide a high speed tripping when a line terminal open, a 'signal echo feature' is
included in the scheme logic which is initiated when a line terminal circuit breaker is open
(circuit breaker auxiliary contact initiation). By this means, the permissive overreach
scheme is able to provide fast tripping for any fault along the whole length of the protected
line.
To cater for high speed current reversals in double circuit lines when both the
protective relays and the circuit breakers are exceptionally fast, the possibility of
maloperation, due to the sequential opening of circuit breakers, is prevented by the
use of a reverse looking Zone 3.
To allow fast tripping at the sending end, in the event of a weak infeed at the
remote end, a weak infeed logic is used to echo the received signal back, if the
reversed Zone 3 has not operated.
An additional check that a voltage level detector (LDOV) has reset is necessary to
allow tripping at the weak infeed terminal after a short time delay.
If signalling channel fails, the Permissive Overreach Scheme will operate in the
conventional basic mode, except that the Zone 3 is reversed.
Send logic Z2
Permissive trip logic Z2 + CRX
Open terminal echo : CB open + CRX
Weak infeed echo : No comparator operation + CRX
Weak infeed trip : No comparator operation + LDOV reset + CRX
23.8
Blocking scheme
(See Figure 15)
This scheme requires only one signalling channel for both relays.
It uses a reverse looking Zone 3 to send the carrier signal to the remote end to
block the operation of the overreaching Zone 2.
The advantage of this scheme is that only one carrier frequency is required to
initiate blocking at both line terminals regardless of which terminal detected the
fault to be in the reverse direction and that the blocking signal is transmitted over a
healthy line.
This scheme will provide similar resistive coverage as the permissive overreach
scheme.
If a line terminal is open, fast tripping will still occur for faults along the whole of the
protected line length.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 34 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
CRX
&
SIGNALLING
CRX
CHANNEL
CTX
CTX
&
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z2
TZ2
Z3
Figure 15
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 35 of 89
If the signalling channel fails, fast tripping will occur for faults along the whole of
the protected line, but also for some faults within the next line section.
If the signalling channel is taken out of service, the blocking scheme will operate in
the conventional basic mode, except that Zone 3 is reversed.
Fast tripping will still occur at a strong source line end, for faults along the protected
line section, if there is a weak or no infeed at the other end of the protected line.
Send logic : Reverse Z3 + not Z2
Trip logic : Z2 + not CRX
23.9
Blocking 2 scheme
(See Figure 15B)
This scheme requires only one signalling channel for both relays. The use of a
duplex channel requires a larger setting on scheme timer TD.
It uses a reverse looking Zone 3 to send the carrier signal to the remote end to
block the operation of the overreaching Zone 2.
The advantage of this scheme is that only one carrier frequency is required to
initiate blocking at both line terminals regardless of which terminal detected the
fault to be in the reverse direction and that the blocking signal is transmitted over a
healthy line.
This scheme will provide similar resistive coverage as the permissive overreach
scheme.
If a line terminal is open, fast tripping will still occur for faults along the whole of the
protected line length.
If the signalling channel fails, fast tripping will occur for faults along the whole of
the protected line, but also for some faults within the next line section.
If the signalling channel is taken out of service, the blocking 2 scheme will operate
in the conventional basic mode, except that Zone 3 is reversed.
Fast tripping will still occur at a strong source line end, for faults along the protected
line section, if there is a weak or no infeed at the other end of the protected line.
Dual contact arrangement for start/stop control of the signalling channel. Both
contacts are normally open.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 36 of 89
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
Z
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
CRX
CRX
START
STOP
CTX
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
START
STOP
CTX
&
&
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
Z2
Z3
Figure 15B
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1,(Z1X),(Z1Y)
TZ2
TZ2
RELAY A
TZ3
RELAY B
TZ3
TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
Z1X
Z1
TZ1X
TZ1Y
Z1
Z1Y
Z1Y
Z1
TZ1Y
Z2
Z3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 37 of 89
Section 24.
There is a limit to the amount of arc resistance and tower footing resistance that can be
adequately covered by distance relays, since the coverage is limited by the ohmic
reach of the distance relay. If extremely high values of ground fault resistance are
expected, then an optional directional comparison earth fault scheme (DEF) with time
delay back-up features can be added to complement the distance scheme.
24.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 38 of 89
DEF T BU
DEF F
B
DEF F
DEF T BU
CRX
CRX
CTX
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
RELAY A
DEF F
&
RELAY B
AIDED
TRIP
AIDED
TRIP
1
T
Figure 16
CTX
TRIP A
TRIP B
DEF
BU TRIP
&
1
DEF
BU TRIP
DEF F
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
24.2
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 39 of 89
24.3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 40 of 89
DEF T BU
DEF R
DEF F
B
DEF F
DEF R
DEF T BU
CRX
DEF R
DEF F
&
CTX
Figure 17
CHANNEL
CRX
DEF R
CTX
AIDED
TRIP
1
AIDED
TRIP
1
T
SIGNALLING
DEF
BU TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
&
1
DEF
BU TRIP
DEF F
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 41 of 89
LDLS1O
DEF T BU
DEF R
DEF F
B
DEF F
DEF R
DEF T BU
LDLS1 O
CRX
CRX
LDLS1 O
START
START
CTX
CTX
1
DEF F
&
STOP
STOP
SIGNALLING
CHANNEL
AIDED
TRIP
DEF
BU TRIP
AIDED
TRIP
1
T
LDLS1 O
TRIP A
TRIP B
&
1
DEF
BU TRIP
DEF F
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 42 of 89
Section 25.
In double circuit lines, the fault current distribution changes when circuit breakers open
sequentially to clear the fault. With one terminal line open, the change in current
distribution can cause the directionally looking distance comparators to see the fault in
the opposite direction to the direction in which the fault was initially detected. This can
cause the Permissive Overreach, the Blocking and the DEF schemes to trip the healthy
line due to the contact race between one set of directional comparators resetting and
the other set operating.
A typical system configuration that could result in current reversals is shown in Figure
18 for a fault on line L1 close to circuit breaker B with all the circuit breakers closed,
which after circuit breaker B has opened, causes the direction of current flow in line L2
to be reversed.
25.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 43 of 89
FAULT
A
STRONG
SOURCE
L1
L2
WEAK
SOURCE
FAULT
A
L1
L2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 44 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
&
CRX
&
Z2
TP
TD
CTX
&
CURRENT REVERSAL LOGIC
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
TP
Z2D
TD
RESET
CTX
Z2C
CTX
RESET
Z2C
RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
CURRENT
REVERSAL
RELAY D
ENABLED
RELAY D
DISABLED
Figure 19
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 45 of 89
The current reversal sequence diagram shows how the relays in the healthy line are
prevented from maloperation due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers in
the faulted line and the instance in the cycle at which it takes place. After current
reversal, the Zone 2 comparators of the relay at D will initiate the transmission of the
permissive trip signal from substation D to substation C and the relay at C will be
similarly prevented from maloperation. The relays at both D and C substations being
enabled once again when the faulted line is isolated and the current reversal guard
timer setting TD has expired.
25.2
25.3
Blocking scheme
(See Figure 21)
The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when the
blocking signal transmission started by the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators is
received on a healthy line to inhibit the aided trip. A time delay TP is needed with the
Zone 2 comparators in order to allow for the blocking signal transmission time to be
received in case the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators had operated for an
external fault.
Recommended TP setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms + 16ms.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 46 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
CRX
Z2
&
Z3R
&
Z2
AIDED
TRIP
TD
&
CTX
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
Z3RD
Z3RD
TD
RESET
RESET
CTX
Z2C
Z2C RESET
CTX
RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY D
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
RELAY D
ENABLED
Figure 20
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 47 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
Z2
0
CRX
&
AIDED
TRIP
Td
Z3R
&
Z2
CTX
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
Z3RD
Z3RD
RESET
CTX
RESET
CTX
Z2C
Tp
Z2C
Td
RESET
RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY C
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
Figure 21
RELAY C
ENABLED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 48 of 89
When the current reverses and the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators reset, the
blocking signal transmission is stopped and the timer TD is started. After time TD, the
scheme resets and the relay aided trip is enabled once again.
Recommended TD setting = 20ms - minimum signalling channel reset time ms.
The current reversal sequence diagram shows how the relays in the healthy line are
prevented from maloperation due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers in
the faulted line and the instance in the cycle at which it takes place. After current
reversal, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators at substation D reset, but those at
substation C operate to send the blocking signal to substation D and inhibit the aided
trip. After the faulty line is isolated, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators will reset
and the scheme aided trip restored when the timer setting TD has expired.
25.4
Blocking 2 scheme
(See Figure 21B)
The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when the
blocking signal transmission, started by the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators, is
received to inhibit the aided trip. A time delay TP is needed with the Zone 2
comparators in order to allow time for the blocking signal transmission to be received
in case the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators had operated for an external fault.
Recommended TP setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms + 14ms.
When the current reverses and the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators reset, the
blocking signal transmission is maintained by the timer TD.
Recommended TD setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms + 14ms.
Note:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
25.5
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 49 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
&
Z2
AIDED
TRIP
TP
0
STOP CTX
&
&
Z3R
START CTX
0
TD
CURRENT REVERSAL LOGIC
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
Z3RD
Z3RD
TD
RESET
RESET
CTX
Z2C
TP
Z2C RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY C
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
Figure 21B
CTX
RESET
RELAY C
ENABLED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 50 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
CRX
&
DEF F
DEF R
AIDED
TRIP
&
TDG
DEF F
&
CTX
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
DEF RD
DEF RD
TD
RESET
RESET
CTX
DEF FC
CTX
RESET
DEF FC
RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY D
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
RELAY D
ENABLED
Figure 22 DEF permissive overreach scheme POR 1, POR 2 current rev. scheme logic
looking directional earth fault comparator, instead of the distance reversed
looking Zone 3 comparators. It uses a separate current reversal guard timer
TDG,
but it shares a common signalling channel.
Recommended TDG setting = maximum signalling channel reset time ms + 35ms.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
25.6
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 51 of 89
25.7
The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF Blocking 2 scheme logic is similar
to the distance blocking scheme, except that the operation of the scheme is controlled
by both the low set current zero sequence level detector (LDLSI0) and the reverse
looking directional element (DEF_R) instead of the distance Zone 3 comparators. It
uses a separate current reversal guard timer TPG to allow time for the blocking signal
to be received in the event of an external fault, and a second timer TDG to maintain
the blocking signal until the forward looking directional comparator (DEF_F) at the
opposite end has reset.
Recommended TPG setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms + 4ms.
Recommended TDG setting = maximum signalling channel operate time ms + 14ms.
Note:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 52 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
DEF F
&
CRX
AIDED
TRIP
TDG
DEF R
&
DEF F
CTX
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
DEF RD
DEF RD
RESET
CTX
RESET
CTX
DEF FC
TPG
DEF FC
TDG
RESET
RESET
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY C
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
Figure 23
RELAY C
ENABLED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 53 of 89
FAULT
FAULT
D
DEF RD
DEF FD
COS
CRX
&
DEF F
AIDED TRIP
TPG
&
&
DEF R
STOP CTX
START CTX
TDG
LDLSIo
CURRENT REVERSAL LOGIC
B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z1B
CB OPERATING TIME
DEF RD
LDLSIoD
TDG
TPG
CTX
CTX
DEF FC
TPG
LDLSIoC
DEF RC
DEF FC
TIME
FAULT
INCEPTION
RELAY C
DISABLED
CURRENT
REVERSAL
RELAY D RELAY C
DISABLED ENABLED
Figure 23B
CTX
RESET
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 26.
26.1
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 54 of 89
Objective
To protect the 100Km double circuit line between Green Valley and Blue River
substations using model LFZP112 in the Permissive Overreach mode with forward
looking Zone 3 comparators as per scheme POR 1 and to set the relay at Green
Valley substation (Figure 24).
26.2
System data
Line length:
100Km
Line impedances:
CT ratio:
VT ratio:
26.3
1,200/5
230,000/115
Relay settings
It is assumed that the two optional reach-stepped Zones Z1X and Z1Y are not used
and that only a three zone scheme is required.
26.4
= 0.12
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 24
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 55 of 89
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 56 of 89
The relay coarse reach KZPh should be set to the nearest value below the required
Zone 1 reach. It is important to set KZPh as high as possible, since the current setting
of the relay current level detectors is inversely proportional to KZPh and it is best to
have the relay sensitivity as high as possible.
KZPh setting 0.040 to 1.0 in steps of 0.001
Therefore, select KZPh = 1.0
KZ1 settings 1.0 to 49.98 in steps of 0.02
= 4.64
Therefore, select KZ1 = 4.64
Relay Characteristic Angle THETA Ph settings 50 to 85 in 5 steps
Therefore, select THETA Ph = 80
Actual Zone 1 reach settings = 4.64 /80 secondary
26.5
= 7.56
Therefore, select KZ2 = 7.56
Actual Zone 2 reach setting = 7.56 /80 secondary
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
26.6
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 57 of 89
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
26.7
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 58 of 89
L1
Z L0 Z L1
3Z L1
KN =
1.15/72. 9
= 0. 79 / 6. 5
3 0. 484 /79. 4
( Z L0 Z L1 )
x KZPh
3Z L1
26.8
Z6 forward reach
KZ6 = 14.48
KZ6 settings 1.0 to 49.98 in steps of 0.02
Therefore, select KZ6 = 14.48
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 59 of 89
Z6 reverse reach
26.9
Lenticular characteristic
For applications where there are likely to be problems of load encroachment on the
relay Zone 3 characteristic, or even more so if the Power Swing Blocking characteristic
Z6 is used, the lenticular shaped characteristic is available for Zone 3 and Zone 6.
The major axis of the lenticular characteristic (b) would be set in accordance with the
forward and reverse settings required, but the minor axis (a) can be selected to
provide an aspect ratio (a/b) of 1.0, 0.67 or 0.41. The aspect ratio should be chosen
to prevent the load impedance encroachment into the relay characteristic with a
minimum safety margin of 10%.
An impedance diagram showing the relay characteristics for each zone is given in
Figure 24B
26.10
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 60 of 89
Z6
Z3
Z2
Z1
GREEN VALLEY
BLUE RIVER
PSB
14
Z6
12
10
Z3
8
6
Z2
4
2
Z1
10
12
Figure 24B 230kV power system worked example using model LFZP 112 in the POR
1 mode relay settings
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
26.11
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 61 of 89
= 9.76
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 62 of 89
= 9.82
= 2.26
26.13
Current reversals
The current reversal logic available with the Permissive Overreach schemes need only
to be used when the setting of the Zone 2 comparators is greater than 1.5 times the
impedance of the protected line. In the chosen worked example, since the setting of
the Zone 2 comparators is only 1.3 times the protected line impedance, the current
reversal logic does not need to be used and the recommended settings for the current
reversal guard timer are:
TP = 98ms and TD = 0
26.14
= 4.59 + j26.05
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 63 of 89
= 38.72 /79.4
= 7.12 + j38.06
= 130.56 /74.8
= 34.23 + j125.99
= 20.74 + j93.43
= 95.70 /77.48
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 64 of 89
For a 5% reach accuracy with the Zone 1 multiplier set to unity Optimho requires at
least 2.05 volts for earth fault measurement or at least 3.55V for phase fault
measurement. For a 10% accuracy, the required voltages are 1.04V and 1.8V
respectively. For Zone 1 multipliers greater than unity, the required relay voltages for
accuracy vary linearly with the multiplier setting.
In this case, the Zone 1 multiplier KZ1 = 4.64
Thus, the required minimum voltages for a 5% reach accuracy are:
4.64 x 2.05 = 9.51V for earth faults
4.64 x 3.55 = 16.47V for phase faults
Both voltage requirements are met in this application
26.15
VK IF 1+
X
ZR + R CT + RL volts
R
I = maximum secondary fault current for a three phase fault at the Zone 1 reach
F
Neglecting the small infeed from the parallel line
Minimum source positive sequence impedance
=
2302
5,000
= 10.58 / 80
IF =
230 10
5
= 11. 238 A
3 49. 29 1, 200
3
X 48. 479
=
= 5. 41
R 8. 957
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 65 of 89
0.5
Z = Relay burden for a phase fault =
= 0.02
R
25
R
R
CT
L
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for a three phase fault at the Zone
1 reach point
V 11.238 (1 + 5.41)(0.02 + 0.5 + 0.25)
K
80.69V
Earth Fault Condition
X
VK IFE 1+ E ZRE + RCT + 2RL
RE
FE
= maximum secondary fault current for an earth fault at the Zone 1 reach
Assuming that the zero and positive sources impedances are equal
Minimum source earth loop impedance = 1.837 + j10.419
Overall source to Zone 1 reach earth loop impedance =
(1.837 + j10.419) + (16.15 + j67.38) = 17.987 + j77.799
I FE =
230 10
5
= 6. 937 A
3 79. 85 1, 200
= 79.85 /77
X E 77. 799
=
= 4. 32
R E 17. 987
Z
RE
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for an earth fault at the Zone 1
reach point
V 6.937 (1 + 4.32)(0.02 + 0.5 + 0.5)
K
37.64V
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 66 of 89
It is also required that at the current transformer knee-point voltage, which from the
above calculations should not be less than 80.69 volts, the exciting current should be
less than 0.5A.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
26.16
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 67 of 89
Section 27.
27.1
Objective
To protect the 10Km single circuit line between Ironbridge and Windy Hill substation
using model LFZP111 in the Blocking mode and to set the relay at Ironbridge with the
Quadrilateral characteristic for earth faults. It is required to measure high resistance
faults which may be resistive up to 50 and to complement the distance scheme with
the directional earth fault scheme (see Figure 25).
27.2
System data
Line length:
10Km
Line impedances:
CT ratio:
VT ratio:
27.3
500/1
132000/110
Relay settings
It is assumed that the two optional reach-stepped zones Z1X and Z1Y are not used
and that only a three zone scheme is required.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 68 of 89
Figure 25 132kV power system worked example using model LFZP 111 in the blocking
mode
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
27.4
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 69 of 89
500 / 1
= 0. 416
132 , 000 / 110
KZ1 KZPh =
1. 46 /69
= 0. 292 /69
5
27.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 70 of 89
KZ2 =
4. 576
= 3.143
0. 292 5
27.6
3. 66
= 2. 50
0. 292 5
27.7
Quadrilateral characteristic
For this example, the quadrilateral characteristic has been chosen for earth faults,
because the line to be protected is short and very high values of arc-resistance need to
be measured.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
27.8
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 71 of 89
110
3 1
= 63.58 secondary
20.8
= 4.16
5
Therefore, select KR = 5
Actual resistive reach = 5 x 5 = 25 ohms secondary
Check on ratio resistive reach /Zone 1 earth loop impedance reach
Zone 1 earth loop impedance reach =
1. 46 + 1. 46 + 3. 65
3
= 2.19 secondary
Ratio resistive reach/Zone 1 earth loop reach =
25
= 11. 41
2.19
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
27.9
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 72 of 89
L1
Z L0 Z L1
3Z L1
KN =
0. 64 /73.8
= 0.48/4.8
3 0. 44 /69
( Z L0 Z L1 )
x KZPh
3Z L1
27.10
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 73 of 89
Z3
Z2
Z1
IRONBRIDGE
WINDY HILL
5
4
3
Z2
2
1
Z1
2
1
Z3
2
PHASE FAULTS
3
5
4
3
Z2
2
1
30
25
20
15
10
Z1
10
15
20
25
1
2
Z3'
EARTH FAULTS
Figure 25B
the
blocking mode relay settings
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 74 of 89
The sensitivity of the forward looking directional element is set by either DEF LOWSET
or DEF HIGHSET (if aided tripping selected). Reverse sensitivity is set by DEF
LOWSET.
(i)
Earth fault at Windy Hill substation busbars fed from Trent Bridge substation
132
1000
= 17.42
3 132 103
= 875.81A primary
Equivalent CT secondary current =
( ii )
875.81
= 1. 75 A
500
Earth fault at Ironbridge substation busbars fed from Tagus River substation.
Tagus River maximum source impedance =
1322
1500
= 116
.
3 132 103
= 868.36A primary
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 75 of 89
Equivalent CT secondary current =
868. 36
= 1. 736 A
500
b)
That the current setting of the forward looking current level
detector is 1.5 times the reverse looking current level detector.
Therefore, the recommended current settings assuming that the
maximum zero sequence current unbalance is 5% would be:
Reverse looking current level detector (3Io Low set) 0.1A
Forward looking current level detector (3Io High set) 0.15A
c)
d)
definite
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
e)
27.11
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 76 of 89
= 1.261 + j3.28
= 6.736 + j20.733
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 78 of 89
) (
) = 7.372 + j29.546
2 617
. 8 + j25.374 + 9.761+ j37.892
3
= 30.45 /76
) (
2 1261
.
+ j3.28 + 2.694 + j8.293
3
= 1.738 + j3.857
= 4.23 /65.7
4.23
34.62
= 7.758 V
For a 5% reach accuracy with the Zone 1 multiplier set to unity Optimho requires at
least 2.05V for earth fault measurement or at least 3.55V for phase fault measurement.
For a 10% accuracy, the required voltages are 1.04V and 1.8V respectively. For
Zone 1 multipliers greater than unity, the required relay voltages for accuracy vary
linearly with the multiplier setting.
In this case, the Zone 1 multiplier KZ1 = 1.0
Therefore, both voltage requirements are met in this application
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
27.12
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 79 of 89
VK IF 1+
X
ZR + R CT + RL V
R
I = Maximum secondary fault current for a three phase fault at the Zone 1 reach.
F
Minimum source positive sequence impedance =
132 2
= 3. 48 /80
5, 000
132 103
1
IF =
= 9.69 A
3 15.74 500
X 14. 922
=
= 2. 97
R 5. 018
Z
R
CT
R
L
the
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for a three phase fault at the Zone
1 reach point
V 9.69 (1 + 2.97)(0.08 + 2.5 + 0.5)
K
118.48V
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
FE
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 80 of 89
= Maximum secondary fault current for an earth fault at the Zone 1 reach
Assuming that the zero and positive source impedances are equal
Minimum source earth loop impedance = 0.604 + j3.427
Trent Bridge to Ironbridge earth loop impedance =
) (
) = 4.355 + j12.387
2 3153
.
+ j8215
.
+ 6.76 + j20.733
3
I FE =
132 103
1
= 7.34 A
3 20.78 500
X E 19.671
=
= 2.937
R E 6.697
Z
RE
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for an earth fault at the Zone 1
reach point
Section 28.
FAULT LOCATOR
The distance from the relaying point to the fault can be quickly and conveniently
measured and displayed by the fault locator unit, when fitted, in the Optimho relay.
The principle of measurement is based on the computation by means of an algorithm,
which takes into account the pre-fault load current and the infeed from the remote end
and if selected the mutual coupling between parallel circuits.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 82 of 89
Fault location is computed when the relay does any start or distance trip (selectable by
the menu) but faults outside the protected line are based on the protected line
impedance. Faulted phase information is displayed by the distance relay directly on
the LCD. When fault location computation is completed, (this may take several
seconds), the location is displayed by pressing the ACCEPT/READ key and reviewing
the fault record.
When the fault occurs and before the circuit breaker has opened, the fault locator
stores ten cycles of pre-trip and six cycles of post-trip data. The algorithm finds the
instant of fault by scanning the stored faulted phase current data and determines the
pre-fault and fault values.
By the user interface, the fault locator can be set in Kilometres, miles, or as a
percentage of the protected line length and displayed on the LCD. Likewise, the values
of primary current and voltage can be expressed in primary values and displayed on
the LCD unit.
28.1
Mutual Compensation
Analysis of an earth fault on one circuit of a double circuit line shows that a distance
relay at one end of a faulted line will tend to overreach while that at the other end will
tend to underreach. In most applications the degree of underreach is acceptable, but
in cases of long lines with high mutual coupling or where precise fault location
measurement is required, mutual zero sequence compensation can be used to improve
the distance measurement. In practice, the positive and negative sequence coupling
between parallel lines is insignificant and only the zero sequence mutual coupling
needs to be considered.
To illustrate the principle involved in the application of mutual compensation, consider
the sequence networks shown in Figure 26 for a double circuit line with an earth fault
on line AB and where y is the per unit distance of the fault from end A.
A fault locator at terminal A having zero sequence compensation only will be supplied
with voltage V and current I as given by the expressions:
R
R
) (
) (
) (
Z
Z
Z
= Ia1 + Ia2 + L0 Ia0
ZL1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 83 of 89
Z
y ZL1Ia1 + Ia2 + L0 Ia0 + M0 Ic0
ZL1
ZL1
ZR =
Z
(
) (
)
) (
ZM0 Ic0
ZR = y ZL11+
But I = I
=I
for an earth fault,
a1 a2 a0
Therefore:
Ic0
ZM0
ZR = y ZL1 1+
( )
Now, if in addition to the zero sequence compensation, we add to the fault locator the
mutual compensation:
Z
Z
IR = Ia1 + Ia2 + Ia0 + L0
1 Ia0 + M0 Ic0
ZL1
ZL1
Z
y ZL1Ia1 + Ia2 + L0 Ia0 + M0 Ic0
ZL1
ZL1
ZR =
Z
Ia1 + Ia2 + L0 Ia0 + M0 Ic0
ZL1
ZL1
= y ZL1
Which is the correct distance from the fault locator to the fault.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
28.2
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 84 of 89
Please note that when Optimho is supplied with both DEF and Fault Locator
the relay can only be connected to one current input and that the user must
make the choice via the relay menu for either DEF current polarisation or
Fault Locator mutual compensation.
ZL
ZS
ZM
y ZL
SOURCE
( 1-y )
ZL
C1
a1
C2
a2
C0
Z L1
Z S1
y Z L1
( 1-y )
Z L1
( 1-y )
Z L2
( 1-y )
Z L0
Z L2
Z S2
y Z L2
Z L0
Z S0
Z M0
I
Figure 26
a0
y Z L0
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 85 of 89
P2
P1
LINE 1
OPTIMHO
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
MUTUAL COMPENSATION
P2
P1
LINE 2
OPTIMHO
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
MUTUAL COMPENSATION
Figure 27
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
28.3
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 86 of 89
M0
= 0.1068 + j0.5712
= 0.581 /79.4/Km
=Z
=
M0
/3Z
L1
0.581 /79.4
3 0.484 /79.4
= 0.4 /0
Required fault locator setting
= 0.4 /0 x /80
= 0.4 /80
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 87 of 89
CT ratio setting:
Section 29.
When only three pole tripping is used and no signalling channel is available, a novel
way to achieve an accelerated trip for unbalanced faults at the end zones of the
protected line is the `Loss of Load feature'.
It is based on the operation of Zone 2 comparators and the resetting of the healthy
phase(s) current level detectors. Load current is detected by either the LOW SET or the
HIGH SET current level detectors as selected on the relay menu. Before an accelerated
trip can occur load current must have been present prior to the occurrence of the fault.
The loss of load current in the health phase(s) opens a window of 40ms during which
time an accelerated trip can take place, if the Zone 2 comparators have operated. The
accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms in order to avoid the possibility of a Loss of Load
trip being produced during the clearance of an external fault due to pole scatter
opening of the circuit breaker.
In connection with this feature, it is important to note that the sensitivity of the current
level detectors is linked to the setting of the coarse adjustment KZPh and this current
sensitivity varies in the inverse ratio. That is, it is 5%In for the LOW SET and 7.5%In for
the HIGH SET at the reference setting of KZPh = 1 but they vary in accordance with
the expression 0.05In/KZPh for the LOW SET and 0.075In/KZPh for the HIGH SET for
other values of KZPh. Also that the Zone 2 comparators are gated with the current
level detectors so that on the clearance of external faults, the possible loss of load
causing all the current level detectors to reset would immediately block the Zone 2
comparator and thus avoid an unnecessary trip. Likewise operation of the Switch on to
Fault feature (SOTF) or a protection trip via the distance disables the Loss of Load
feature.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 88 of 89
Although, the main usefulness of the Loss of Load feature is for use with the BASIC
scheme when no signalling channel is available, it can nevertheless be used in
conjunction with any three pole only tripping scheme to provide high speed back-up
clearance for end zone faults on failure of the signalling channel.
When selected for use with plain or tapped circuits it is essential to note the
relationship between the load current and/or standing current and the current level
detectors should be:
a)
b)
That under end zone fault conditions the healthy phase(s) standing
current is less than the effective setting of the selected level
detectors.
29.1
500 / 5
= 0.1666
69000 / 115
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 89 of 89
= 0.266 secondary
0. 05 5
= 0. 94 A
0. 266
5
= 0. 005 A Secondary (negligible)
500
For the Loss of Load feature to function, the line load current under normal healthy
conditions must be greater than the low set current level detector setting of 0.94A
(18.8% of rated current) to satisfy the requirement that load current must have existed
prior to the occurrence of the fault.
The current remaining in the healthy phase(s) when the remote circuit breaker is open
due to the internal fault must be less than the low set current level detector setting of
0.94A to allow the level detector(s) to reset, thereby detecting a `loss of load'
condition. In this example, this current is the line charging current of only 0.005A.
Long transmission lines
Line length: 150Km
Power system voltage:115KV
Line impedance: Z = 0.4 ohm/Km
1
Line charging current: 0.15A/Km
CT ratio: 1000/5
VT ratio: 115000/115
Required Zone 1 reach is to be 80% of the line impedance.
Ratio of secondary to primary impedance =
1000 / 5
= 0. 2
11500 / 115
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 90 of 89
0. 05 5
= 0. 25 A
1. 0
5
100
= 01125
.
A secondary
Selecting the high set current level detectors, which have 1.5 times the low
set setting.
and/or
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
b)
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 91 of 89
Decreasing the KZPh setting and adjusting all the distance multipliersto
maintain the required zone reaches.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Section 30.
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 92 of 89
The concept of multiple setting groups is a recent innovation in distance relays, made
possible since all settings are stored in non-volatile (EEPROM) memory, rather than
being linked to the position of setting switches, as was the case with earlier relays.
Optimho can store up to eight independent groups of settings. The active group is
selected either locally via the menu or remotely via the serial RS232 communications
using a modem.
The ability to quickly reconfigure the relay to a new setting group may be desirable if
changes to the system configuration demand new protection settings.
Typical examples where this feature can be used include single bus installations with a
transfer bus and double bus installations with or without a separate transfer bus, where
the transfer circuit breaker or bus coupler is used to take up the duties of the by-passed
feeder circuit breaker when both the circuit breaker and the current transformers are
by-passed.
In the case of a double bus installation when only two buses are provided it is usual
for bus 1 to be referred to as the main bus and bus 2 as the reserve bus, and for the
by-pass circuit isolator to be connected to bus 2 as shown in Figure 28. This
arrangement avoids the need for a current transformer reversed polarity switch that
would be required if both buses are to be used for by-pass purposes.
The standby relay, associated with the transfer circuit breaker or the bus coupler, can
be programmed with the individual setting required for each of the outgoing feeders.
For by-pass operation the appropriate setting group can be selected as required.
This facility can be extremely usefully in the case of unattended substations were all the
switching can be controlled remotely. Remote control of the relay settings removes the
need for a skilled engineer to travel to site to change the relay settings.
A further use for this novel feature of the relay is the ability to provide alternative
setting for teed feeders or double circuit transmission lines with mutual coupling, for
use when one line is out of service and grounded at both ends.
Similar alternative settings could be required to cover different operating criteria in the
event of the signalling channel or auto-reclose equipment failing, or alternative system
configuration (i.e. lines being switched in or out).
All relays leave the factory with all the setting groups programmed the same and
setting group 1 selected. For those users not requiring multiple setting groups it is
strongly recommended that the active setting group number be left unchanged.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 1
Page 93 of 89
MAIN BUS
RESERVE BUS
21
21
FEEDER 1
Figure 28
OPTIMHO
STANDBY RELAY
21
FEEDER 2
CHAPTER 2
DESCRIPTION, TECHNICAL DATA
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Contents
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.
3.
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.8
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 1 of 10
Page
INTRODUCTION
General
Features
Benefits
Operating principles
Hardware structure
MECHANICAL LAYOUT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
User interface
Keypad
Serial port
Parellel port
Indication LEDs
Relay available LED.
Alarm LED
Trip LED.
Visual indication of faults or events
View/scroll settings/data
Menu system
Default level
Time-out feature.
Multiple setting groups
How settings and records are stored
Setting trap
Operating the menu
Commission tests
Contact control
On load directional test
Power swing test
Monitor option
Output option
Communications
Access level
Serial Control
Active Port
Baud Rate
Protocol
Control Lines
Communications and multiple setting groups
Fault Records.
Viewing Fault Records
Clearing Fault Records
Metering
1
1
1
2
2
2
7
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
14
18
20
20
21
21
24
25
26
36
36
37
37
38
39
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
42
42
43
43
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 2 of 10
Contents
Page
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.12
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.12.4
3.12.5
3.12.6
3.12.7
3.12.8
3.13
3.13.1
3.13.2
3.13.3
3.13.4
3.13.5
3.13.6
3.13.7
3.13.8
3.13.9
3.14
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.3
3.14.4
3.14.5
3.14.6
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
44
44
45
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
53
54
54
57
60
61
61
61
64
71
71
71
72
73
73
75
75
75
76
78
78
78
79
79
81
83
86
86
86
88
90
Print option
Printing to the parallel port
Printing to serial port .
Identifiers
Group identifier
Software version.
Default display
Calendar clock
Format
Default time & date
Setting time & date
Clock reference
Settings
Contact configuration
Scheme
Distance
Block autoreclose block auto-reclose
VT supervision
Start indication
DEF
Fault locator
Serial communications
Introduction.
Security
Control of serial communications from the relay menu
Hardware connections
Logon procedure
K-Bus interface
Modem requirements
Recommended modems
Optimho serial communication protocol
Test features
Contact control
On load dir test
PwrSwg test
Monitor option
Output options
Parallel test socket
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The comparator
Fundamentals of the comparator
Action of the comparator
Exclusion of noise
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Contents
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.8
5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
Pge
Polarising arrangements
Partially cross polarised mho
Synchronous polarising
Offset mho characterisitic
The lenticular characteristic
The quadrilateral characteristic
Two phase to ground faults (quadrilateral characteristic
The offset quadrilateral
Operate and polarising signals LFZP11x
Level detectors
Introduction
Inhibition of the comparator
Single pole tripping
Phase section
Other level detectors
Directional overcurrent ground fault protection (DEF)
Introduction
Implementation
Directional elements
Level detectors
Operation in single pole tripping schemes
Operation with voltage transformer supervision
Magnestising inrush current detector
Polarising
Negative sequence filters
Directional overcurrent backup protection
Fault locator
Introduction
Basic theory for ground faults
Data acquisition
Cyclic buffer processing
Fourier filtering
Distance to fault calculation
Mutual compensation
Metering
SCHEME FUNCTIONS
Level detector pole dead logic
Voltage transformers supervision (VTS)
Purpose
Principle of operation
Outputs
Implemetation
Level detector settings
Speed of operation
Contents
5.2.7
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 3 of 10
95
96
99
100
100
101
102
104
105
120
120
120
121
121
122
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
129
129
129
135
135
136
138
139
141
141
145
145
150
150
152
152
152
152
152
154
154
Page
154
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.14.1
5.14.2
5.15
5.15.1
5.15.2
5.15.3
5.15.4
5.12.5
5.15.6
5.15.7
5.1
5.17
5.18
5.19
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
Contents
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 4 of 10
155
155
155
155
156
156
156
157
157
159
162
168
169
169
170
174
174
177
179
183
186
187
187
188
192
192
194
194
194
195
195
196
205
205
208
208
211
211
211
211
212
Page
215
215
223
223
223
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.4.11
6.4.12
6.4.13
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
Main loop
Timers
Input routine
Output routine
Power supply unit GJ0236
Introduction
Operation
Main microcontroller board ZJ0138
Versions
Introduction
Operation - computer system
Main microcontroller
Slave microcontroller - timers
Identifier circuit
Transceiver and latch circuits - external bus control
External control lines - RD, WR, RS and R/W
EEPROM - non-volatile memory
Serial communication
Monitor circuits
Clock reference circuit
Accessing external memory - bus cycle timing
Front Module GJ0240 (board ZJ0137/ZJ0166
Versions
Mechanical
Liquid crystal display
Keypad operation
Address/Data Bus Checking Circuit
Parallel Port
Indication LEDs
Serial port
Optical isolator board ZJ0133
Introduction
Voltage rating
Implementation
Input module GJ0233
Introduction
Voltage input circuits
Current Input circuits
Optional current circuits
Contents
6.7.5
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
6.9
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 5 of 10
224
224
228
229
231
231
232
234
234
234
235
236
236
236
237
237
238
238
239
239
240
244
244
244
244
245
246
246
249
249
251
251
251
251
253
253
253
255
256
Page
257
263
263
263
264
264
264
265
267
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 6 of 10
6.9.1
Introduction
267
6.9.2
Operation
267
6.10
Zone 3/Zone 6 offset lenticular comparator board (ZJ0131)
272
6.10.1
Introduction
272
6.10.2
Operation
272
6.11
Zone 1/Zone 2/Zone 3 quadrilateral comparator board (ZJ0132)
277
6.11.1
Introduction
277
6.11.2
Operation
277
6.12
Directional overcurrent ground fault protection board (ZJ0139)
284
6.12.1
Introduction
284
6.12.2
Comparators
284
6.12.3
Comparator input signals
284
6.12.4
Directional overcurrent backup protection
286
6.12.5
Magnetising inrush current detector
286
6.13
Fault Locator module GJ0277
288
6.13.1
Introduction
288
6.13.2
80C 186 processor
288
6.13.3
Memory
289
6.13.4
Data and address line buffering
289
6.13.5
Eight channel 12 bit data acrquisition system
289
6.13.6
Watch-dog timer and reset circuit
291
6.13.7
Eight bit parallel communication to protection
291
6.13.8
Mode link connections
291
6.10.9
Test serial I/O port
292
6.13.10 Test eight bit parallel output port
292
6.14
Output relay board ZJ0140
294
6.14.1
Mechanical arrangement
294
6.14.2
Circuit operation description
294
6.14.3
Noise suppression
296
6.14.4
Contact connections to terminal block
297
6.14.5
Operating time and power dissipation
297
6.14.6
Output option
297
6.14.7
Monitor option
297
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Contents
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.5
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
8.6.7
Page
TECHNICAL DATA
Input ratings
Maximum overlaid ratings
Burdens
Distance elements
Settings
Accuracy of distance elements
Current sensitivity
Timers
Polarising
Operate and reset times
Switch on to fault (SOTF)
Voltage transformers supervision (VTS)
Power swing blocking (PSB)
Block auto-reclose
Current transformer requirements
Directional earth fault (DEF)
Fault location and instrumentation
Output contacts
Dimensions
Serial communications
Environmental withstand
Mechanical durability
Voltage withstand
High voltage withstand
Electrical Environment
OPTIMHO DISTANCE RELAY EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Power supply (Vx1)
AC voltage
AC current
Optical isolators
Breaker open
Relay blocked
Single pole open
Unblocking schemes
Serial communications port
Output connections
Output relays for LFZP111 without DEF
Output relays for LFZP111 With DEF
Output relays for LFZP112 without DEF
Output relays for LFZP112 with DEF
Output relays for LFZP113
Output relays for LFZP114 without DEF
Output relays forLFZP114 with DEF
Contents
8.6.8
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 7 of 10
301
301
301
302
302
302
305
305
305
306
306
315
316
316
316
317
317
321
322
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
328
328
328
328
328
329
329
332
332
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
341
page
Reserved
343
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.9
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 8 of 10
344
FIGURES
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
Figure 4-23
Figure 4-24
Figure 4-25
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28
Figure 4-29
Figure 4-30
Figure 4-31
Figure 4-32
Figure 4-33
Figure 4-34
Figure 4-35
Figure 4-36
Selection chart
Electrical structure LFZP 11x series
Quietprocessing area
Module earthing arrangement
Front panel
Typical fault record print out for relay without fault locator
Typical fault record print out for relay with fault locator
Data transfer within optimho
Operation of setting trap
Typical settings print out (LFZP 11x with DEF & fault locator
Serial communications hardware connections
Sequence comparator voltages for mho characteristics
Comparator logic variables
Action of counter in comparator
Effect of high-frequency interference
Effect of exponentialoffset
Sequence comparator
Action of synchronous polarising
Resistive expansion of partially cross - polarised mho
Zone 1/1X.1Y/2 polarising arangement LFZP 111/112/113/114
Comparison of polarised characteristics
Critical angle
Critical angle
Synchronous polarising healthy live line conditions
Synchronous polarising faulty line conditions
Sequence comparator voltages for offset mho characteristic
Lenticular characteristic
Lenticular charac eristic block diagram
Quadrilateral Zone 1
Behaviour for a-b-g fault
Guard Zone logic
Quadrilateral Zone 3
Level detector gating of distance comparators
Level detector
Level detector inhibiting of distance comparators
Biased reference level
Biased neutral current level detectors
Simplified DEF block diagram
DEF control & backup logic
Simplified DEF inhibit and control logic
Principle of magnetising inrush detector
Adaptive negative sequence filters
Two machine equivalent circuit
Superimposed symmetrical components sequence diagram for A-N fault
Optimho fault locator data selection
Optimho fault locator data windows
Optimho fault locator selection of fault current zero
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-8b
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-16b
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-20b
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-22B
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 9 of 10
Pole dead logic
Voltage tansformer supervision logic
Low set & high set level detectors gating of comparators
SOTF logic
Characteristic using zone 3
PSB characteristic using Zone 2
Power swing blocking logic
Basic scheme logic
Loss of load accelerated trip feature
Zone 1 extension scheme
Communication receive logic standard schemes
Communication receive leogic unblocking schemes
PUR Scheme
POR 1 scheme
POR 2 scheme
POR 2 weak infeed tripping scheme
Blocking scheme
Blocking 2 scheme
Current reversal in double circuit lines
Current reversal
Current reversal POR 2 & POR 2WI trip schemes
Current reversal Blocking Scheme
Current reversal Blocking 2 Scheme
Current reversal DEF POR 1, Por 2 & Por 2 WI trip schemes
Current reversal DEF blocking scheme
Current reversal DEF Blocking 2 Scheme
Bandpass Filter, memory & count 4 control
Trip Latching logic
Block autoreclose logic
External fault locator start logic
Self monitoring
Monitoring of anomalous conditiions
Digital bus check hardware
Digital bus check cycle
Watchdogs monitoring
Main software loop
Power supply GJ236
Main microcontroller ZJ0138
Program memory read cycle timing
Address decoding circuit for external bus control
Front Panel ZJ137/ZJ166
ZJ0133 optical isolator board
Input board 1 ZJ134
Input board 2 ZJ135
Voltage input circuits
Action of switched bandpass filter
Current input circuits
Level Detectors ZJ136
Zone 1/Zone 2 shaped mho ZJ0130
Directional inhibits and voltage memory processor ZJ0130
Zone 3/Zone 6 offset mho/ lenticular selectable one 3 reverse aped mho zj013
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-18
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 10 of 10
Inhibit comparator controller ZJ0131
Zone 1/Zone 2/Zone 3 quadrilateral ZJ0132
Directional inhibit and Z1 guard Zone logic ZJ0132
Sidelines & pole dead inhibits forward & reverse inhibits ZJ0132
DEF ZJ0139
Fault locator ZJ0165
Output relay board for ZJ0140 & ZJ0140 003
Output relay board ZJ0140 002
Output contact connections to terminal blocks
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating Times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical operating times
Zone 1 typical opearting times
IEC Characteristics(time multiplier=1
American characteristics (time multiplier=1
Arrangement & outline panel mounting horizontal
Arrangement & outline rack mounting
Arrangement & outline panel mounting vertical
Typical external connection diagram
Typical external connection diagram with mutual zero sequence input
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 1 of 345
Section 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
General
Optimho is produced in several models, each suitable for a specific range of
applications. The LFZP 11x group of relays provide protection for high voltage
transmission lines and underground cables. Table 1 provides a summary of the features
of the LFZP 11x series. Selection of the appropriate model for the application involved
may be aided by the use of the selection chart, Figure 1-1. The complete range of
relays is detailed in Publication R4056.
1.2
Features
The LFZP 11X range of the Optimho relays provide the following features :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Optional fault location with data recording for post fault analysis
and instrumentation functions.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
1.3
1.4
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 2 of 345
Benefits
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Operating principles
All models of LFZP11X are full scheme distance relays, having a full set of measuring
elements for each main zone of protection.
The measuring elements use micro controllers to produce a direct software equivalent of
the phase sequence comparators used in Optimho's forerunners, Micromho and
Quadramho. This phase sequence comparator design is well proven, having
accumulated several thousand relay years of successful operating experience.
The phase sequence comparators and level detectors use logic processing to achieve
immunity from maloperation due to noise, such as harmonic distortion, travelling wave
effects, high and low frequency capacitor voltage transformer transients and current
transformer saturation. Operation of the phase sequence comparators and level
detectors can only occur if the input signals are dominated by power frequency
components. Filters are used to ensure this dominance and to optimise the operating
times.
1.5
Hardware structure
All models are built up from a small range of standard printed circuit boards used as
modular building blocks. All models use the same relay case, power supply unit, and
front panel. The relay hardware is bus-structured to allow printed circuit boards to be
plugged into the case in different combinations.
Figure 1-2 is a schematic representation of the electrical structure of the LFZP 11x
series.
The hardware uses several micro controllers to provide the functions of comparators,
level detectors, etc. A main micro controller uses the digital bus to read outputs from the
subsidiary micro controllers, read input signals from the outside world via optically
coupled isolators, communicate with the user interface and perform scheme logic, serial
communications, monitoring and output contact functions.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 3 of 345
Settings, indications, and fault records are stored in non-volatile memory, i.e.
unaffected by loss of dc supply. The layout of the relay case follows the `quiet region'
arrangement introduced in Micromho and Quadramho (see Section 2, Mechanical
Layout).
All settings and records are accessible from the integral user interface, or if preferred,
by the use of a `dumb' terminal connected to the serial communication socket on the
relay front panel. It is also possible to communicate with the relay remotely via the rear
mounted modem serial communication socket. (see Section 3.13)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
LFZP Model
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 4 of 345
111
112
113
114
Phase Distance
Ground Distance
DEF
Fault Location with
Mutual Compensation
o
o
o
o
o
o
Overhead Lines
Underground Cables
18
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z1X
Z1Y
18
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z1X
Z1Y
18
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z1X
Z1Y
12
Z1
Z2
Z1X
Z1Y
24
24
24
24
Schemes
BASIC
Z1 EXTENSION
PUR
PUR UNBLOCK
POR1
POR1 UNBLOCK
POR2
POR2 WI TRIP
POR2 UNBLOCK
POR2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
Distance Characteristic
Z1,Z1X,Z1Y,Z2 Phase
Z1,Z1X,Z1Y,Z2 Ground
Z3 Phase
Z3 Ground
m
q/m
L
Q/L
m
m
L
L
m
m
L
L
m
m
DEF Polarising
Neg. Seq. Volts
Zero Seq. Currents
Zero Seq. Volts
Zero Seq. Volts+Current
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 5 of 345
START
TYPE OF SYSTEM
OVERHEAD
TRANSMISSION
LINES
UNDERGROUND
CABLES
YES
YES
QUADRILATERAL GROUND
FAULT ELEMENTS
LFZP113
OPTIONAL FAULT LOCATOR
(BUT SEE SECTION 4.5.1)
NO DEF
YES
NO
LFZP111
OPTIONAL DEF
OPTIONAL FAULT
LOCATOR
YES
LFZP112
OPTIONAL DEF
OPTIONAL FAULT LOCATOR
Figure 1-1
Selection chart
NO
LFZP114
OPTIONAL DEF
OPTIONAL FAULT LOCATOR
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 1-2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 6 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 7 of 345
b)
Within the ac current and voltage input module, isolating transformers have
screens to minimise primary to secondary capacitance coupling, thereby
attenuating common-mode interference.
The efficiency of any screen is defined more by the electrical strength of the
connection to the common rail or earth than by the design of the screen
itself, so the transformers are mounted on a metal plate and the
transformer screens are connected directly to this plate by short thick wires.
This ensures a low inductance between the screens and earth. A low
inductance is more important than low resistance because of the high rates
of rise of currents that exist in screen connections under interference
conditions.
The screen plate itself is connected to the relay case earth by a wide wiping
contact attached to the top of the module frame.
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 8 of 345
INPUT/
OUTPUT
1 2
3 4
Ribbon
cable
Interface
Area
PROCESSING
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AC
INPUT
12
13
"Quiet" Area
Interface
Area
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 2-2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 9 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 10 of 345
User Interface
The operator interface of the Optimho LFZP range of relays consists of:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The operator interface is used to enter settings and obtain information from the relay.
The front panel is shown in Figure 3-1.
3.1.1
Keypad
The keypad consists of four cursor (arrow) keys mounted in a cruciform pattern, a RESET
key, a SET key and a ACCEPT/READ key. With the transparent front cover in position,
only the RESET and ACCEPT/READ keys can be operated via the push buttons mounted
on the transparent front cover.
Removal of the front cover is necessary to gain access to the four cursor keys and the
SET key. No aspect of the relay operation can be changed without using these keys,
provided the serial communications facility is not in use.
The function of each cursor key is as follows:
UP arrow key
DOWN arrow key
LEFT arrow key
RIGHT arrow key
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 11 of 345
Clear LCD and LED indications after a protection trip, start, or power
swing has occurred.
Reset the VT supervision alarm contact, LCD and LED indication, and
optional block, after a voltage supply failure has occurred and has
subsequently been corrected.
Ignore any newly entered settings.
Scroll information groups when in View/Scroll mode.
Log off serial communications.
Serial port
Each serial port enables communication via a remote terminal or computer. The rear
(MODEM) port is provided primarily for communication over telephone networks using
a modem. The front (LOCAL) port is provided primarily for communication via a
computer in order to load settings or extract records.
3.1.3
Parallel port
The parallel port is used for driving a local printer or parallel I/O connected
test/monitoring equipment.
3.1.4
Indication LED's
The indication LED's work in conjunction with the LCD to display the current status of the
relay.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.1.5
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 12 of 345
g)
3.1.6
Alarm LED
The ALARM LED is used to signal either :
a)
b)
Generally the ALARM LED flashes for the above conditions until the alarm is accepted
by pressing the ACCEPT/READ key. If the alarm condition is accepted the ALARM LED
will turn on permanently. For alarms initiated by faults or events on the power system
the ALARM LED can be turned off either by :
a)
b)
Pressing the RESET key, provided the alarm has been accepted, i.e. is
not flashing.
A flashing ALARM LED may, under some conditions, revert to being permanently on or
off for the duration of the condition, these conditions being :
a)
b)
c)
d)
3.1.7
Trip LED
The TRIP LED is turned on when a protection trip has occurred, it can only be turned off
when either :
a)
b)
The RESET key is pressed, provided the ALARM LED is permanently on,
i.e. alarm has been accepted.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 13 of 345
Figure 3-1
Front panel
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 14 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 15 of 345
does not initiate the fault locator measuring elements (i.e. VT fuse fail, power swing,
starts (only if blocked), weak infeed trips, or relay blocked), only the first page of fault
information and the second page of time/date information is available. For these cases,
if the fault locator is not fitted; the ALARM LED will stop flashing when the time/date
page is viewed by pressing the ACCEPT/READ key, if the fault locator is fitted; the
ALARM LED will stop flashing when the first page of fault data is reviewed after the
time/date page has been viewed. The fault LCD and LED indications can then be
cleared by pressing the RESET key, provided the fault or event is not still active.
Detection of a power swing is indicated by the ALARM LED flashing and the message
'PwrSwg' on the LCD. If the power swing goes on to cause the relay to trip, the ALARM
LED and 'PwrSwg' LCD indications are retained, together with the TRIP LED and the type
of trip on the LCD. Detection of a power swing causes resetting of any previous trip or
start indications. Power swing indications can be suppressed by selecting the 'PwrSwg
detector blocked' menu option.
In the event of operation of the VT supervision feature the ALARM LED flashes, any
previous fault indication is reset and the message 'V~FAIL' appears on the LCD. If the
VT supervision logic has been set to block operation of the relay comparators by
selecting the 'TO BLOCK TRIP' VT supervision menu option, the RELAY AVAILABLE LED is
extinguished, the Relay Inoperative Alarm contact closes, and the message 'RELAY
BLOCKED' appears on the top line of the LCD with the 'V~FAIL' message on the bottom
line of the LCD.
Energisation of the Block Relay opto-isolator will cause the ALARM LED to start flashing,
reset any previous fault indication, and cause the message 'RELAY BLOCKED' to
appear; also the RELAY AVAILABLE LED will extinguish and the Relay Inoperative Alarm
contact will close. In this case, however, when the Block Relay opto-isolator is
de-energised, the indications and alarms all self reset.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Z1Y
AB
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 16 of 345
DELAY
1995 Oct. 06
13 : 17 : 55
Oldest record
Z1
BC
1995 Nov. 14
23 : 44 : 31
Z1
AN
1995 Dec. 04
02 : 05 : 08
Z2
BN
1995 Dec. 23
15 : 34 : 58
Figure 3-2
DELAY
Latest record
Typical fault record print out for relay without fault locator
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 17 of 345
Z1
AN
1995 OCT. 01
08 : 54 : 20
LOC.= 60.1 %
PERIOD = 45 ms
PRE - FAULT Va
63.50 KV / 0.0
PRE - FAULT Vb
63.50 KV / -120
PRE - FAULT Vc
63.50 KV / 120
PRE - FAULT Ia
1.0 KA / -10.0
PRE - FAULT Ib
1.0 KA / -130.0
PRE - FAULT Ic
1.0 KA / 110.0
FAULT Va
36.73 KV / -1.8
FAULT Vb
63.50 KV / -120
FAULT Vc
63.50 KV / 120.0
FAULT Vo
7.643 KV / 178.9
FAULT V2
7.717 KV / -179.9
Figure 3-3
Typical fault record print out for relay with fault locator
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 18 of 345
FAULT Ia
3.67 KA / -85.4
FAULT Ib
1.0 KA / -130.0
FAULT Ic
1.0 KA / 110.0
FAULT Io
1.224 KA / -85.4
FAULT I2
1.223 KA / -85.4
FAULT Im
0.223 KA / -85.4
Figure 3-3 continued .
3.3
'
'
(A blank display)
or
'.OPTIMHO
'
'
'
or
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'GROUP = 1
'
'
or
'Please set
'CALENDAR CLOCK
'
'
or
'PwrSwg TEST
'ENABLED
'
'
'
or
'
'Contacts blocked
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 19 of 345
or
'ERROR# SLOT No 1
'5 6 7 8 9 10 11 '
'
(Diagnostics message indicates slot
number of faulty board/s)
or
'ERROR# I~FAIL
'
'
'
In order to clarify the setting/data information stored within the relay, the information is
segregated and grouped under the following sections :
LAST FAULT
LAST FAULT 1
LAST FAULT 2
LAST FAULT 3
METERING
(Only if fault locator fitted)
IDENTIFIERS
CALENDAR CLOCK
COMMUNICATIONS
CONTACT CONFIG
SCHEME
DISTANCE
BLOCK AUTO RECLOSE
VT SUPERVISION
START INDICATION
DEF
(Optional for LFZP 111, 112 & 114)
FAULT LOCATOR
(Optional)
Pressing the RESET key (from one of the above default display pages) will bring up the
display :
'View / Scroll
'LAST FAULT
'
'
Repeated presses of the RESET key will scroll through the above list of information
groups.
To view settings or information contained in each group the READ key is pressed. The
first setting of the group is then displayed. Repeated presses of the READ key will scroll
each setting in turn. The order in which settings are presented is as listed in the menu
tree (Appendix A). When the last setting/data item of a particular group has been
viewed, a wrap around feature will display the first setting/data item on the next press
of the READ key. When the RESET key is pressed the display returns to the root or
default level. When the last group option (i.e. FAULT LOCATOR, if fault locator is fitted)
has been scrolled through using the RESET key, the display returns to the root or default
level.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.4
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 20 of 345
Menu system
The operator interface operates on the tree like menu system shown in Appendix A.
Each item in a branch of the menu forms a page of information when it is displayed on
the LCD,
e.g., 'OPTIONS'
'CALENDAR CLOCK'
is a page of information.
The cursor (arrow) keys are used to move around the menu tree, enabling the user to :
a)
b)
c)
d)
3.4.1
Change settings
Execute commands
Reconfigure the relay during commissioning
View settings
Default level
The top of the menu tree is designated the default level. When the operator interface is
not in use the liquid crystal display will always show an appropriate default page. The
normal default or root page will be as selected in the
'OPTIONS
'
'IDENTIFIERS '
section of the menu. This will be either a blank page, a group identification string of up
to 32 characters which has been entered by the user (see Section 3.10) or,
the active setting group number selected. Under certain conditions, as indicated below,
the root page may be replaced by one of the following default pages which are listed in
a hierarchical order, item a) having the highest precedence :
a)
'Serial Comms
'
b)
'Push SET to
'update changes
'
'
'Push SET to
'update group
'
'
'Z1
'AN V FAIL
'
'
or
c)
d)
'PwrSwg TEST
'ENABLED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.4.2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 21 of 345
e)
'Contacts blocked
f)
'ERROR # SLOT No 1
'5 6 7 8 9 10 11
g)
'ERROR # I FAIL
'
'
h)
'Please set
'CALENDAR CLOCK
'
'
Timeout feature
If no key is pressed within a 15 minute interval, an appropriate root or default page is
automatically selected.
3.4.3
'
'
section of the menu. The method used to change any setting within the relay is a
general one and is applicable to all setting changes, refer to Section 3.4.6 (Operating
the Menu). Before any setting group change is implemented the user is requested for
confirmation at a 'group trap' page when exiting from the menu back to the default
level.
From the 'group trap' page :
'push SET to
'update group
the user has the option of :
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 22 of 345
a)
pressing the SET key to confirm the setting group change, this
reconfigures the relay to the new setting group.
or
b)
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 23 of 345
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys steps the user to :
'OPTIONS
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'
'
'
'
appears.
From this page, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys steps the user to :
'OPTIONS
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'
'
'
'
is stepped to. Notice that the UP/DOWN keys have no effect from this page until the
group change has been confirmed or ignored by pressing SET or RESET from the group
trap page. This restriction prevents the settings from within a group being changed
whilst confirmation of a group change is still pending.
Active settings group as a default page
If required, the active settings group page can be displayed as a default page by
selecting this option from the DEFAULT DISPLAY section of the IDENTIFIERS section of
the menu. This feature may be useful for commissioning purposes in order to easily
confirm the currently selected setting group.
Factory default settings
All relays leave the factory with the active setting group number set to 1. For those user
not requiring multiple setting groups it is strongly recommended that the active setting
group number be left unchanged.
Changing or reading active setting group values via remote serial comms.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 24 of 345
Working RAM
Scratchpad RAM
EEPROM (Electrically programmable and erasable ROM)
Working RAM
This area of memory stores all the settings to which the relay is actually set.
Scratchpad RAM
This area of memory holds a temporary copy of all the most recent setting changes
made prior to updating the changes. If these recent setting changes are confirmed, the
Scratchpad RAM is copied to the Working RAM. If the recent settings changes are
cancelled, the temporary Scratchpad RAM copy is over written with a copy of the
Working RAM.
EEPROM
This area of memory is non-volatile, that is, it maintains the information stored within it
even if the dc supply is removed. This area of memory is copied to the Working RAM
after a dc power up, but only written to, and read from, if settings changes are updated
or a fault condition occurs.
Figure 3-4 illustrates how the transfer of settings and records between each area of
memory is implemented for each of the following conditions :
a)
b)
c)
d)
DC power up
Updating recent changes
Cancelling recent changes
Storing fault records
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.4.5
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 25 of 345
Setting trap
In order to implement all setting changes at once, a so called 'setting trap', as illustrated
in Figure 3-5, is used. The default display page :
'Push SET to
'
'update changes '
appears if setting changes have been made, whenever the user exits from the menu
tree.
At this point the user has three options, these are :
a)
Push SET key to update settings changes, this reconfigures the relay to
these changes and stores the changes in working RAM memory and nonvolatile EEPROM memory.
or
b)
Push RESET key to cancel and ignore all recent setting changes,
or
c)
push the RIGHT arrow key to move back into the menu.
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT arrow key returns the user to the root
display or a default display if a default condition is active, pressing the RIGHT arrow key
steps the user to :'OPTIONS
'PRINT
'
'
(Note, this page is located in the menu above the setting trap)
If the RESET key is pressed, the display page :
'all changes
'ignored
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys has the same effect as
above.
If the RIGHT arrow key is pressed, the page :
'OPTIONS
'IDENTIFIERS
'
'
is stepped to. Notice that this page is the first page in the menu tree immediately below
the setting trap. This page is stepped to because at this stage no commitment has been
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 26 of 345
taken to update or ignore the setting changes made. The menu sections ACTIVE
SETTINGS, PRINT, FAULT RECORDS and METERING (if Fault Locator fitted) are all
located above the setting trap and as such are unavailable until the current changes are
either updated or ignored by pressing SET or RESET at the setting trap.
3.4.6
2)
3)
'
'
5)
'
'
4)
'
'
'
'
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6)
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 27 of 345
Press DOWN arrow key to step to :
'OPTIONS
'
'CALENDAR CLOCK '
7)
8)
9)
'
'
(Note, in this instance it would have been quicker to press the UP arrow key from the
page :
'OPTIONS
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'
'
since the presentation order of pages in the menu tree automatically wraps around
from bottom to top or top to bottom).
10)
11)
12)
Press RIGHT arrow key to obtain above page with alternating up/down arrow
after CONFIGURATION NO. 01.
Note that settings can only be changed when the alternating up/down arrow is
showing.
13)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 28 of 345
Note:
in this case, Contact configuration No.1 is the actual relay setting held in
current memory and non-volatile memory. Changing this setting to
CONFIGURATION NO. 02 does not change the actual relay setting at this
stage. Instead, the new setting is held in temporary memory and is only
transferred to the current memory and non-volatile memory if the user
confirms the update of settings, at the setting trap, when exiting the menu.
The mechanism used is described in step 17) below.
14)
15)
16)
17)
'
'
'
'
Note, this is the settings trap default page which appears whenever any setting changes
have been made. At this point the user has the option of :
a)
pressing the SET key to confirm the setting changes, reconfigure the relay
to these changes and store the changes in the current memory and
non-volatile memory.
or
b)
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 29 of 345
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT arrow key steps the user back to the root
display or a default display if a default condition is active, pressing the RIGHT arrow key
steps to :'OPTIONS
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'
'
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys has the same effect as
above.
If the RIGHT arrow key is pressed, the page :
'OPTIONS
'IDENTIFIERS
'
'
is stepped to. Notice that this page is the first page in the menu tree immediately below
the setting trap. This page is stepped to because at this stage no commitment has been
taken to update or ignore the setting changes made. The menu sections ACTIVE
SETTINGS, PRINT, FAULT RECORDS and METERING (if Fault Locator fitted) are all
located above the setting trap and as such are unavailable until the current changes are
either updated or ignored by pressing SET or RESET at the setting trap.
Example 2 - Setting the time and date
When the relay is first powered up the default display page will be :
'Please set
'
'CALENDAR CLOCK '
provided no higher priority default conditions are active. Since this page will always be
displayed whenever the relay is powered up the menu treats this condition as a special
case by stepping the user directly to the CALENDAR CLOCK branch of the menu,
instead of the PRINT section, when the RIGHT arrow key is pressed.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 30 of 345
2)
3)
4)
'
'
5)
Press RIGHT arrow key to obtain above page with alternating up/down arrow
after 1995. Note that settings can only be changed when the alternating
up/down arrow is showing.
6)
as described in step 13) below. New time/date values are only transferred to nonvolatile memory if the user confirms the update of settings when exiting the menu. The
mechanism used is described in step 15) below.
7)
When the desired year is obtained, press LEFT arrow key to remove the
alternating up/down arrow.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8)
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 31 of 345
Press DOWN arrow key to step to :
'SET TIME & DATE
'SET MONTH Jan
'
'
9)
Press RIGHT arrow key to obtain above page with alternating up/down arrow
after Jan.
10)
11)
When the desired month is obtained, press LEFT arrow key to remove the
alternating up/down arrow.
12)
Repeat the above procedure to set the DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES and
SECONDS values.
13)
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 32 of 345
15)
Note:
'
'
this is the settings trap default page which appears whenever any setting
changes have been made. At this point the user has the option of:
a)
Pressing the SET key to confirm the setting changes, reconfigure the relay
to these changes and store the changes in non-volatile memory. Note,
the actual time/date stored at this point is that time at which the SET key
is pressed, this will be the time/date which was set in the CALENDAR
CLOCK section plus the time interval that has elapsed prior to the SET
key being pressed. The time/date value stored in non-volatile memory is
used on setting printouts to indicate when settings were last updated and
is also used to restore an initial time/date value when the relay is
powered up.
or
b)
Pressing the RESET key to ignore setting changes. Note, since the
time/date is a special case, the time/date as set in the CALENDAR
CLOCK section remains active until the dc supply to the relay is
removed. On power up the relay time/date will default to the time/date
which was recorded when the SET key was last pressed to update
settings.
or
c)
'
'
appears.
From this page, pressing the LEFT arrow key steps the user back to the root display or a
default display if a default condition is active, pressing the RIGHT arrow key steps to:
'OPTIONS
'ACTIVE SETTINGS
'
'
'
'
appears. From this page, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys has the same effect as
above.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 33 of 345
'OPTIONS
'IDENTIFIERS
'
'
is stepped to. Notice that this page is the first page in the menu tree immediately below
the setting trap. This page is stepped to because at this stage no commitment has been
taken to update or ignore the setting changes made. The menu sections ACTIVE
SETTINGS, PRINT, FAULT RECORDS and METERING (if Fault Locator fitted) are all
located above the setting trap and as such are unavailable until the current changes are
either updated or ignored by pressing SET or RESET at the setting trap.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 34 of 345
WORKING
RAM
MEMORY
SCRATCHPAD
RAM
MEMORY
EEPROM
MEMORY
WORKING
RAM
MEMORY
SCRATCHPAD
RAM
EEPROM
MEMORY
MEMORY
WORKING
RAM
MEMORY
SCRATCHPAD
RAM
EEPROM
MEMORY
MEMORY
WORKING
RAM
MEMORY
SCRATCHPAD
EEPROM
RAM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 3-5
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 35 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.5
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 36 of 345
Commission tests
This section of the menu provides necessary test and monitoring facilities for
commissioning the relay. Refer to Commissioning Instructions and Test Features (Section
3.14) for more detailed explanations on the use and implementation of these features.
Options provided are :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.5.1
Contact control
On load directional testing
Power swing testing
Monitor options
Output options
Contact control
Options provided are :
a)
'ALL CONTACTS
'ENABLED
'
'
b)
'ALL CONTACTS
'BLOCKED
'
'
c)
'CONTACTS
'BLOCKED EXCEPT
'ANY TRIP
'
'
'
Note:
1)
The above contact options are only active when the SET key is pressed at the
setting trap page :
'push SET to
'update changes
'
'
Provided no other higher priority default messages are active (see Section
3.4.1), the default display page :
'Contacts blocked
'
'
'
is displayed at the default level if either of the contacts blocked options b) or c) has
been selected.
3)
3.5.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 37 of 345
This test is only active when the SET key is pressed from the page :
'ON LOAD DIR TEST
'push SET to test
'
'
When the test is actioned, by pressing the SET key, the relay is reconfigured to enable its
measuring circuits to respond to the test condition (see Test Features Section 3.14). Also,
the RELAY AVAILABLE LED is turned off and Relay Inoperative Alarm contact closes.
One of the following three pages will be displayed :
a)
'Fault seen as
'FORWARD
'
'
b)
'
'
c)
'Test aborted
'check I &/or V
'
'
Page c) will result if any current or voltage level detectors are not picked up.
Note:
3.5.3
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 38 of 345
Note:
1)
The above power swing options are only active when the SET key is pressed at
the setting trap page :
'push SET to
'update changes
2)
'
'
Provided no other higher priority default conditions are active (see Section
3.4.1), the default display page :
'PwrSwg TEST
'ENABLED
'
'
is displayed at the default level if the that option has been selected.
3.5.4
3)
Monitor option number 8 is used to monitor the relay response to this test.
4)
In the event of a dc power up or software reset the power swing test option
selected when settings were last updated is restored.
Monitor option
This feature allows the status of various internal signals such as level detectors or
comparators to be monitored as discrete logical values (e.g. 0 or 1) either on the LCD
or at the PARALLEL port. Refer to Test Features Section 3.14 for a detailed listing of each
option.
Monitor signals for the option selected are always sent to the PARALLEL port and appear
at pins 2 through to 9, the same signals are displayed on the LCD when the monitor
option page is viewed. When viewed on the LCD or measured on the PARALLEL port,
the monitor option selected is always active, there is no need to step back through the
setting trap to action a particular option.
Since monitor option signals are always sent to the PARALLEL port, regardless of the
current menu display, it may, depending on equipment available, be more
advantageous to monitor the port signals rather than the LCD signals.
In the event of a dc power up or software reset the monitor option number displayed is
that option which was selected when settings were last updated.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.5.5
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 39 of 345
Output option
Trip testing on individual or groups of output relays can be performed using this option.
Refer to Test Features Section 3.14 for a detailed listing of each output option.
Provided contacts have not been blocked by selecting either of the contact control
commission test blocking options, trip tests are activated whenever the SET key is
pressed from the display page :
'push SET to test
'OUTPUT OPT # xx
'
'
The selected output relay/s will remain energised until the SET key is released. If
contacts have been set to blocked, the page :
'Contacts blocked
'
'
'
is displayed and no contacts are energised when the SET key is pressed.
Note:
1)
'
'
is displayed the relay is taken out of service, the RIA contact closes and the
green RELAY AVAILABLE LED is extinguished. The relay is put back in service
when the <- key is pressed to return to the page :
'COMMISSION TEST
'OUTPUT OPTION
'
'
2)
Since the output test option results in a change of relay status when the relay
is taken out of service, the 15 minute time out feature, which normally returns
the relay display to an appropriate default level, is not applicable.
3)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 40 of 345
3.6
Communications
3.6.1
Access level
In applications where remote serial communication facilities are used (see Section
3.13), it may be deemed necessary to provide total security against unauthorised access
in order to prevent any changes being made to relay settings. The ACCESS LEVEL
setting, which can be set to LIMITED or FULL, provides this security.
When serial communications is logged on to the MODEM (rear) port and the access
level is set to LIMITED, all settings can be viewed but only the time and date settings can
be changed. Also, the CLEAR ALL RECORDS option and the commission options for ON
LOAD DIR TEST and OUTPUT OPTION are not available. Alteration of time and date
values is allowed since it may be necessary to reset the time/date in the event of a dc
power failure.
When the serial communications is logged on to the LOCAL (front) port and the access
level is set to LIMITED, all settings can be viewed but only the time and date, and
ACCESS LEVEL settings can be changed. Also, the CLEAR ALL RECORDS option and the
commission options for ON LOAD DIR TEST and OUTPUT OPTION are not available.
When the serial communications is logged on to the MODEM or LOCAL ports and the
access level is set to FULL, all settings can be viewed and changed.
3.6.2
Serial control
The serial communications feature allows :
a)
b)
c)
Refer to Section 3.13 for information regarding the implementation and use of the
serial communication facility.
3.6.3
Active port
Only one of the serial ports, LOCAL or MODEM, can be active at any one time. This
menu option is used to select either the LOCAL (front) or MODEM (rear) serial control
port as the active port.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.6.4
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 41 of 345
Baud rate
Separate BAUD rate settings are available for LOCAL and MODEM ports.
These are :
300, 600, 1200, 2400 & 4800.
3.6.5
Protocol
Separate protocols are available to set up the bit framing (DATA, PARITY, STOP) for
LOCAL and MODEM ports. Protocols available are :
DATA
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
3.6.6
PARITY
NONE
EVEN
ODD
NONE
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
NONE
STOP
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
Control lines
This option is only applicable to the MODEM (rear) port. If modem control lines CTS
(clear to send), DTR (data terminal ready), RTS (request to send) and DSR (data set
ready) are required, this option should be set to :
'CONTROL LINES
'IN USE
'
'
If modem control lines are not required, this option should be set to :
'CONTROL LINES
'NOT IN USE
3.6.7
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.7
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 42 of 345
Fault records
The most recent four records are stored by the relay, the latest being LAST FAULT and
the oldest being LAST FAULT - 3.
3.7.1
'
'
For certain fault conditions the calculated period, pre-fault voltage and/or
pre-fault current may not be applicable, for these cases 'n/a' is written, refer
to Section 4.5.4 for further details.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.7.2
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 43 of 345
b)
The clear records facility is only available if the ACCESS LEVEL (in
COMMUNICATIONS section) is set to FULL.
To clear all fault records the SET key is pressed from the display page :
'push SET to
'
'clear all records '
The confirmation display page :
'all records
'cleared
'
'
Fault records can be viewed using the view/scroll feature (see Section 3.3).
Metering
The metering option is only available on relays which have the optional fault locator
fitted.
Primary three phase voltage and current are measured and displayed in magnitude
(rms) and phase angle relative to phase A voltage. Real and reactive powers are also
measured.
Note:
Measured values are relative to the VT and CT ratios set in the FAULT
LOCATOR section of the menu.
Metering can be obtained by using the VIEW/SCROLL feature (see Section 3.3) or by
entering the METERING section of the menu tree.
If the fault locator PCB is fitted to the LFZP 113 relay for cable applications, it is
possible to use the metering feature. Although the fault locator will also be available,
there will be inaccuracy in fault measurement due to the cable capacitance
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.9
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 44 of 345
Print option
The print facility can be used in conjunction with either :
a)
b)
When the -> key is pressed from the LCD display page :
'push -> to print
'all settings
or
'push -> to print
'fault records
'
'
'
'
the relay checks if a printer is connected and is 'on line'. If no printer is connected or the
printer is not 'on line' the LCD will display the page :
'printer not
'ready
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 45 of 345
If a printer is connected and is 'on line' the LCD will display the page :
'printing in
'progress
'
'
and printing will commence. Should the printer run out of paper or go 'off line' whilst
printing is in progress the LCD will display the page :
'printer not
'ready
'
'
When the printer goes back 'on line' the LCD will display the page
'printing in
'progress
'
'
'
'
'
'
When printing is complete the LCD display automatically returns to the page :
3.9.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 46 of 345
When the -> key is pressed from the VDU (visual display unit) display :
'push -> to print '
'all settings
'
or
'push -> to print '
'fault records
'
printing to the VDU will commence. The display can be halted for viewing using CTRL S
(X-OFF), and restarted using CTRL Q (X-ON).
When printing is complete, the page :
'type C to continue
'
A time out feature will automatically select X-ON if X-OFF is active for more
than 60s.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 47 of 345
Settings printed
on : -
CONTACT CONFIGURATION No 01
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1Y = 3.00
ALLOW A/R ON
Z1X (T) TRIP
1995 Apr. 01
09 : 29 : 36
SCHEME SELECTION
BASIC
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ2 = 3.00
ALLOW A/R ON
Z1Y (T) TRIP
Settings last
changed on : -
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL BLOCKED
ZONE 3 SETTING
OFFSET
BLOCK A/R ON
Z2 (T) TRIP
1991 Apr. 01
08 : 33 : 47
LOSS OF LOAD
FEATURE ENABLED
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3' = 2.0
ALLOW A/R ON
CHANNEL OUT
Group identifier
is : -
LL ENABLED BY
LS I LEVEL DET
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3 = 5.00
ALLOW A/R ON
DEF DELAY TRIP
OPTIMHO
TYPE OF TRIP
3 POLE ONLY
ZONE 3 SETTING
LENT a/b = 0.41
ALLOW A/R ON
DEF AIDED TRIP
DISTANCE
18 LFZP 087 A
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
ENABLED
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED
VT SUPERVISION
TO BLOCK TRIP
FAULT LOCATOR
10 LFZP 100 A
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED IN 0.2 s
SELF RESETTING
ENABLED
CLOCK REF.
RELAY CRYSTAL
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BY LD OR COMP
START INDICATION
ENABLED
ACTIVE SETTINGS
GROUP 1
PwrSwg DETECTOR
ENABLED
DEFAULT DISPLAY
GROUP IDENTIFIER
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TIMING Z6--> Z3
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL BLOCKED
ALL CONTACTS
ENABLED
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z1
REACH
KZF = 1.00
PwrSwg test
DISABLED
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z1X
LINE UNITS
= 100%
MONITOR 23456789
OPT 20
00000000
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z1Y
FAULT LOCATOR
CT Ratio = 1000 : 1
ACCESS LEVEL
FULL
BASE SETTING
KZPh = 0.800
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z2
FAULT LOCATION
VT Ratio = 1000 : 1
ACTIVE PORT
LOCAL
BASE SETTING
THETA Ph = 70
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z3
MUTUAL COMP .
ENABLED
BASE SETTING
KZN = 0.800
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TZ6 = 50 ms
MUTUAL COMP .
KZM = 0.50
BASE SETTING
THETA N = 70
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6 = 6.50
MUTUAL COMP .
THETA M = 70
CONTROL LINES
NOT IN USE
DIST G CHAR'STIC
MHO
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6' = 3.5
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1 = 1.00
PwrSwg DETECTOR
LENT a/b = 0.41
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1X = 2.00
BLOCK A/R ON
Z1 + AT 3Ph/F
Figure 3-6
Typical settings print out (LFZP 11x with DEF & Fault Locator)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 48 of 345
Printer
connections
STB (Pin 1)
D0 (Pin 2)
D1 (Pin 3)
D2 (Pin 4)
D3 (Pin 5)
D4 (Pin 6)
D5 (Pin 7)
D6 (Pin 8)
D7 (Pin 9)
Do not connect
BUSY (Pin 11)
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
0v (Pin 22)
0v (Pin 23)
0v (Pin 24)
0v (Pin 25)
Function name
Printer strobe
(Output)
Data line D0
(Output)
Data line D1
(Output)
Data line D2
(Output)
Data line D3
(Output)
Data line D4
(Output)
Data line D5
(Output)
Data line D6
(Output)
Data line D7
(Output)
Data line D6 RESET key
(Input)
Data line D7 Printer Busy
(Input)
Data line D5 READ key
(Input)
Data line D4 SET key
(Input)
Data line D3 LEFT key
(Input)
Data line D2 DOWN key ( Input)
Data line D1 RIGHT key
(Input)
Data line D0 UP key
(Input)
5v
Monitor
(Output)
12v
Monitor
(Output)
-12v
Monitor
(Output)
12v (Relay) Monitor
(Output)
0v
0v (Note: All 0v are commoned,
0v
only 1 connection is
0v
necessary)
Table 3-2a Serial port pin connections for front (LOCAL) socket
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Serial
port pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 to 24
25
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 49 of 345
Function name
0v (Ground)
TXD (Transmit)
RXD (Receive)
Not connected
Reserved, do not connect
Not connected
0v (Signal ground)
Not connected
Reserved, do not connect
Table 3-2b Serial port pin connections for rear (MODEM) socket
Serial
port pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 to 19
20
21 to 25
Function name
0v (Ground)
TXD (Transmit)
RXD (Receive)
RTS
CTS
DSR
0v (Signal ground)
Not connected
+ 12v
- 12
Not connected
DTR
Not connected
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.10
R5911D
Chapter 2
Page 50 of 345
Identifiers
This section of the menu is used to :
a)
b)
c)
3.10.1
Enable the user to enter a unique group identification code which can
be up to 32 characters long.
Read the factory set software version numbers.
Select either a blank display or the user set group identification code or
the active setting group number as a root default display.
Group identifier
Each settings group has its own unique GROUP IDENTIFIER, but it is important to note
that the identifier for group 1 is also the code used by the serial communications as a
log on password. All relays leave the factory with all the group identifiers set to
'Optimho'.
To change/set the group identifier the user should press the RIGHT arrow key from the
display page :
'GROUP IDENTIFIER
'push -> to set
'
'
The display page changes to the group identifier code with an underline cursor
positioned under the first character position of the group identifier code. The
UP/DOWN arrow keys step the character at the cursor position either up or down
through the ASCII table of characters given in Table 3-3. The RIGHT and LEFT arrow
keys are used to move the cursor position right or left. On pressing the LEFT arrow key,
with the cursor at the first character position, the display steps back to the page :
'GROUP IDENTIFIER
'push -> to set
'
'
Any changes to the group identifier code will be updated when the user presses the SET
key at the settings trap position in the menu (see Section 3.4.5).
Note:
1)
2)
Any blank spaces at the end of the group identification code are ignored by
the serial communications when entering the group identifier as a log on
password.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.10.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 51 of 345
Software version
The software version number is factory set and can not be changed by the user.
An additional software version number is given for relay versions which have the
optional fault locator fitted.
3.10.3
Default display
The default display is determined by the status of the relay, as detailed in Section
3.4.1. If there are no higher priority default conditions active, the default or root
display page will be as selected in this section, this will be either a blank display
or group identification code or active setting group number.
Note:
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
Y
]
^
_
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
i)
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
->
Note:
ii)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.11
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 52 of 345
Calendar clock
The calendar clock feature is primarily provided for time and date stamping of
fault records, it is therefore important that the calendar clock be set prior to
placing the relay in service.
3.11.1
Format
The ISO time / date format :
Year Month Day
Hour Minute Second
is used.
3.11.2
'
'
is displayed. In order to reduce the number of key presses required to set the
clock the menu steps the user to the page :
'OPTIONS
'CALENDAR CLOCK
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 53 of 345
The time and date setting however, is an exception to this rule and is updated
when the LEFT arrow key is pressed to step to the page :
'CALENDAR CLOCK
'SET TIME & DATE
'
'
The method used to set the time/date is described in Section 3.4.6. The '?' symbol
is removed from the time & date display when the clock has been set.
3.11.4
Clock reference
In circumstances where the average system voltage frequency is accurately
maintained at its nominal value, it may be preferable to reference the calendar
clock to the system frequency rather than to the internal relay crystal. The CLOCK
REFERENCE menu option allows the clock to be referenced to either the relay
crystal or the system voltage frequency.
If the option to reference the calendar clock to the system voltage is selected, and
the system voltage falls to less than about 70% of nominal, the calendar clock
automatically references to the internal crystal until the system voltage rises to
above 70% of nominal.
Note, the Calendar Clock can be viewed using the View/Scroll feature (see
Section 3.3).
3.12
Settings
Settings which relate directly to the relay protection elements are grouped in this
branch of the menu tree under the following sections:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
CONTACT CONFIGURATION
SCHEME
DISTANCE
BLOCK AUTORECLOSE
VT SUPERVISION
START INDICATION
DEF (Optional for LFZP versions 111, 112 & 114)
FAULT LOCATOR (Optional for LFZP versions 111, 112 & 114)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.12.1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 54 of 345
Contact configuration
The adoption of a bus oriented system, running under software control, has
eliminated the need for fixed hard wired connections to output tripping relays.
Each individual output relay has a unique software address, this allows it to be
control LED by the particular scheme software selected and thus allows different
output configurations to be implemented.
Output contact configurations are detailed in Section 8.
3.12.2
Scheme
The LFZP 11x range of relays provide an extensive range of scheme options.
12 different scheme options are available, these are:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
BASIC
Z1 EXTENSION
PUR
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 1
POR 1 UNBLOCK
POR 2
POR 2 WI TRIP
i)
j)
POR 2 UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP
UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
*
*
k)
l)
*
*
(Permissive Underreach)
(Permissive Underreach Unblock)
(Permissive Overreach 1)
(Permissive Overreach1 Unblock)
(Permissive Overreach 2)
(Permissive Overreach 2 Weak
Infeed Trip)
(Permissive Overreach 2 Unblock)
(Permissive Overreach 2 Weak
Infeed Trip unblock)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 55 of 345
Timer TP
This timer is only available if any of the following scheme options are selected:
POR 1
POR 1 UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
Timer TD
This timer is only available if any of the following scheme options are selected:
POR 1
POR 1 UNBLOCK
POR 2
POR 2 UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP
POR WI TRIP UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
Timer TDW
This timer is only available if any of the following scheme options are selected:
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 1 UNBLOCK
POR 2 UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK
Timer TPG
This timer is only available if both DEF ELEMENTS and DEF AIDED TRIP are
ENABLED and the BLOCKING scheme option is selected.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 56 of 345
Timer TDG
This timer is only available if both DEF ELEMENTS and DEF AIDED TRIP are
ENABLED and any of the following scheme options are selected:
POR 1
POR 1 UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
DEF elements
Setting options relating to the DEF are only available if the DEF is fitted. All
elements of the DEF feature can be ENABLED or BLOCKED either in the
'SETTINGS
'SCHEME '
'
'
section of the menu tree. If the DEF elements are set to ALL BLOCKED, all other
DEF element settings (except DEF LOW SET in DEF section of the menu tree) are
not available.
DEF aided trip
Provided DEF elements are ALL ENABLED, the DEF AIDED TRIP can be ENABLED
or BLOCKED. If the DEF AIDED TRIP is set to BLOCKED, DEF AIDED TRIP
HIGHSET, TPG and TDG are not available.
The DEF AIDED TRIP is automatically set to BLOCKED if any of the following
schemes are selected:
BASIC
Z1 EXTENSION
PUR
PUR UNBLOCK
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 57 of 345
Distance
Settings related to the distance measuring elements are grouped under the
DISTANCE section of the menu tree, these are:TYPE OF TRIP
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
TIME DELAY TRIP
BASE SETTING
DIST G CHAR'STIC (Only available for LFZP 111)
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
ZONE 3 SETTING (Not available for LFZP 114)
SWCH ON TO FAULT
PwrSwg DETECTOR (Not available for LFZP 114)
Type of trip
Options available are:
1 OR 3 POLE TRIPPING
or 3 POLE TRIPPING ONLY
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 58 of 345
Zone 1 tripping
Zone 1 tripping can be selected to be either ENABLED or BLOCKED.
Time delay trip
Time delayed zones Z1X(T), Z1Y(T), Z2(T), Z3(T) and all ground fault elements
can be selected to be either ENABLED or BLOCKED. Timers TZ1X, TZ1Y, TZ2 and
TZ3, associated with each zone, are only available if their corresponding zone is
ENABLED. Each timer has a setting range of 100ms to 9980ms, selectable in
20ms increments.
Time delayed zone Z3(T) is not available for relay versions LFZP 114.
Base setting
Base settings are KZPh, THETA Ph, KZN and THETA N. KZPh and KZN setting
ranges for all relay versions are :KZPh
KZN
THETA Ph and THETA N setting ranges for relay versions LFZP 111, 112 & 114
are :
THETA Ph 50 to 85 selectable in increments of 5
THETA N 50 to 85 selectable in increments of 5
THETA Ph and THETA N setting ranges for relay version LFZP 113 is :THETA Ph 45 to 80 selectable in increments of 5.
THETA N -45, -35, -25 to 80 selectable in increments of 5.
Dist G Char'stic (Distance ground fault characteristic)
This option is only available for relay version LFZP 111.
Either MHO or QUADRILATERAL characteristics are available.
Resistive reach factor KR is only available if QUADRILATERAL is selected. KR has a
setting range of 1 to 30, selectable in increments of 1.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 59 of 345
Z1 & Z2 setting
The setting range for Zone 1 and Zone 2 reach setting multiplier factors KZ1,
KZ1X, KZ1Y and KZ2 is 1 to 49.98, selectable in increments of 0.02.
Zone 3 setting
This option is not available on relay version LFZP 114.
The Zone 3 characteristic can be selected to be either OFFSET or REVERSE
LOOKING. Setting ranges for Zone 3 settings KZ3', KZ3 and aspect ratio a/b are
:
KZ3'
KZ3
a/b
Note:
b)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 60 of 345
3.12.4
b)
or
c)
or
d)
or
e)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 61 of 345
or
f)
or
g)
or
Note:
3.12.5
VT supervision
VT supervision can be selected either TO ALLOW TRIP or TO BLOCK TRIP in the
event of a VT fuse failure. SELF RESETTING of the VTS feature can be ENABLED or
DISABLED.
3.12.6
Start indication
Start indications can be selected to be either ENABLED or BLOCKED.
In the event of a fault, operation of any comparator or DEF (if fitted and enabled)
element will initiate a start indication on the LCD if the start indication option has
been selected to be ENABLED.
If the optional fault locator is fitted and start indications are selected to ENABLED,
the fault locator measuring elements will be initiated by any start event. If start
indications are selected to BLOCKED, the fault locator measuring elements will
not be initiated by any start event.
3.12.7
DEF
DEF is an optional feature for LFZP versions 111, 112 & 114.
Settings related to the directional earth fault measuring elements are grouped
under the DEF section of the menu tree, these are:
a)
b)
LOW SET
ELEMENTS
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 62 of 345
Low set
The DEF LOW SET 3Io setting is separate from all other DEF settings which are
grouped under the ELEMENTS section. This arrangement enables the DEF LOW
SET element to be set even if all other DEF elements are DISABLED.
Note :
The DEF LOW SET 3Io level detector has a setting range of 0.05In to 0.8In,
selectable in increments of 0.05In.
Elements
All settings other than the LOW SET 3Io setting are grouped under this section,
these are :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
DELAY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
POLARISING
ANGLE
MAG INRUSH
None of the above options are available if DEF ELEMENTS are selected to ALL
BLOCKED.
Delay trip
This option can be selected to be either ENABLED or BLOCKED.
The following settings are only available if DELAY TRIP is ENABLED :
a)
b)
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 63 of 345
CURVE 1
CURVE 2
CURVE 3
CURVE 4
(Standard Inverse)
(Very Inverse)
(Extremely Inverse)
(Long-time Stand-By Earth Fault)
Inverse (AMERICAN):
CURVE 5
CURVE 6
CURVE 7
CURVE 8
Definite time :
2 SECOND
4 SECOND
8 SECOND
Time mulitiplier
Time multiplier setting (*t) range is 0.025 to 1, selectable in increments of 0.025.
Base setting
Base setting (Is) setting range is 0.05In to 1.2In, selectable in increments of
0.05In.
Aided trip
This option can be selected to be either ENABLED or BLOCKED.
The following settings are only available if AIDED TRIP is ENABLED :
a)
b)
c)
Highset 3Io
Timer TPG
Timer TDG
Highset
Highset 3Io setting range is 0.05In to 0.8In, selectable in increments of 0.05In.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 64 of 345
TPG
TPG setting range is 0 to 98ms, selectable in 2ms increments.
TDG
TDG setting range is 0 to 98ms, selectable in 2ms increments.
Polarising
Four methods of directional polarising are selectable, these are :
a)
b)
c)
d)
NEGATIVE SEQ. V
ZERO SEQ. I
ZERO SEQ. V
ZERO SEQ. V&I
Angle
DEF ANGLE THETA N setting range is 10 to 80 degrees, selectable in increments
of 10 degrees.
Mag inrush
The DEF utilises a novel measuring circuit to detect transformer magnetising
inrush current. Refer to Section 4.4.7 for details of the measurement technique.
The output from the magnetising inrush detector can be selected to stabilise the
DEF measuring circuit when in-zone transformers are connected.
Options available are STABILISER ON or STABILISER OFF.
3.12.8
Fault locator
The fault locator is an optional feature available for LFZP relay versions 111, 112,
113 (but see section 4.5.1) & 114.
Reach
The fault locator reach multiplier KZF is adjustable from 1 to 40 in steps of 0.01.
Line units
Line Units can be set to Km, Miles or 100%.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 65 of 345
Line length
If LINE UNITS are set to Km or Miles the LINE LENGTH is adjustable from 0 to
99.99 in steps of 0.01, and from 100 to 999.9 in steps of 0.1.
If LINE UNITS are set to 100% the line length is fixed at 100%.
CT Ratio
CT RATIO is selectable as 1:1 or 10:1 to 5000:1 in steps of 10:1
VT Ratio
VT RATIO is selectable as 1:1 or 10:1 to 9990:1 in steps of 10:1
Mutual Comp.
Mutual compensation can be ENABLED or DISABLED. If ENABLED the setting
ranges of KZM and THETA M are:
KZM
THETA M
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 66 of 345
Minimum
Maximum
Step
TP
0
98ms
2ms
TD
0
98ms
2ms
TDW
0
98ms
2ms
TPG
0
98ms
2ms
TDG
0
98ms
2ms
TZ1X
100ms
9980ms
20ms
TZ1Y
100ms
9980ms
20ms
TZ2
100ms
9980ms
20ms
TZ3
100ms
9980ms
20ms
TZ6
20ms
90ms
5ms
KZPh
0.040
1.000
0.001
KZN
0
1.360
0.001
KR
1
30
1
KZ1
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ1X
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ1Y
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ2
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ3
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ6
1.00
49.98
0.02
KZ3'
0.2
49.9
0.1
KZ6'
0.2
49.9
0.1
KZF
1.00
40.00
0.01
KZM
0
1.360
0.001
DEF Low Set 3Io
0.05In
0.8In
0.05In
DEF Highset 3Io
0.05In
0.8In
0.05In
DEF MULT * t
0.025
1.000
0.025
DEF Base setting Is
0.05In
1.2In
0.05In
THETA G
10
80
10
THETA Ph
50
85
5
THETA N
50
85
5
THETA M
50
85
5
THETA Ph
45
80
5
THETA N
-45, -35, -25, to 80 in steps of 5
Baud (Modem)
300, 600, 1200, 2400 & 4800
Baud (Local)
300, 600, 1200, 2400 & 4800
CT Ratio
1 : 1 and 10 : 1 to 5000 : 1 in steps of 10 : 1
VT Ratio
1 : 1 and 10 : 1 to 9990 : 1 in steps of 10 : 1
Z3 Lenticular a/b
1.00, 0.67 & 0.41
Z6 Lenticular a/b
1.00, 0.67 & 0.41
Line Length
0 to 99.99 in steps of 0.01 plus 100 to 999.9 in steps
of 0.1
* LFZP Versions 111, 112 & 114.
** LFZP 113
*
*
**
**
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Table 3-5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 67 of 345
Summary of menu option settings
SECTION
IDENTIFIER
CALENDAR CLOCK
COMMISSION
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
\SERIAL CONTROL
SETTINGS
CONTACT
CONFIGURATION
SETTING
DEFAULT DISPLAY
Blank display
GROUP IDENTIFIER
ACTIVE GROUP
CLOCK REFERENCE
RELAY CRYSTAL
SYSTEM VOLTAGE
ALL CONTACTS
ENABLED
BLOCKED
BLOCKED EXCEPT ANY
TRIP
PwrSwg TEST
DISABLED
ENABLED
ACCESS LEVEL
FULL
LIMITED
ACTIVE PORT
MODEM
LOCAL
DATA PARITY STOP
8 NONE 1 (MODEM)
8 EVEN 1
8 ODD 1
8 NONE 2
7 EVEN 1
7 ODD 1
7 EVEN 2
7 ODD 2
7 NONE 2
CONTROL LINES
IN USE
NOT IN USE
DATA PARITY STOP
8 NONE 1 (LOCAL)
8 EVEN 1
8 ODD 1
8 NONE 2
7 EVEN 1
7 ODD
1
7 EVEN 2
7 ODD
2
7 NONE 2
CONTACT
RESERVED
CONFIGURATION
01
02
03
04
05
(plus any specials)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 68 of 345
SCHEME SELECTION
DEF ELEMENTS
DEF AIDED TRIP
LOSS OF LOAD
SETTINGS
\DISTANCE
TYPE OF TRIP
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
TIME DELAYED TRIP
DIST G
CHARACTERISTIC
ZONE 3 SETTING
Setting
BASIC
Z1 EXTENSION
PUR
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 1
POR 1 UNBLOCK
POR 2
POR 2 WI TRIP
POR 2 UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK
BLOCKING
BLOCKING 2
(plus any specials)
ALL ENABLED
ALL BLOCKED
ENABLED
BLOCKED
ENABLED
BLOCKED
BY LS I LEVEL DETECTORS
BY HS I LEVEL DETECTORS
1 OR 3 POLE
3 POLE ONLY
ENABLED
BLOCKED
Z1X (T) ENABLED
Z1X (T) BLOCKED
Z1Y (T) ENABLED
Z1Y (T) BLOCKED
Z2 (T) ENABLED
Z2 (T) BLOCKED
Z3 (T) ENABLED
Z3 (T) BLOCKED
ALL G ENABLED
ALL G BLOCKED
MHO
QUADRILATERAL
OFFSET
REVERSE LOOKING
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 69 of 345
Section
SETTINGS
\DISTANCE
Setting
SWCH ON TO FAULT
PwrSwg DETECTOR
SETTINGS
\BLOCK AUTORECLOSE
BLOCK A/R ON
ALLOW A/R ON
SETTINGS
\VT SUPERVISION
VT SUPERVISION
SETTINGS
\START INDICATION
START INDICATION
ENABLED
BLOCKED
ENABLED IN 110s
ENABLED IN 0.2s
BY COMPARATORS
BY LEVEL DETECTORS
BY LD OR COMP
ENABLED
BLOCKED
TIMING Z6-->Z2
TIMING Z6-->Z3
TO ALLOW Z1
TO BLOCK Z1
TO ALLOW Z1X
TO BLOCK Z1X
TO ALLOW Z1Y
TO BLOCK Z1Y
TO ALLOW Z2
TO BLOCK Z2
TO ALLOW Z3
TO BLOCK Z3
Z1 + AT 2 &3 Ph/F
Z1 + AT 3Ph/F
Z1X (T) TRIP
Z1Y (T) TRIP
Z2 (T) TRIP
CHANNEL OUT
DEF DELAY TRIP
DEF AIDED TRIP
Z1 + AT 2 & 3 Ph/F
Z1X (T) TRIP
Z1Y (T) TRIP
Z2 (T) TRIP
CHANNEL OUT
DEF DELAY TRIP
DEF AIDED TRIP
TO ALLOW TRIP
TO BLOCK TRIP
SELF RESETTING ENABLED
SELF RESETTING DISABLED
ENABLED
BLOCKED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 70 of 345
Setting
DEF ELEMENTS
DEF DELAY TRIP
DEF POLARISING
LINE UNITS
MUTUAL COMP.
ALL ENABLED
ALL BLOCKED
ENABLED
BLOCKED
CURVE 1
CURVE 2
CURVE 3
CURVE 4
CURVE 5
CURVE 6
CURVE 7
CURVE 8
DEFINITE t = 2s
DEFINITE t = 4s
DEFINITE t = 8s
NEGATIVE SEQ. V
ZERO SEQ. I
ZERO SEQ. V
ZERO SEQ. V & I
STABILISER ON
STABILISER OFF
= Km
= Miles
= 100%
ENABLED
DISABLED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 71 of 345
3.13
Serial communications.
3.13.1
Introduction
Optimho Serial communications provides a means to access the relays menu
structure from a remote terminal.
The serial communications feature allows :
a)
b)
c)
The method of use is designed to remain similar to that provided on the relay
input keys by using the numeric keypad normally situated on the right hand side
of the keyboard.
Two RS232 connectors are provided on the relay, one for local use on the front of
the relay (designated LOCAL) and the second for remote use on the rear panel of
the relay (designated MODEM).
3.13.2
Security
Basic security is provided by the setting group 1 `group identifier' (see Section
3.10.1) which acts as a unique password. (see Section 3.13.5 "Logon procedure".)
In some applications where remote serial communication facilities are used, it
may be considered necessary to provide total security to prevent changes being
made to relay settings by unauthorised users. The ACCESS LEVEL setting can be
set to LIMITED to provide this security.
When using the MODEM port the ACCESS LEVEL setting can only be changed
from FULL to LIMITED.
When the ACCESS LEVEL is set to LIMITED, all settings can be viewed but only the
time and date settings can be changed. Also, the CLEAR ALL RECORDS option
and the commissioning options for ON LOAD DIR TEST and OUTPUT OPTION
are not available. Alteration of time and date values is allowed since it may be
necessary to reset the time/date in the event of a dc power failure.
When the ACCESS LEVEL is set to FULL all settings can be viewed and changed
with the exception that, when using the MODEM port, the ACTIVE PORT LOCAL
selection is not available , to prevent any user from accidentally selecting LOCAL
and therefore losing the serial communication link.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.13.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 72 of 345
Parity
NONE
EVEN
ODD
NONE
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
NONE
No of stop bits
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
Note 1: Where Optimho 100 is used over K-Bus, both the pc and the Optimho
must be matched to the KITZ101/102 and KITZ103 respectively with respect to
their baud rates and bit framing protocols, see publication R5832, KITZ103.
Control Lines
This option is only applicable to the MODEM (rear) port. If modem control lines
CTS (clear to send), DTR (data terminal ready), RTS (request to send) and DSR
(data set ready) are required, this option should be set to :'CONTROL LINES
'IN USE
'
'
If modem control lines are not required, this option should be set to :'CONTROL LINES
'NOT IN USE
'
'
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.13.4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 73 of 345
Hardware connections
The hardware connections for the two ports are shown in Figure 3-7. (Options 1
and 2). It should be noted that the LOCAL port is considered as a DCE (Data
communications equipment) whilst the MODEM port is configured as a DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment). This implies that should it be necessary to drive another
DTE from the MODEM port then the wires between pins 2 and 3 should be
crossed. (Figure 3-7 option 3).
In a substation environment it is recommended that the RS232 wires are isolated.
An optional optical isolator unit is available as shown in Figure 3-7 option 4.
Mounting points are provided on the rear of the relay for this optical isolator unit
type GT0022, details of which are available from GEC ALSTHOM T&D Protection
& Control, reference publication R-4082B.
3.13.5
Logon procedure
The serial communications may be accessed using either a VT100 (DEC
Corporation) or ANSI (American National Standards Institution) compatible
terminal or a proprietary VT100 terminal emulation software package running on
a personal computer.
The procedure to logon is as follows :
a)
b)
c)
These commands may be either upper or lower case characters but not a
combination.
Note:
The command "LOGON" will give the user access to a settings menu similar to
that seen on the relays liquid crystal display. The menu is displayed on two lines in
the top left hand corner of the screen. The seven keys on the front of the relay are
simulated by the numeric keypad normally found on the right hand side of the
keyboard :-
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 74 of 345
Once the settings menu has been entered the arrow keys are used to navigate
around the menu in the normal manner. The allocation of the keys is as follows:
key
8
key
2
key
6
key
4
SET key
5
RESET key
1
ACCEPT/READ key
All Print options are redirected to the terminal when serial communications is in
use. The communications software supports a character flow-control protocol
known as Xon/Xoff. (i.e. The screen can be paused by sending an Xoff character
and restarted by sending an Xon character.)
The designated character for Xoff is <Ctrl><S>.
The designated character for Xon is <Ctrl><Q>.
Note:
<Ctrl><S> signifies to press and hold the "Ctrl" key and press "S" or "s"
<Ctrl><Q> signifies to press and hold the "Ctrl" key and press "Q" or "q"
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 75 of 345
If no key is pressed in any 15 minute period the relay will automatically close
serial communications and send the closing message. This timeout ensures that in
the event of a prolonged failure in the communication link the relay is released
from serial communications.
Serial communications will also be logged off if the RESET key on the front of the
relay is pressed.
3.13.6
K-Bus interface
The introduction of the KITZ103, a K-Bus to Optimho interface unit, has made it
possible to group as a single network, the LFZP and K-Range relay families. It is
still possible to make a direct connection between a VT 100 type terminal or even
a pc emulation to an Optimho to gain access to the relay menu features, but
within Opticom, the dumb terminal and IEC 870 formatted data options are
mutually exclusive. For more information on the use of Optimho 100 over K-Bus,
including modem connections and communication parameter set-ups, see
publications R8532, KITZ103 and R5928, Opticom.
3.13.7
Modem requirements
Due to the wide variety of modems and possible configurations, it is not possible
to specify exact requirements, the user should always refer to the manufactures
manual for information regarding the use and operation of his modem. As a
general guide the following suggestions are given to assist the user in configuring
his modems for use with Optimho:
3.13.8
DTE and DCE devices should be set to operate at the same Baud rate.
Modems should be configured to ignore DTR.
The remote modem (relay location) should be set to Auto-Answer.
Any data compression, error checking, speed buffering or automatic speed
changing should be turned off.
Recommended modems
Modems which comply with the above requirements should be suitable for use
with Optimho. However, future GEC ALSTHOM T&D Protection & Control relays
and systems which utilise serial communications (i.e., K range relays) will comply
with IEC870 FT1.2 protocol. This protocol has several requirements that restrict
the choice of modems which may be used. This restriction results from the need to
support an eleven bit asynchronous frame with frames transmitted without idle
periods between characters. To assist customers in their choice of suitable
modems which will operate with Optimho and other GEC ALSTHOM T&D
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 76 of 345
Protection & Control relays and systems, the following modems have been
evaluated by GEC ALSTHOM T&D Protection & Control for use with the full
IEC870 FT1.2 protocol, and are recommended for use:
Must support 11 bit frame (one start bit, eight data bits, even
parity bit and one stop bit). This feature is not required if the
10 bit option is chosen.
2.
3.
Must save all the settings required to achieve connection in nonvolatile memory. This feature is only required for modems
at the outstation end of the link.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.13.9
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 77 of 345
Relay (Rear)
DTE
Modem
DCE
Relay (Front)
DCE
Terminal
DTE
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
Common
7
20
DTR
20
4
5
DTR
20
DSR
DCD
6
8
7
25 Pin
Connector
Option 2a
Relay (Front)
DCE
Terminal
DTE
2 TXD
TXD 2
3 RXD
RXD 3
Relay (Rear)
DTE
Terminal
DTE
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
9 Pin AT
7
Common
Connector
Option 2b
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
Common
GECAM
Optical
Isolator
Unit
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
6
7
Common
+12v
+12v
10
-12v
10
10
-12v
10
20
DTR
20
DTR
20
RTS
CTS
4
5
DTR
20
DSR
DCD
6
8
7
25 Pin
Connector
20
Option4
Figure 3-7
Modem
DCE
Common
Option 3
Relay (Rear)
DTE
3
RTS
CTS
Common
Option 1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.14
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 78 of 345
Test features
Optimho has several menu driven features to aid testing and commissioning.
These are to be found on the menu under the Commissioning Section and are
described in the following sections.
3.14.1
Contact control
This option allows all the relay output contacts to be disabled for example during
commissioning, and thus prevent tripping of the circuit breaker or remote alarms
being sent. A second option allows all contacts except Any Trip to be disabled.
The Any Trip contact can be used for timing or monitoring purposes. If either of
these two options are selected the green relay available LED is extinguished and
the relay inoperative alarm contact is closed. Also the default message on the
display indicates that the contacts are blocked. The normal setting will be all
contacts enabled.
3.14.2
When the SET key is released to deactivate the test the following actions occur
within the relay.
a)
b)
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.14.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 79 of 345
PwrSwg test
This test simplifies testing of the power swing blocking (PSB) feature. The relay
remains in service even when the test is enabled but the default message on the
display indicates that the PwrSwg TEST is enabled.
The test is provided to assist with two problems encountered during testing. On
relays that have optional DEF fitted the PSB Zone 6 comparator is blocked if the
negative sequence current detector (LDLSI2) operates. This would require the PSB
to be tested with balanced 3 phase faults which many test sets cannot deliver. This
test option removes this check thus allowing a AB phase fault to be used.
The second problem with some test sets is that while simulating a power swing a
transient pole dead condition may occur with the result that the PSB logic is
inhibited for 240ms. The test option removes this check.
3.14.4
Monitor option
This option enables all the input signals to the main microcontroller i.e. status of
level detectors, comparators & optical isolators and several internal signals to be
monitored.
Table 3-6 lists all the monitor options which are selected by a number and the
corresponding data which is displayed on the LCD while the monitor option page
is displayed. This information is also available on the parallel socket on the front
of the relay at all times.
The signals on the socket can be used for monitoring or to control timers etc. The
signal level is 0V corresponding to a 0 on the display or 5V corresponding to a 1.
The relay remains in service when the test options are being used.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 80 of 345
2
SLOT 1
DIAG
CpAZ1
CpAZ2
CpAZ3
MAG
INRUSH
OPTO
58-60
LD0VA
LDLSI0
3
SLOT 5
DIAG
CpBZ1
CpBZ2
CpBZ3
DEF BU
STSRT
OPTO
62-64
LD0VB
LDLSI2
Z1
Z1XT
Z1YT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
UP
SK2-17
LDCpAZ1
LDCpAZ2
LDCpAZ3
RL29-31
RL30-32
RL57-59
Count 4
RIGHT
SK2-16
LDCpBZ1
LDCpBZ2
LDCpBZ3
RL29-33
RL30-34
RL57-61
0
18
19
Timer 1
Timer 2
20
21
Z1REACH
Timer 1
ZIXREACH
Timer 2
22
Timer 1
Timer 2
23
LD0VA
LD0VB
24
EEPROM
Settings
Signal
Start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
25
Signal
Stop
8
SLOT 10
DIAG
0
0
CpABZ6
0
9
SLOT 11
DIAG
0
0
0
0
0
OPTO
74-76
LDLSA
LDHSA
OPTO
78-80
LDLSB
LDHSB
OPTO
82-84
LDLSC
LDHSC
Z2T
Z3T
LDCpABZ6
DOWN
SK2-15
LDCpCZ1
LDCpCZ2
LDCpCZ3
RL29-35
RL30-36
RL57-63
Pole
Dead C
0
LEFT
SK2-14
LDCpABZ1
LDCpABZ2
LDCpABZ3
RL37-39
RL38-40
RL65-67
Pole
Dead B
0
SET
SK2-13
LDCpBCZ1
LDCpBCZ2
LDCpBCZ3
RL41-43
RL42-44
RL69-71
Pole
Dead A
0
READ
SK2-12
LDCpCAZ1
LDCpCAZ2
LDCpCAZ3
RL45-47
RL46-48
RL73-75
0
SOTF
Trip
RESET
SK2-10
0
0
LDCpABZ6
RL49-51
RL50-52
RL77-79
0
SK2-11
0
0
0
RL53-55
RL54-56
RL81-83
0
DEF
Aided
Z1YREACH
Any
Trip
Any
Trip
Any
Trip
EEPROM
Records
Any
Trip
DIST
Aided
0
DEF_R
Filter
(I)
DEF_F
Ampl.
Hyst
Z3
Comp
0
Filter
(V)
Z2
Comp
0
Signal
Send
Signal
Send
Signal
Send
Internal
RAM
Test
Point
LGS
opto
LGS
opto
LDLSA
CRX
opto
CRX
opto
LDLSB
Z3
Comp
DEF-R
Z2
Comp
DEF-F
External
RAM
DEF-R
LCD
Z3
Comp
ANOMAL
CRX
opto
0
Z3
Comp
Z2
Comp
DEF-F
LDLSN
LDHSN
TZ6
Timed
Out
SOTF
En
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.14.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 81 of 345
Output options
This option allows each output contact to be closed individually for testing
purposes. The relay is taken out of service indicated by the green relay available
LED being extinguished and the relay inoperative alarm contact closed when the
message push SET to test is displayed. On pushing SET the appropriate contact is
closed.
Table 3-7 relates test numbers to contacts. Test numbers 24 to 27 can be used for
circuit breaker trip tests. For example test 24 is used to simulate a single pole trip
on A phase. The test closes all contacts labelled Trip A or Any Trip for the
particular contact arrangement selected. Similarly test 25 simulates a single pole
trip on B phase and test 26 a single pole trip on C phase. Test 27 simulates a 3
pole trip closing all trip contacts. For 3 pole only tripping schemes tests 24 to 26
are inoperative. If the contacts are blocked as described earlier the message
Contacts Blocked is given on the display.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 82 of 345
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Contact operated
29-33
29-35
37-39
41-43
45-47
49-51
53-55
30-32
30-34
30-36
38-40
42-44
46-48
50-52
54-56
57-59
57-61
57-63
65-67
69-71
73-75
77-79
81-83
Trip A & Any Trip
Trip B & Any Trip
Trip C & Any Trip
Trip A, B, C, 3Ph & Any Trip
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
3.14.6
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 83 of 345
Table 3-8
Note:
Printer
Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
STB (Pin 1)
D0 (Pin 2)
D1 (Pin 3)
D2 (Pin 4)
D3 (Pin 5)
D4 (Pin 6)
D5 (Pin 7)
D6 (Pin 8)
D7 (Pin 9)
Do not connect
BUSY (Pin 11)
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
0v (Pin 22)
0v (Pin 23)
0v (Pin 24)
0v (Pin 25)
Function Name
Printer strobe
(Output)
Data line D0
Output)
Data line D1
(Output)
Data line D2
(Output)
Data line D3
Output)
Data line D4
Output)
Data line D5
Output)
Data line D6
(Output)
Data line D7
(Output)
Data line D6 RESET key
( Input)
Data line D7 Printer Busy
(Input)
Data line D5 READ key
(Input)
Data line D4 SET key
(Input)
Data line D3 LEFT key
(Input)
Data line D2 DOWN key
(Input)
Data line D1 RIGHT key
(Input)
Data line D0 UP key
( Input)
5v
Monitor
(Output)
12v
Monitor
(Output)
-12v
Monitor
(Output)
12v(Relay) Monitor
( Output)
0v
0v
(Note: All 0v are commoned,
0v
only 1 connection is necessary)
0v
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 84 of 345
The monitor options may also be selected using an appropriate code applied to
the input data lines of the parallel socket as shown in the Table 3-9. This feature
can be used with automatic test sets to select monitor options. Note there will be a
20ms delay before the option is available.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 85 of 345
NB:
D7
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D6
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D5
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D4
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D3
14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D2
15
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
D1
16
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
D0
17
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Monitor
option
no selected
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 86 of 345
The comparator
The important requirements of high speed and high stability have both been
satisfied in the comparator design. Usually these two requirements are in
contention because the greater the operating speed, the greater the risk of false
operation caused by contaminated relay input signals. Signal contamination's
include harmonic components, switching surges, lightning impulses, travelling
waves, exponential decays, saturated current transformer waveforms and
interference voltage induced on low voltage wiring due to switching on the high
voltage system.
The comparator resolves the speed/stability contention by checking its own input
signals to verify that they are dominated by components consistent with power
system frequency waveforms. If verification is obtained the full operating speed is
allowed. If verification is not obtained, the comparator demands more data
before tripping can be allowed, thereby automatically extending the signal
processing time sufficiently to ensure that no maloperation can occur. By suitable
filtering and preconditioning of the comparator input signals, the relay design ensures that the comparator is able to operate at its highest speed for the majority
of transmission line faults.
The sequence comparator employed in the Optimho range of distance relays
derives its pedigree from Micromho and Quadramho distance protections, and
embodies the experience gained in the development and application of these
products.
4.1.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 87 of 345
The comparator processes the input "square waves" as logic variables which can
each have a high (H) or low (L) logic state at any time. To facilitate the following
explanation, signal A will be described as A(H) or A(L) depending on its logic state
at a particular instant of time, and signal B will be described as B(H) or B(L).
There are four possible combinations of logic state:
A(L).B(L)
A(L).B(H)
A(H).B(H)
A(H).B(L)
If both signals have unity mark/space ratios and equal periods but different
phases, then the four combinations will occur in a cyclic manner.
There are only two possible sequences of these combinations, as shown in Figure
4-2. These are :
If A leads B:
A(H).B(H), A(L).B(H), A(L).B(L), A(H).B(L), A(H).B(H)
If A lags B:
A(H).B(H), A(H).B(L), A(L).B(L), A(L).B(H), A(H).B(H)
From these the following logic statements can be deduced.
a)
b)
to
The comparator processor algorithm scrutinizes the input signals at each change
of state to decide which of the two states is true and thus determine whether the
sequence is progressing in a restrain or tripping direction. The comparator
algorithm can identify the direction of the progression from a single change of
logic state of either input, and from any starting point in the sequence.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 88 of 345
The presence of noise can introduce false changes of state unconnected with the
true signals at the power system frequency. A single change of state matching the
trip sequence does not necessarily represent a fault condition within the protected
section of line. Greater security is obtained if the criterion for tripping is to receive
a number of successive changes of state each of which matches the tripping
sequence. The comparator therefore has a counter for determining whether one,
two, three or four such changes have been observed. Each acceptable change
matching the tripping sequence adds to the total count (up to a maximum of
four), while every change matching the restrain sequence subtracts from the total
count (down to a minimum of zero).
The criterion for operation for self-polarised characteristics is a count of three. For
partially cross-polarised characteristics, if the input signals are relatively noise and
transient free, a count of two is sufficient.
The action of the counter for a typical fault within the measuring zone is shown in
Figure 4-3.
4.1.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 89 of 345
b)
That a time of 0.35 cycle of nominal system frequency has
expired since the counter was incremented to one. This
ensures adequate processing time in the event of disturbances
causing polarising phase shifts.
c)
If these criteria are not met, then tripping on count 2 is disabled until the
comparator receives four consecutive down-counts after reaching a count of 0.
Whilst tripping on count two is disabled the comparator will issue a trip when the
counter is incremented to three. Figure 4-6 shows a flowchart representation of
the comparator logic.
A further safeguard is provided against incorrect directional response caused by
capacitor voltage transformers which have severe transient voltage errors.
The CVTs concerned are those with near system frequency components in their
transient error waveforms, against which the comparator controls are ineffective.
The safeguard comprises a directional sequence comparator, which compares the
IZ vector with the polarising vector. This polarising vector (see Section 4.2) has
sufficient synchronous polarising present to mask out the CVT transient from the
polarising signal.
If the directional comparator indicates that a fault lies in the reverse direction of
the relay, the main comparator is inhibited (i.e. it treats all counts as if they were
in a restrain sequence) thus preventing relay mal-operation.
4.1.3
Exclusion of noise
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 90 of 345
The following interfacing and preconditioning measures ensure that the full high
speed performance potential of the comparator is achieved even with severely
contaminated relay input signals.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 91 of 345
IX
V-IZ
IZ
Fault
outside
characteristic
Fault on
boundary
Fault inside
characteristic
IR
Vpol = V -90
Figure 4-1 Sequence comparator voltages for mho characteristics
Sine wave
inputs
A = V-IZ
B = V -90
Squared
inputs
Logic states
B
AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
RESTRAIN CONDITION
Figure 4-2
AB AB AB AB AB AB
OPERATE CONDITION
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 92 of 345
Fault Occurs
A
B
AB AB AB AB AB
AB
AB AB AB AB AB AB
4
3
2
Counter
Figure 4-3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 93 of 345
BURST OF
INTERFERENCE
SQUARED INPUTS
V-IZ
Vpol
1
COUNTER
0
NO SECOND UP-COUNT
AS CHANGES SPACED 0.15 < CYCLE
Figure 4-4
FAULT OCCURS
OUTSIDE BOUNDARY
OF OPERATION
SINUSOIDAL
V-IZ
INPUT
V-IZ
SQUARED
INPUTS
Vpol
1
COUNTER
NO SEC0ND UP-COUNT
AS CHANGES SPACED <0.15 CYCLE
Figure 4-5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 94 of 345
Read inputs
is
reset input
high ?
Reset output
Reset all Count registers
Set all Block registers
Restart Timer 1
Reset Timer 2
yes
no
2
is
inhibit input
high
?
no
yes
is
count 2
register
set ?
yes
set ALL
block registers
no
1
is
count 2
register
set ?
yes
no
is
Timer 2
finished
?
is
block 1
register
set ?
yes
yes
no
no
are
4 counts
required
?
are
3 counts
required
?
no
yes
no
SET OUTPUT
yes
has
no input A or B
changed
?
yes
Notes
has
input A
changed
?
does
B=A
?
yes
yes
no
yes
no
has
input B
changed
?
no
no
yes
Re-start
Timer 1
yes
RESTRAIN
Finish Timer 1
3
OPERATE
no
is
Timer 1
finished ?
is
count 1
register
set ?
no
is
count 1
register
set ?
no
is
block 2
register
set ?
set ALL
block registers
no
is
count 2
register
set ?
is
count 2
register
set ?
yes
no
is
count 3
register
set ?
Set count
register 4
no
is
count 4
register
set ?
is
count 4
register
set ?
yes
yes
SET OUTPUT
Figure 4-6
Reset count
register 1
reset timer 2
reset output
Reset block
register 1
Reset count
register 4
Sequence comparator
is
block 3
register
set ?
no
Reset block
register 2
no
Reset block
register 3
yes
no
Reset count
register 2
is
block 4
register
set ?
yes
yes
yes
are
4 counts
required
?
no
is
count 3
register
set ?
no
yes
yes
Set count
register 3
no
yes
yes
Set count
register 2
no
yes
yes
yes
Set count
register 1
Start Timer 2
is
block 1
register
set ?
no
Reset count
register 3
Reset block
register 4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 95 of 345
Polarising arrangements
To simplify the description, the mho characteristic has been described in Section
4.1.1 as if it were self polarised. In fact, partial healthy phase cross polarising and
partial synchronous polarising components are used. These extra polarising
components are used in order to satisfy the following requirements:
a)
b)
c)
Both the healthy phase and synchronous components are square wave signals of
amplitude 16% of the peak prefault voltage vectors. Under unbalanced fault
conditions, the proportion of healthy phase polarising is enough to overcome the
effects of normal CVT transients. Under three phase fault conditions, the synchronous polarising works in a similar way. Figure 4-7 shows that by adding a
16% square wave to the CVT error, the correct zero crossings of the polarising
voltage are restored. The polarising signal is squared up and phase retarded by
90 to become input B of the comparator as described in Section 4.1.
The unique shapes of the partially cross polarised mho practical polar
characteristics, shown in Figure 4-8, have been achieved by suitable choice of the
wave shape of the signals involved in the polarising mixing circuits. In
conventional polarising mixing circuits all the signals are sine waves, but in the
Optimho the synchronous polarising and sound phase cross polarising components are square waves. The advantages of these unique polar characteristics are
obtained with only one two input comparator, enabling optimum operating time
to be obtained. Due to the partial synchronous polarising component, the resistive
expansion is maintained for three phase faults. The top line of the expanded
characteristic is part of a fully cross polarised circle and moves with prefault
power flow so as to avoid overreach or underreach.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2.1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 96 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 97 of 345
For the B-C polarising mixing circuit (also shown in Figure 4-9) The A-G
polarising signal VPol A is level shifted by the action of IC3 to produce the bipolar
signal VPOL A. A set of resistors R8, R9, R10, and R11 are used to mix VPOL A
with VB and VC in such proportions that the peak value of VPOL A corresponds to
16% of the peak value of VB-VC at the input of squaring amplifier IC4. The
output VQBC of IC4 is phase shifted through a lagging angle of 90 by a shift
register and is then supplied to the comparator.
The phase of VQBC is determined largely by the zero crossings of VB-VC under
all types of fault conditions except B-C, B-C-G and three phase faults which cause
the B-C voltage to collapse. For these conditions of low B-C voltage the VPOL A
input dominates the phase of the polarising signal. VPOL A in turn is controlled by
VA if this fault involves the B-C or B-C-G phases, or by Vmem A if the fault
involves all three phases. Therefore, if VB-VC collapses below 16%, the B-C unit is
effectively fully cross polarised and consequently the resistive expansion of the
impedance characteristic is greater than for a conventional partially cross polarised relay. Furthermore, the resistive expansion also applies to three phase faults.
The combination of the sine wave faulty phase voltage with the square wave cross
polarising (or synchronous polarising) voltage results in a phase displacement of
the resultant polarising signal from its prefault position which is different from that
of a conventional partially cross polarised mho. Figure 4-10 shows the
relationship of the phase displacements of the faulty phase and polarising signals
for Optimho and conventionally polarised comparators, drawn for a typical fault
voltage amplitude. In Optimho the displacement of the polarising signal is zero
until the faulted phase is displaced by more than a critical angle , the capture
angle. Once the critical angle is exceeded, the polarising voltage phase
displacement rises linearly with the faulted phase voltage displacement.
The explanation for this behaviour is shown in Figures 4-11 and 4-12. Figure
4-11, shows an example of the composition of the polarising signal in Optimho.
The faulted phased sine wave is drawn here for a fault voltage of 25%, displaced
by 30 lagging, relative to the prefault values. This signal is summed with the
square wave cross polarising signal whose magnitude is 16% of the prefault sine
wave peak voltage. The zero crossings of the resultant signal remain in phase
with those of the cross polarising signal, that is, no displacement from the prefault
position.
Figure 4-12 shows conditions similar to Figure 4-11, but with the faulted phase
voltage displaced by 60. Under these conditions the resultant polarising signal is
displaced by about 20 from its prefault position, because the faulted phase
displacement exceeds the captive angle by this amount.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 98 of 345
When the displacement of the faulted phase voltage is just equal to the captive
angle ;
Vpk(sin ) = VPol
Vpol
Vpk
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 99 of 345
Synchronous polarising
The synchronous polarising signal is available for 16 cycles following a three
phase close up fault. This time is sufficient to keep the Zone 1 comparators in a
stable condition for a reverse fault, until the fault is cleared by other protection. In
the case of a forward fault, 16 cycles is more than sufficient to allow Optimho to
trip and clear the fault. (or to bring in breaker fail protection if necessary)
Under three phase close up fault conditions, the polarising signal is controlled by
the synchronous polarising signal Vmem A (see Figure 4-9). After 16 cycles this
power system frequency signal is replaced by 0.3% of -IA ZPh. This limits the
directional sensitivity of the comparator, once the synchronous polarising has
expired, to approximately 1.3% of rated voltage, for three phase faults.
The synchronous polarising system is implemented as a software control feature
of a microcontroller on the Zone 1 / Zone 2 comparator board (see Section 6.9),
and the basis of the system is a set of 64 registers of 8 bits each, which may be
imagined as being arranged in a carousel as shown in Figure 4-13. The carousel
may be regarded as rotating anticlockwise under healthy live conditions on the
transmission line.
Phase B voltage is used as a reference signal for prefault phase information, after
being squared by a high gain amplifier. The length of one half-cycle is measured
in units of 108s (the timer interrupt period of the microcontroller) and the
number of units is stored in a register. When this half-cycle finishes, the carousel
is rotated anticlockwise by one register and the length of the next half-cycle
measured and stored.
This process continues indefinitely, with new data overwriting the old when all 64
registers are full.
To generate the synchronous polarising output signals, an examination is made of
the data held in the 8th register anticlockwise from the present input register when
the outputs are connected. This number is then used to determine the length of
the output half-cycle required. When the output half-cycle has been produced the
polarity of the output is reversed and another examination is made of the data
held in the next register anticlockwise from the last one used. The next half-cycle is
generated accordingly. This process is repeated indefinitely, producing the
synchronous polarising output waveforms.
This method allows the reproduction of the frequency of the input signal VB. The
output is phase locked with the input, during healthy line conditions, by effectively
adjusting the number in the output register by plus or minus one, every fourth
output edge, to bring the output into phase with VB as closely as possible. The
microcontroller also produces signals +120 and -120 with respect to VB,
thereby providing three synchronous polarising signals Vmem A, Vmem B and
Vmem C.
When any voltage level detector resets, or any comparator operates, this is
deemed to be a faulty or dead line condition and the memory is allowed to run
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 100 of 345
4.2.4
)
)
comparator C1
) (main comparator)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 101 of 345
A2 = V - IZ
)
) comparator C2
) (inhibit comparator)
B2 = (V + IZ') /-
The intersections of the two circles occur on the characteristic angle of the relay
and determine the forward and reverse reach of the lenticular characteristic. The
reach remains independent of the comparison angles.
The aspect ratio, or ratio of the length of the minor and major axes of the
lenticular shape, is determined by the angle . The aspect ratio can be set to
0.41, 0.67 and 1.00.
The block diagram is shown in Figure 4-17. The inhibit comparator consists only
of basic circuitry for determining whether changes of state of the input signals
constitute an operate or a restrain sequence. There is no counter associated with
the inhibit comparator as its purpose is only to provide a signal for the inhibit
terminal of the main comparator. Therefore the main comparator only produces
a trip signal for faults within the lenticular characteristic.
4.2.5
)
)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 102 of 345
A3 = V + IR
B3 = IZ
)
)
A4 = VPol
B4 = IZ
)
)
"directional" line
Throughout, V is the faulty phase voltage, VPol is the partially cross polarised
voltage described under "polarising mixing circuits" and IZ is the residually
compensated vector (IPhZPh + INZN) from the transactors. The IR signal for the
resistance lines is derived from the phase current only, the absence of residual
compensation permitting good phase selection for single pole tripping purposes.
This method of producing a quadrilateral characteristic has several advantages
over other methods:
4.2.6
a)
b)
c)
b)
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 103 of 345
shaped
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2.7
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 104 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2.8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 105 of 345
I/Ps
Mho
Quad
A1
As Mho
B1
{VA+0.16[2VA-VB-VC+0.16VMA]}/-90
=Vpol A
(VA - VB)/KZ1 - (IA - IB)ZPh
INR
Zone 1A
A2
Zone1 AB
B2
A1
Zone 1 B
B1
A2
Zone 1 BC
B2
A1
Zone 1 C
B1
A2
Zone 1 CA
As Mho
{VB+0.16[2VB-VC-VA+0.16VMB]}/-90
=Vpol B
(VB - VC)/KZ1 - (IB - IC)ZPh
INR
As Mho
As Mho
As Mho
{VC+0.16[2VC-VA-VB+0.16VMC]}/-90
=Vpol C
(VC - VA)/KZ1 - (IC - IA)ZPh
INR
As Mho
As Mho
As Mho
A1
B1
A2
Vpol A
(VA - VB)/KZ2 - (IA - IB)ZPh
IAR + INR
As Mho
B2
A1
Vpol AB
VB/KZ2 - IBZPh - INZN
As Mho
As Mho
B1
A2
V pol B
(VB - VC)/KZ2 - (IB - IC)ZP
IBR + INR
As Mho
B2
A1
Vpol BC
VC/KZ2 - ICZPh - INZN
As Mho
As Mho
B1
A2
Vpol C
(VC - VA)/KZ2 - (IC - IA)ZPh
ICR + INR
As Mho
B2
DA1
Vpol CA
-IAZPh - INZN
As Mho
Vpol A
DB1
DA2
IA ZPh + INZN
VA + IAR
DB2
DA1
Not Used
-IBZPh - INZN
IAZPh + INZN
Vpol B
DB1
VC - VA + 0.16Vpol B
IBZPh + INZN
Zone 2 A
Zone 2 AB
Zone 2 B
Zone 2 BC
Zone 2 C
Zone 2 CA
A Directional
Side Line
B2
A Left Hand
As Mho
B Directional
As Mho
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 106 of 345
Function
I/Ps
Mho
Quad
B Left Hand
DA2
Not Used
VB + IBR
Side Line
DB2
DA1
Not Used
-ICZPh - INZN
IBZPh + INZN
Vpol C
DB1
DA2
VA - VB + 0.16Vpol C
Not Used
ICZPh + INZN
VC + ICR
DB2
DA1
Not Used
-IABZPh
ICZPh + INZN
Vpol AB
DB1
DA2
VQC=2VC-(VA+VB)+0.16VmemC
Not Used
IABZPh
IAZPh + INZN
DB2
DA1
Not Used
-IBCZPh
DB1
DA2
VQA=2VA-(VB+VC)+0.16memA
Not Used
VA - IAR
Vpol BC
IBCZPh
IBZPh + INZN
DB2
DA1
Not Used
-ICAZPh
VB - IBR
Vpol CA
DB1
DA2
VQB=2VB-(VC+VA)+0.16VmemB
Not Used
ICAZPh
ICZPh + INZN
DB2
A1
Not Used
(VA/KZ3 - IAZPh - INZN)/-
VC - ICR
VA/KZ3-IAZPh-INZN
B1
A2
IAR + INR
As Mho
B2
A1
As Mho
VB/KZ3 - IBZPh - INZN
B1
A2
IBR + INR
As Mho
B2
A1
As Mho
VC/KZ3 - ICZPh - INZN
B1
A2
ICR + INR
As Mho
B2
A1
As Mho
IAR + INR
B1
A2
Not Used
{(VA - VB)/KZ6 - (IA - IB)ZPh}/-
B2
As Mho
C Directional
C Left Hand
Side Line
AB Directional
A Right Hand
Side Line
BC Directional
B Right Hand
Side Line
CA Directional
C Right Hand
Side Line
Zone 3 A
Zone 3 AB
Zone 3 B
Zone 3 BC
Zone 3 C
Zone3 CA
Zone 3' A
Zone 6 AB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Function
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 107 of 345
I/Ps
Mho
Quad
A1
Not Used
IBR + INR
B1
A2
Not Used
Not Used
B2
DA1
Not Used
VA/KZ3 - IAZPh - INZN
DB1
DA2
Not Used
Not Used
DB2
DA1
Not Used
Not Used
DB1
DA2
Not Used
Not Used
DB2
DA1
Not Used
Not Used
DB1
DA2
Not Used
Not Used
DB2
DA1
Not Used
VA/10KZ1 - IAZPh
DB1
DA2
Not Used
(VA - VB)/KZ6 - (IA - IB)ZPh
IAZPh/-10
Not Used
DB2
DA1
Not Used
VB/10KZ1 - IBZPh
DB1
DA2
Not Used
Not Used
IBZPh/-10
VC/10KZ1 - ICZPh
DB2
Not Used
ICZPh/-10
Zone 3' B
Zone 3'C
Zone 3 A INH
Zone 3 AB INH
Zone 3 B INH
Zone 3 BC INH
Zone 3 C INH
Zone 3 CA INH
A Guard Zone
Zone 6 AB INH
B Guard Zone
C Guard Zone
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 108 of 345
FAULT
INCIDENCE
FAULTY
PHASE
VOLTAGE
CVT ERROR
16% SYNCHRONOUS
POLARISING
POLARISING VOLTAGE
Figure 4-7
PHASE SHIFT)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 109 of 345
Figure 4-8
12
24
60
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Vmem A
VA
R1
R2
R3
VB
VC
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 110 of 345
R4
+
-
R5
BC Directional polarising
R6
0V
R7
+
-90 o
Vpol A
IC2
0V
0V
+
-12V
VPOL A
IC3
LFZP11X only
VQBC = (VB - VC) + 0.16VPOL A
R8
0V
R9
Vpol BC
-90 o
R10
IC4
0V
R11
0V
Figure 4-9
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 111 of 345
140
ANGLE OF
RESULTANT
POLARISING
SIGNAL
RELATIVE TO
PRE-FAULT
[ LAG]
120
100
100% Self-polarised
80
16% Sinewave
Cross-polarised
60
40
16% Squarewave
Cross-polarised
20
100% Cross-polarised
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
LAG]
X
100% Cross-polarised
16% Squarewave
Cross-polarised
R
EXTRA RESISTIVE
COVERAGE
16% Sinewave
Cross-polarised
Figure 4-10
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 112 of 345
30
16%
16%
16%
90
270
360 etc.
A + B
D
Figure 4-11
180
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 113 of 345
60
16%
16%
16%
20
90
270
360 etc.
A + B
Figure 4-12
180
Critical angle
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 114 of 345
ROTATION
ANTICLOCKWISE
92 92 93 92 91 91 92
92
92
92
92
91
DATA OUT
92
92
91
93
92
91
92
92
Figure 4-13
ROTATION
REVERSED
93
21 58 41 92 92
92
92
92
92
91
DATA OUT
92
93
92
Figure 4-14
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 115 of 345
jI X
IZ
V-IZ
V
V+IZ`
IR
-IZ`
(V+IZ`) -90
Figure 4-15
jI X
MAIN
COMPARATOR
INHIBIT
COMPARATOR
(V-IZ)
B
V-IZ
A
IZ
A
V+ IZ`
IR
- I Z`
(V+IZ`)
B
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 116 of 405
a
b =
ASPECT
RATIO
LENTICULAR ZONE 3
a
= 1.00
b
= 90
1
tan (180 2
0.67
67.5
0.41
45
BOUNDARY
OF
LOAD
V-IZ
PHASE
SHIFT
INHIBIT
COMPARATOR
MAIN
INHIBIT
C1
C2
V+IZ'
Figure 4-17
COMPARATOR
B
PHASE
SHIFT
OUTPUT
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 117 of 345
IX
3 tilt
ZI
IR
-R
Left hand sideline
has 20% more
resistive reach
( see Fig.4-21 )
Figure 4-18
Quadrilateral Zone 1
A4= Vpol ph
B4= Iph Zph + In Zn
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 118 of 345
10X Z1ph
-10
TOP LINE OF QUAD
R.H. QUAD
ZN(RESIDUAL COMP)
Z1
Z1ph
10X Z1ph
R.H.GUARD ZONE
(R.H. QUAD)
Zn
Zph
Z1
Figure 4-19
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 119 of 345
Guard Zone A
&
Pole Dead A
&
&
&
Guard Zone B
&
Pole Dead B
=1
Guard Zone C
&
Pole dead C
Figure 4-20
IX
3 tilt
A1 = V-IZ
B1 = IPhR+INR
IZ
A3 = V+IR
B3 = IZ
A2 = IZ
B2 = V-IR
IR
-IR
-IZ`
Figure 4-21
Quadrilateral zone 3
A5 = IPhR+INR
B5 = V+IZ`
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.3
Level detectors
4.3.1
Introduction
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 120 of 345
On de-energising a transmission line, line voltage transformers can supply one input
terminal of the comparators with low frequency voltage waveforms, particularly if
electromagnetic transformers are connected to the isolated line. To avoid the risk of
false operation of the relay comparators caused by the continuing presence of
synchronous polarising of the other input of the comparators, phase current level
detectors are provided. These have a very fast reset time and are used to block
comparator operation when the line is de-energised as shown in Figure 4-22. The
actual blocking operation is performed under software control in the main
microcontroller.
The principle of operation of the current level detectors is explained with the help of
Figure 4-23. If the instantaneous amplitude of the input voltage (VIN) exceeds a
threshold setting VREF either on a positive half cycle or on an inverted negative half
cycle, a timer T1 is started. If T1 finishes before the non inverted or the inverted input
signal has fallen below VREF, the input sine wave is known to be greater than the
level detector setting and the output is set high.
At the same time as the output is set, a second timer T2 is started, whose purpose is
to bridge the time interval between the positive and negative half cycles. So while T2
is running, the output cannot reset. When the level VREF is exceeded on the next half
cycle, the output is kept in the operated state. Only if the threshold level fails to be
exceeded on the next half cycle, is the output reset after T2 finishes. The output also
resets if the input signal becomes a unidirectional signal greater than VREF, after
both T1 and T2 have timed out. Positive feedback is applied from output to input to
give a reset/operate ratio of 0.85 to prevent chatter when the input signal is at the
pick-up level.
The current level detectors are designed to restrict the operative range of the relay,
preventing excessive sensitivity, although because they have a low setting (5% of
rated current at the relay reference setting), this restriction does not constitute any
practical disadvantage. Hence the maximum SIR for ground faults is 126 and for
phase faults is 219. The operating time of the level detector circuit is fast enough not
to limit the minimum operating time of the relay. The maximum reset time of the
level detector is less than the fastest practical comparator operating time.
4.3.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 121 of 345
In addition to the current level detectors, the relay contains voltage level detectors
operating on a similar principle, with a setting of approximately 70% of rated
voltage. If the transmission line is de-energised, the voltage and current level detectors of the de-energised poles reset, a "pole dead" signal is produced and after 20ms
is supplied to the "inhibit" terminals of the relevant comparators as shown in Figure
4-24. This terminal, when activated, causes the counter of the comparator to register
all changes of state of each input A and B as down counts. The counters of any
comparators which have operated, will be rapidly decremented to zero when the
transmission line is de-energised. The implementation of the "Pole Dead" signals is
performed by software operations in the main microcontroller.
With 3 pole tripping there may be no signal on either input of the comparator during
the time the line is de-energised. Under these conditions the comparator may remain
operated or partially operated. To ensure a full reset on detecting all the poles are
dead all the comparators are reset by the main microcontroller.
4.3.3
4.3.4
Phase selection
A problem with full scheme distance relays is that heavy close up single phase faults
can sometimes intrude into the operating characteristics of the phase fault
comparators, causing a three pole trip where a single pole trip would be
appropriate. In Optimho a special neutral current level detector is used to block the
phase fault comparators to prevent this type of incorrect trip.
This neutral current detector, known as the "high set" (LDHSN), has a setting level
which is biased by the maximum amplitude of phase difference current flowing at
any time. The three phase to phase signals IA-IB, IB-IC and IC-IA are rectified by a
precision three phase full wave rectifier and a peak level formed by a fast charge
slow discharge smoothing circuit. A fixed proportion of this level is then used as the
value VREF in a level detector of the type previously described. See Figure 4-25.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 122 of 345
In order to prevent chatter of the output and also to give the level detector a
minimum sensitivity under no load or very low load conditions, a fixed minimum
reference level is "ORed" with the variable reference.
For practical reasons, an upper limit to the reference level is used to ensure that
under very heavy fault current conditions the detector will operate correctly and not
be limited by internal power supply rails.
The signal input to the neutral detectors is derived by summing together the
individual phase current signals, in order to maintain the relay sensitivity
independent of residual compensation setting.
A similar "low set" neutral current detector (LDLSN) is used to enable the ground fault
comparators, thereby preventing wrong operation of a ground fault comparator
under heavy close up phase-phase fault conditions. See Figure 4-26. The low set
neutral detector is also used by the Voltage Transformer Supervision feature since it
has a high degree of immunity from operating under unbalanced load conditions.
Biasing the neutral current detector has distinct advantages. The detector can be set
sensitive enough to operate for all single phase faults which could cause phase fault
comparator maloperation, without any risk of the detector picking up on neutral spill
current during phase to phase faults. Neutral spill current arises from mismatched
current transformers, CT saturation, etc. The biasing also ensures that the phase fault
comparators are generally enabled during two phase to ground faults, permitting
the relay to give its fastest possible three pole trip. For two phase to ground faults
with high resistance in the neutral, only the phase fault comparators are enabled,
avoiding possible measuring errors which ground fault comparators can exhibit
under these conditions. For conditions where the fault resistance places the fault
impedance just outside the ground fault comparator characteristic, but with sufficient
neutral spill current to still block the phase fault comparators, a special logic feature
is employed (see Figure 5-3) whereby if the "high set" detector operates for 35ms
without any Zone 1 or Zone 2 ground fault comparator operating, then the "high set"
block of the phase fault comparator is removed.
4.3.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
V-IZ
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 123 of 345
COMPARATOR
POLE DEAD
INHIBIT
OUT
V POL
B
&
I
Figure 4-22
LOW SET
LEVEL DETECTOR
TRIP
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 124 of 345
T1
T2
+Vref
START
VIN
-Vref
T1
IS
MODULUS OF
INSTANTANEOUS
VALUE OF Vin
> Vref?
NO
IS
TIMER T2
RUNNING?
RESET TIMER T1
RESET FLAG
YES
NO
YES
SET OUTPUT LOW
IS
FLAG
SET?
YES
RESTORE Vref
NO
IS
TIMER T1
RESET?
NO
YES
HAS
TIMER T1
FINISHED?
YES
START TIMER T1
SET FLAG
RESET TIMER T2
START TIMER T2
INITIAL
CONDITIONS
LET Vref=Vref*0.9
FLAG RESET
TIMERS RESET
Vref NORMAL
OUTPUT LOW
Figure 4-23
NO
Level detector
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 125 of 345
LEVEL DETECTOR
22.5ms
1
V
t
0
VOLTAGE
POLE DEAD
SIGNAL
TO INHIBIT
COMPARATORS
LEVEL DETECTOR
Figure 4-24
LDIA
PRECISION FULL WAVE RECTIFIER
FAST CHARGE
SLOW DISCHARGE
LDIB
REFERENCE
LEVEL
LDIC
Figure 4-25
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 126 of 345
GREATEST
Figure 4-26
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.4
4.4.1
Introduction
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 127 of 345
The directional ground fault (DEF) feature is used to cover high resistance ground
faults. It employs separate forward and reverse looking directional elements, two
zero sequence current level detectors and an overcurrent unit.
The directional elements have four types of polarising allowing a choice of zero
sequence voltage, zero sequence current, dual zero sequence current and voltage,
and negative sequence voltage.
The directional units are used in a number of aided tripping schemes. The
overcurrent unit allows for time delayed backup tripping with a choice of definite
time, inverse IEC or American curves.
Stabilisation against magnetising inrush currents when energising a line with in-zone
transformers is provided.
4.4.2
Implementation
Most of the hardware required to implement the DEF protection is located on the
DEF board ZJ0139. The level detectors are on the level detector board ZJ0136 and
the controlling logic is run in the main processor on ZJ0138.
Figure 4-27 shows a simplified block diagram of the hardware. Figure 4-28 shows
the logic equivalent of the software.
4.4.3
Directional elements
The directional elements employ two sequence comparators of the type described in
Section 4.1 one being forward looking, the other reverse. The A and B inputs are
dependent on the type of polarising selected and are shown in Figure 4-29 for the
forward looking element. The inputs are reversed for the reverse looking element.
The directional element inhibit is controlled by the low set zero sequence level
detector (LDLSI0), and by the high set level detector (LDHSI0)(If the DEF aided
tripping is selected).
The level detectors ensure the comparators are fully restrained under all but fault
conditions. Without this check the unbalance in the zero sequence quantities would
result in the comparators partially operating and thus less stable.
The directional element has an adjustable characteristic angle THETA G, set via the
menu, which covers the range 10 to 80.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.4.4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 128 of 345
Level detectors
The level detectors used are similar to those described in Section 4.3. The difference
is that the operate levels are adjustable and settings are provided via the menu.
The operate levels of the DEF low set and the DEF high set zero sequence current
level detectors are independent and they determine the sensitivity of the directional
elements.
An additional negative sequence current level detector is employed when negative
sequence polarising is used. Its setting is 70% of the DEF low set zero sequence level
detector, or if DEF aided tripping is enabled, 70% of the lower setting of either the
low set or high set zero sequence level detectors. This ensures that sufficient negative
sequence current is present for the comparators to function correctly. For relays with
the power swing blocking feature enabled the setting changes to 100% during
detected power swings (Section 5.5). This ensures the level detector does not operate
due to large spill currents during the power swing.
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.4.8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 129 of 345
Polarising
There are four types of polarising selectable via the menu allowing a choice of zero
sequence voltage, zero sequence current, dual zero sequence current and voltage,
and negative sequence voltage. System operating conditions may determine which
type is required.
The zero sequence voltage is derived internally from the three phase-neutral
voltages. In some system configurations the level of zero sequence voltage produced
is insufficient to polarise the directional elements.
Zero sequence current may be used if system configuration allows a suitable current
from say the neutral current transformer of a local power transformer with an
earthed neutral or the neutral current of an earthing transformer.
In certain systems dual polarising is used if the possibility of low zero sequence
voltage and or loss of current polarising is present.
Negative sequence polarising can be used if zero sequence is not possible or on
double circuit lines where coupling can cause problems.
It should be noted however that on versions of Optimho fitted with both a DEF
element and a fault locator the DEF zero sequence current polarising input is shared
with the mutual compensation current input terminals. Thus DEF zero sequence
current polarising cannot be used at the same time as fault locator mutual
compensation.
4.4.9
4.4.10
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 4-27
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 130 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 4-28
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 131 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 132 of 345
POLARISING
INPUT 1
3VO
Ip
INPUT 2
-THETA G
3VO
-THETA G
3V2b
-THETA G
+ kI p
3I 0
-90
3I 0
-90
3I 0
-90
3I 2b
-90
INPUT 1
A
COMPARATOR
LDLSI0
LOW SET I0
LEVEL DETECTOR
3I0
INPUT 2
LDHSI0
HIGH SET I0
LEVEL DETECTOR
CpDEF_F
INHIBIT OUT
&
A
COMPARATOR
CpDEF_R
INHIBIT OUT
B
CpDEF_F
DEF AIDED En (menu)
&
LDHSI0
&
DEF_F
&
DEF_R
LDLSI0
CpDEF_R
Signal
Scheme
Use
DEF_F
All POR
All Schemes
Trip
Enables overcurrent
DEF_R
All POR
Blocking
Current Reversal
CRX
DEF_F . LDHSI0
Blocking
POR 2 WI TRIP
Trip
CRX
Figure 4-29
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 133 of 345
Notes
1 Threshold level 1/3 of peak up to rated current, then fixed at higher currents
2 Bias of 1/3 peak chosen for immunity to operation on saturated CTs
3 Block if gap > 1/4 cycle. Block resets after 2 cycles if no reappearance of gap.
Figure 4-30
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 134 of 345
Adaptive 60 deg
Phase advance
circuit
Frequency
Tracking
Controller
Signal
Mixing
Adaptive 60 deg
Phase advance
circuit
-IAX
-IBX
-ICX
8
6
4
2
Required sensitivity
0
42
43
44
45
46
47
f Hz
Figure 4-31
48
49
50
51
52
53
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.5
Fault locator
4.5.1
Introduction
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 135 of 345
The Optimho fault locator uses an algorithmic method to provide a distance to fault
location feature with metering capabilities. The data input to the algorithm is filtered
using established digital signal processing techniques.
The measuring accuracy of the fault locator is 2% at 2In, fn, 20.
The data processed by the algorithm is first acquired by performing analogue to
digital conversion on signals provided by the relays internal analogue bus and then
performing the necessary calculations.
The metering values are continuously calculated, regularly updated and passed to
the relays microcontroller when requested.
Acquired data is written to a buffer until a fault condition is notified by the
microcontroller. This input buffer data is held pending the fault calculation and input
data is redirected to an alternative buffer.
The fault calculation is initiated by a signal from the relay main microcontroller.
When the fault calculation is complete the output information is stored in non-volatile
memory and made available to the microcontroller for display on the relay front
panel.
Where parallel circuits are hung on opposite sides of a route of towers, mutual flux
coupling alters the impedance seen by the fault locator. In practice the positive and
negative sequence coupling is insignificant and the effect on the fault locator of the
zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated by using the mutual compensation
feature provided.
It should be noted however that on versions of Optimho fitted with both a DEF
element and a fault locator the mutual compensation current input terminals are
shared with the DEF zero sequence current polarising input. Thus DEF zero sequence
current polarising cannot be used at the same time as fault locator mutual
compensation.
The fault locator is optional on the underground cable version of the relay (type LFZP
113) where it is recommended that it is used for metering purposes only (see Section
4.5.8) since fault location accuracy cannot be relied upon for this application.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.5.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 136 of 345
(equation
2.1)
This equation shows that the calculation of m, the distance to fault, based on
measurements of Vp and Ip at the local relay terminals is distorted by the IfRf term.
This term is related to the current infeed from the remote terminal and cannot be
readily measured. However its effect can be minimised as follows:
The real and imaginary components of these vectors (with respect to an arbitrary
vector reference) vary with time as:
Vp[cos(t+s)+jsin(t+s)] = mZrIp[cos(t+e)+jsin(t+e)]
+RfIf [cos(t+d)+jsin(t+d)].
where
and
By evaluating equation 2.1 at the instant in time when the fault current passes
through zero and considering only the real components, then the RfIf term
becomes zero i.e. t = ((/2)-d)/ and the equation simplifies to:
Vpcos(((/2)-d) + s) = mZrIpcos(((/2)-d) + e)
Therefore the fault location m can be calculated if the angle of the fault
current d is known.
Estimating d the phase of the fault current If
The fault vector If is obtained from an algorithm which uses superimposed currents,
that is, the change of currents following the instant of fault.
Superimposed currents are indicated with a dash mark ( ' ).
The sequence diagram for superimposed currents for an A-G fault is shown in Figure
4-33.
For an A phase to ground fault:
0.33If
From which
0.66If
= I1' + I2'
(equation 2.2)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 137 of 345
= Ip1'D1 + Ip2'D2
where:
D1 = I1' / Ip1' and D2 = I2' / Ip2'
and
D2 approximately = D1 (assuming that the power system source and
line positive and negative sequence
impedances are approximately equal)
therefore
0.66If = D1(Ip1' + Ip2')
(equation 2.3)
also
Ip' = Ip1' + Ip2' + Ip0'
therefore
Ip1' + Ip2' = Ip' - Ip0'
(equation 2.4)
The angle of D1 depends upon the fault position but for the purposes of this
algorithm this angle is assumed to be zero.
Thus:
angle If = d = angle (Ip' - Ip0')
(equation 2.5)
Equation 2.5 shows that the phase angle of the fault current d can be estimated from
the superimposed phase and neutral currents measured at the relay terminals.
therefore for a ground fault:
If(cos(d) + jsin(d))
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 138 of 345
= kD1(Ip'-Ip0')
= kD1[(Ia(fault) - Ia(prefault))
- 0.33(In(fault) - In(prefault))]
where:
k is a scalar factor and d is the required phase angle of If at the instant of time that
the faulted vectors are calculated.
similarly for a phase to phase fault:
If(cos(d)+ jsin(d)) = kD1[(Ia(fault) - Ia(prefault))
- (Ib(fault) - Ib(prefault))]
Thus using the calculated pre-fault and faulted vectors the fault locator is able to
calculate the angle of the fault current vector d at the instant of time that the faulted
vectors are calculated.
4.5.3
Data acquisition
The microprocessor commences sampling at a rate of 40 samples per cycle as soon
as initialisation is complete. Sampling is then performed continuously and the
samples stored within a 16 cycle cyclic buffer.
Two interrupts control the sampling system; timer interrupt 1 and interrupt 0.
The whole sampling system is triggered off by timer interrupt 1. This interrupts the
processor and also provides an output signal pulsing at the sample rate to the data
acquisition system. At the start of the interrupt, the 80C186 moves the data from the
last-acquisition temporary buffer into one of five 16 cycle cyclic sample buffers. This
ensures that ample fault data buffering is available under practical fault conditions.
While this is happening, the data acquisition system hardware acquires the next
eight samples (3 voltage, 4 current and 1 unused) and converts them to digital
words. At the end of each conversion the data acquisition system hardware asserts
interrupt 0 which puts the sample into the last-acquisition temporary buffer. Thus for
each sample period, there is one timer interrupt and eight sample interrupts. The
timer interrupt also handles the management of the five cyclic sample buffers. The
sample buffer is changed 6 cycles after the relay has tripped so that the correct set of
data is fed to the fault calculation routines.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.5.4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 139 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 140 of 345
a-gnd
b-gnd
c-gnd
Multiphase
If this test identifies a multiphase fault the superimposed phase currents are
examined to identify a phase to phase fault.
The maximum superimposed phase current (Ipmax) is found and each superimposed
phase current is compared with Ipmax to identify the fault type from the following
chart :Fault type
Ia
Ib
Ic
a-b
b-c
c-a
a-b-c
Fourier filtering
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 141 of 345
The real and imaginary components of each of the input signals is evaluated from
data windows around the fault position selected as shown in figure 4-34. Each data
window is 46 samples long. The pre fault data window ends 0.5 cycles prior to the
fault position and the post fault data window ends 1.5 cycles after the fault position.
(see Figure 4-34.)
The real component (or cosine term) of an input signal is obtained by multiplying a
set of 40 samples by a cosine wave of fourier coefficients. These fourier coefficients
are calculated from the formula:
cosine_constant [ n ] = (2 / 40) cos(2 * * n / 40)
Where n is the sample number in the series between 0 and 39.
These constants are calculated by the microprocessor on initialisation.
The imaginary component (or sine term) of an input signal is obtained by first
calculating the real component of a wave 27 degrees prior to the required wave and
also calculating the real component of a wave 27 degrees after the required wave
(see Figure 4-35). These two cosine terms are then used to calculate the required
sine term using the following technique:
cos(t - ) - cos(t + )
= cos(t)cos() + sin(t)sin() - cos(t)cos() + sin(t)sin()
= 2sin(t)sin()
= 0.90798sin(t)
therefore:
in(t) = 1.1013(cos(t - ) - cos(t + ))
This method of obtaining the imaginary component gives maximum rejection of any
exponential component of the input wave-form.
4.5.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 142 of 345
sin(t+) = sin(t)cos() + cos(t)sin()
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 143 of 345
This "replica impedance" is modified using the mutual compensation factor when the
mutual compensation feature is used.
i.e.
Zr
where:
KZM and THETA M are the fault locator mutual compensation settings.
The fault location calculation
The fault location calculation works by:
a)
First obtaining the vectors to satisfy equation 2.1 for the fault type
specified by the phase selector.
b)
c)
Finally solving equation 2.1 for the fault location m at the instant of
time where If = 0.
(equation 6.1)
and Vp=VA
and for a A phase to B phase fault:IpZr=Ia(5*KZPh*KZF/THETA Ph)-Ib(5*KZPh*KZF/THETA Ph)
(equation 6.2)
and Vp = VA - VB
The calculation for a ground fault (Equation 6.1) is modified when mutual
compensation is used :IpZr
=Ia(5*KZPh*KZF/THETA Ph)+In(5*KZN*KZF/THETA N)
+Im(5*KZM*KZF/THETA M)
(Modified equation 6.1)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 144 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.5.7
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 145 of 345
Mutual compensation
As shown in Section 4.5.6 mutual compensation is achieved by a modification to the
"replica impedance" used within the fault location calculation.
The major disadvantage of this technique is that faults on a line could cause a fault
location from a relay "start" on a healthy parallel line to appear to be on the healthy
line.
This effect is caused by a large mutual compensation signal from the faulted line
providing misleading information to a fault locator on the healthy line.
The Optimho fault locator eliminates this possible problem by limiting the mutual
compensation component of modified equation 6.1 to 150% of the neutral
compensation component. In this way a large amount of mutual compensation
cannot be applied to a fault location on a healthy line.
A second problem on parallel feeders occurs when one circuit is out of service and is
earthed at both ends. In this case an earth fault on the in service system can induce
current in the loop of the earthed line causing a misleading mutual compensation
signal to the fault locator.
It is therefore recommended that the mutual compensation is deselected when a
parallel line is taken out of service.
4.5.8
Metering
The metering calculations are continuously performed using the same fourier
technique used by the fault locator. The results of these calculations are continuously
updated and can be viewed using the relay user interface.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 146 of 345
Ip
mZr
(1-m)Zr
Iq
Zsp
Zsq
Rf
Vp
Eq
Ep
If
Figure 4-32
Ip1 '
Zsp1
mZL1
mZL2
mZL0
Vf '
3Rf
(1-m)ZL2
Zsq2
(1-m)ZL0
Zsq0
I0 '
Ip0 '
Zsp3
Zsq1
I2 '
Ip2 '
Zsp2
(1-m)ZL1
0.33 If
Figure 4-33
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 147 of 345
Figure 4-34
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 148 of 345
Figure 4-35
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 149 of 345
IpZr
Vp
If = 0
Vp
Figure 4-36
IpZr
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 150 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 151 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.2
5.2.1
Purpose
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 152 of 345
The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage supply. Such failure can occur by faults in the primary voltage transformers,
in the secondary wiring, in the fuses or within the distance relay itself. The VTS gives
visual and electrical alarms and can be selected, via the menu, to block the distance
relay comparators, in order to prevent any possible maltrip. The VTS feature can be
used when miniature circuit breakers (MCB) are used to protect the ac supply, in
place of the voltage transformer fuses, by wiring the RELAY BLOCK optical isolator to
an auxiliary contact on the MCB.
5.2.2
Principle of operation
The VTS operates by detecting the zero sequence voltage (V0) that arises when the ac
voltage supply is faulty. It is inhibited by zero sequence current because ground faults
on the transmission line also produce zero sequence voltage.
5.2.3
Outputs
A visual indication of VTS operation is given by the message V~FAIL on the liquid
crystal display (LCD) and the ALARM light emitting diode (LED) on the front of the
relay. Electrical indication is given via a VTS contact.
The VTS feature can be selected via the menu to indicate only or to indicate and
block the comparators. The latter option is used to prevent maltrips.
If the VTS feature operates and blocks tripping the LCD also contains the message
'RELAY BLOCKED', the green RELAY AVAILABLE LED is extinguished and the RELAY
INOPERATIVE ALARM (RIA) contact closed.
When the Block Relay optical isolator is energised the message on the LCD is RELAY
BLOCKED, the ALARM LED will be on and the RELAY AVAILABLE LED extinguished.
The following description assumes the VTS feature is set to block tripping unless
otherwise stated.
5.2.4
Implemetation
The level detectors used to detect zero sequence voltage and current are located on
the level detector board ZJ0136. The VTS feature is implemented in software on the
processor board ZJ0138. Figure 5-2 shows the logic equivalent circuit diagram
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 153 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.2.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 154 of 345
5.2.6
Speed of operation
The VTS feature is required to respond to the loss of voltage supply faster then the
relay comparators can operate, in order to prevent maltrips. This requires the zero
sequence voltage detector to be faster than the comparators.
5.2.7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.2.8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 155 of 345
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 156 of 345
A side effect is that if a single phase of the voltage supply fails at a time when the
load current is below level detector setting a pole dead will result. This will inhibit the
instantaneous block though the block will occur and be sealed in after 5.5 seconds.
This is not a practical problem since the comparators cannot operate when the
current is below level detector setting and so no maloperation can occur.
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.2.15
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 157 of 345
5.3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 158 of 345
Comparator CpABZ6
LDLSN
&
LDCpABZ6
&
LDCpAZn
Comparator CpAZn
LDLSA
&
&
CpCZn
LDCpABZn
&
1
CpBCZn
(ZnN)
&
&
VTS Block
Comparators
Block Relay
(ZnC)
CpABZn
&
Comparator
LDCpCZn
&
&
Comparator
(ZnB)
LDLSC
Comparator
LDCpBZn
&
LDLSB
Comparator
(ZnA)
Comparator CpBZn
LDCpBCZn
(Zn P/F)
CpCAZn
LDCpCAZn
&
&
n refers to
zone - 1,2 or 3
1
35ms
LDHSN
&
&
n=1
n=2
n=3
Zn Comp
(Zn G/F)
0V
Low Set
Z1Comp
Z2Comp
Z3Comp
ANY
Z1Z2Z3
Z2A
LDHSA
&
Z2B
LDHSB
&
Z2C
LDHSC
Figure 5-3
&
High Set
LDHSZ2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 159 of 345
b)
Tripping via the operation of any current level detector provided that
its corresponding voltage level detector has not picked up within
20ms.
c)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 160 of 345
With the relay set to give a SOTF trip for any distance comparator operation, then
any fault existing on the protected line, including a close-up three phase bolted fault
would be cleared. For the latter fault, where line voltage transformers are used, there
would be no voltage memory to allow Zone 1 or Zone 2 distance comparator
operation, but Zone 3 will operate if set forward looking as it has an offset to cover
the busbars. When the Zone 3 is set reverse looking, as a directional mho, the SOTF
should be set to give a trip via comparators or level detectors as the Zone 3
comparators would not operate for a close-up three phase fault on the protected
line. For relay type LFZP114 any comparator or level detectors should also be
selected since the relay does not have Zone 3 elements.
In some situations, it may be possible for the magnetising inrush current of banked
transformers at the end of a line, or particularly of teed-off transformers, to cause
transient operation of the Zone 3 comparators on line energisation, resulting in an
incorrect SOTF trip. In such a situation, the SOTF tripping via level detectors should
be used.
While the SOTF feature is enabled the basic scheme trips and the carrier aided
scheme trips are disabled. When a fault is detected during the SOTF enable time, the
SOTF logic outputs do not reset until the fault is cleared.
If the optional DEF is fitted and the time delayed trip enabled any trip resulting from
this unit during SOTF enable time will result in a SOTF trip.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 161 of 345
SOTF Logic
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 162 of 345
b)
c)
The PSB feature utilises two sets of phase-phase connected comparators with concentric characteristics. The outer characteristic (Zone 6), is an offset mho/lenticular
characteristic produced by a separate A-B comparator with independent forward
reach, reverse reach and aspect ratio settings. The inner characteristic selected via
the menu is either the Zone 3 or Zone 2 phase comparators.
Zone 6 may be set concentric with the Zone 3 characteristic, as shown in Figure 5-5,
when Zone 3 is set as an offset mho/lenticular. When Zone 3 is set reverse looking
as a directional mho, Zone 6 may be set concentric with the Zone 2 mho
characteristic, as shown in Figure 5-6. The zone used for the inner characteristic may
be selected via the user interface menu.
The PSB feature is implemented as software in the main microcontroller, the
equivalent hardware logic diagram is shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-5 shows an example of how a power swing can pass through the
characteristics of the relay. The impedance of the power swing is detected initially by
Zone 6 (LDCPABZ6) and, in the absence of any other comparator operating, a timer
TZ6 is started. When the timer expires a bistable is set. When the power swing
impedance then enters the selected Zone 3 or Zone 2 phase fault characteristic, the
output bistable is set, producing the signal PSB Alarm, which is used to selectively
inhibit Zone 1 and/or Zone 1X and/or Zone 1Y and/or Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 as
required.
Inhibiting the Zone 2/3 comparator has no effect on the inhibit signal produced by
the logic, due to the action of the output bistable.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 163 of 345
The power swing inhibit signal PSB Alarm is only removed when the power swing
impedance passes outside the Zone 6 characteristic. This arrangement ensures that
the PSB cannot produce a blocking signal for fault conditions which appear inside
Zone 6 alone, or inside any Z1/Z2/Z3 comparator before the TZ6 timer expires.
The Power Swing Blocking is inhibited during the following conditions:
1)
When the A or B poles of the circuit breaker are open. This ensures that
the PSB feature does not block tripping if the measurement of the PSB
feature is affected by the A or B phases of the transmission line being
de-energised. This inhibition is brought about by the action of the low set
current level detector LDLSA and LDLSB (see Section 5.3).To extend this
period of non operation to the first 240ms after the line is re-energised,
the Any Pole Dead signal is used. The pole dead A and pole dead B
signals also inhibit the Zone 6 A-B comparator.
2)
When a signal is received from the auto-reclose unit, via the Single Pole
Open optical isolator, signifying that the distance relay has tripped, but the
circuit breaker has not yet reclosed, that is, dead time is in progress. This
inhibition of the PSB feature ensures that if a power swing develops during
the dead time of a single phase auto-reclose cycle, the distance relay can
give an immediate three phase trip.
3)
When the low set neutral current level detector LDLSN operates. This level
detector remains unoperated during balanced power swing conditions, but
can operate to prevent incorrect PSB operation under the following
conditions:
4)
a)
b)
c)
When the DEF option is fitted operation of the negative sequence current
level detector will inhibit the PSB feature. This allows the distance relay to
operate for phase faults which develop during a power swing. The setting
of this level detector is increased to 100% during detected power swings, to
prevent operation due to spill currents.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5)
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 164 of 345
Under conditions of loss of a voltage supply, provided that the voltage
transformer supervision feature has been set to indicate and block the
relay.
It is important to note that when PSB is enabled and the DEF is disabled,
it is essential to set the 3Io (low set) current level detector, which is
ganged to the setting of the I2 current level detector (see Section 4.4.4)
required to override the PSB unit under fault conditions.
Operation of the PSB feature is indicated on the LCD and an output contact is
provided to give a remote alarm of a power swing.
To assist commissioning the PSB feature, the signal TZ6 Timed out is available via a
monitor option (see Section 3.14.3). A PSB test feature is available via the menu
which removes the negative sequence current level detector check and the Any Pole
Dead inhibit check. This is to overcome problems simulating power swings with some
test sets .
Note:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 165 of 345
X
Zone 6
Inhibit signal
PSB Alarm turns off
Zone 3
Inhibit signal
PSB Alarm turns on
Zone 2
Zone 1
POWER SWING
IMPEDANCE
R
Figure 5-5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 166 of 345
Inhibit signal
PSB Alarm turns off
Zone 6
Zone 2
Inhibit signal
PSB Alarm turns on
Zone 1
POWER SWING
IMPEDANCE
R
Zone 3
Figure 5-6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 167 of 345
&
Block Z1 PSB
&
&
&
Block Z2 PSB
&
Block Z3 PSB
PSB Alarm
t
4us
0
t
Reset comparators
&
4us
LDLSI2
&
PSB TEST
(menu)
Any Pole
Dead
&
&
240ms
PwrSwg BLOCKED (menu)
Single Pole Open opto
TZ6
&
&
Figure 5-7
R
Q
S
&
R
Q
S
Z3 P/F
Z2 P/F
&
T39
LDCpABZ6
Z1 Comp
Z2 Comp
&
&
Power swing blocking logic
R
Q
S
LDLSI2
Sensitivity
Control
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.6
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 168 of 345
Z1 EXTENSION
Zone 1 extension.
PUR
Permissive Underreach.
POR 1
POR 2
POR 2 WI TRIP
PUR UNBLOCK
POR 2 WI TRIP
UNBLOCK
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 169 of 345
BLOCKING
Blocking.
BLOCKING 2
Blocking.
Note:
LFZP114 does not have the POR 2 based schemes or the BLOCKING
schemes as they require Zone 3 elements to operate.
5.7
5.7.1
Basic scheme
The BASIC scheme is shown in a logic equivalent form in Figure 5-8. The scheme
consists of up to three independent zones of protection designated Zone 1, Zone 2
and Zone 3 with Zone 2 and Zone 3 time delayed. (LFZP114 does not have Zone 3).
Additional time delayed zones Zone 1X and Zone 1Y are available by reach stepping
Zone 1. SOTF logic is described in Section 5.4.
Zone 1
The six Zone 1 comparator signals after being gated with the appropriate level
detectors (see Figure 5-3), are used for Zone 1 tripping. Zone 1 tripping can be
blocked via the menu if desired. It is also blocked if SOTF is enabled and active
(SOTF En) or in the event of a power swing detected and set to block Zone 1 (Block
Z1 PSB).
Zone 2 time delayed
The six Zone 2 comparator signals after being gated with the appropriate level
detectors (see Figure 5-3), are used to control the Zone 2 timer (TZ2) and hence
Zone 2 time delayed tripping (Z2T). Zone 2 time delayed tripping can be blocked via
the menu if desired or alternatively all time delayed ground faults can be blocked
again via the menu. If the latter option is selected the Zone 2 ground fault
comparators are not used to initiate the timer. Zone 2 tripping is also blocked if
SOTF is enabled and active or in the event of a power swing detected and set to
block Zone 2 (Block Z2 PSB).
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 170 of 345
comparators are not used to initiate the timer. Zone 3 tripping is also blocked if
SOTF is enabled and active or in the event of a power swing detected and set to
block Zone 3 (Block Z3 PSB).
Zone 1X and Zone 1Y reach stepped
Zone 1 reach can be changed under software control to either Zone 1X or Zone 1Y
reach. The reach is controlled by Zone 2 and Zone 3 comparators initiating the Zone
1X timer (TZ1X) and Zone 1Y timer (TZ1Y). After the timer has expired the reach is
changed to the appropriate zone. The six Zone 1 comparator signals, after level
detector checking (LDZ1A etc.), are used for tripping. If the second timer expires the
reach will change appropriately. The logic allows for the two reach stepped zone
timers to be set in any order, and the reach to any value, provided either Zone 2 or
Zone 3 reach is larger. If both timers are set the same Zone 1Y will result. Zone 1X
and/or Zone 1Y tripping can be blocked via the menu if desired or alternatively all
time delayed ground faults can be blocked via the menu. If the latter option is
selected the ground fault comparators are not used to initiate the timers or to issue
trips. Both zones are also blocked if SOTF is enabled and active or in the event of a
power swing detected and set to block the appropriate zone. The reach of Zone 1
may be set to Zone 1X via the Zone 1 extension scheme (see Section 5.8) but should
either reach stepped timer run out the reach will be set according to the timer.
5.7.2
Load current is detected by either the low set current or the high set current level
detectors as selected on the menu. Before an accelerated trip can occur load current
must have been detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a 40ms
window during which time a trip will occur if a Zone 2 comparator operates. The
accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to
circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault.
For circuits with load tapped off the protected line care must be taken in setting the
load loss feature to ensure that the level detector setting is above the tapped load
current.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 171 of 345
When selected the load loss feature operates together with the main scheme that is
selected. In this way it provides high speed clearance for end zone faults when the
basic scheme is selected or alternatively in aided tripping schemes it provides high
speed back-up clearance for end zone faults if the channel fails.
During SOTF or when a trip as occurred the loss of load accelerated tripping is
disabled.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 172 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-8b
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 173 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 174 of 345
5.9
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 175 of 345
Figure 5-9
CRX opto
Figure 5-10
Z1Xs
CRX1
CRX2
PSD
150ms
0
t
&
t
0
200ms
TDW
&
LGS opto
CRX opto
Figure 5-11
&
&
t
0
&
CRX1
CRX2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-12
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 176 of 345
PUR scheme
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.10
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 177 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 178 of 345
PSD
COS opto
DEF_F
3 POLE ONLY (menu)
&
CRX2
Any Trip
50ms
Basic Scheme Trip
&
SOTF En
&
CRX1
DEF AIDED En
(menu)
DEF_F
&
DEF_R
&
Timer 1
t
TDG
TP
Z2 Comp
&
t
100ms
TD
250ms
Breaker
Open opto
Timer 2
&
&
&
1
&
Z1 Trip
DEF Aided Trip
Dist Aided Trip
CTX
0
t
100ms
Z2A
&
S
Q
Aided Trip A
Z2B
&
S
Q
Aided Trip B
Z2C
&
S
Q
Aided Trip C
Aided Trip N
Z2N
&
S
R
Figure 5-13
POR 1 scheme
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.11
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 179 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 180 of 345
A feature is provided which enables fast tripping to be maintained along the whole
length of the protected line, even when one terminal is open. This is the "ECHO"
feature and it is initiated 250ms after the Breaker Open optical isolator has been
energised. The 250ms time delay is provided to prevent superfluous open terminal
echo due to the delay in drop off of the signal send following a trip. However, there
will be no time delay introduced in echoing the signal when the breaker is already
open.
A further feature of this scheme is the Weak infeed echo. When one end of the line
is connected to a weak infeed terminal, the distance or DEF measuring elements at
the weak infeed end would not be able to operate for a forward fault.
Consequently the relay at the strong infeed end terminal would not be able to
operate instantaneously for end zone faults, in the absence of carrier signal from
the weak infeed end terminal. However, with certain additional logic in this scheme
it is possible to achieve rapid tripping for end zone faults at the weak infeed end.
A requirement of the scheme is that the Zone 3 measuring elements are set reverse
looking to cover the reach of the Zone 2 elements of the relay at the other end of
the feeder.
The weak infeed condition is detected by the receipt of a carrier signal and the
failure of operation of Zone 3 and DEF reverse looking measuring elements. For an
external fault, behind the weak infeed terminal, when the fault infeed is from the
strong infeed terminal source, the reverse looking Zone 3 would operate and block
the operation of the weak infeed circuit. However, for an internal fault, the distance
or DEF measuring elements at the weak infeed terminal would not operate, thus
enabling the weak infeed circuit.
When a carrier signal is received by the relay at the weak infeed end, a 10ms timer
is started, provided that:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
After the 10ms time delay, a carrier signal (CTX) is sent for up to 100ms allowing
the relay at the strong infeed end to trip.
If the distance relays operate normally at both ends, the signal receive signal will
still be available even after the relay reset subsequent to fault clearance, due to the
delay in the reset of the carrier signal. This condition can operate the weak infeed
circuit causing weak infeed Signal Send (CTX), unless further action is taken.
To prevent this, a latch circuit is provided to inhibit the weak infeed feature, if any
of the Zone 1, Zone 2 distance elements or DEF forward looking element operate
and trip the breaker. Before the carrier signal is received from the other end, the
comparators may reset after a fault clearance, and hence a time delay on drop off
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 181 of 345
of 100ms is provided in the inhibit circuit. The latch resets only after the carrier
signal resets.
When high source impedance's are present, there is the possibility of inadvertent
operation of the weak infeed circuit for external faults due to the reverse looking
Zone 3 or DEF elements failing to operate to generate the required inhibit signal.
To safeguard against this problem high set current level detectors of the same
phase as any Zone 2 element or DEF forward looking element must have also
operated before the carrier signal is sent to the other end.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 182 of 345
PSD
COS opto
50ms
Any Trip
DEF AIDED En
(menu)
DEF_F
&
&
R
DEF_F
&
1
&
CRX1
&
Z2A
Aided Trip A
Q
R
&
Z2B
Aided Trip B
Q
R
&
Z2C
Aided Trip C
Q
R
&
Z2N
Aided Trip N
Q
R
TIMER 2
TIMER 1
Z2 Comp
&
DEF_R
Z3 NOT Z2
&
&
Dist Aided
Trip
t
TDG =TD
TD
t
TDG
LDHSI0
&
&
&
LDHSZ2
250ms
Breaker Open
100ms
&
opto
t
0
&
R
Z1 Comp
Z2 Comp
0
t
&
Q
S
10ms
100ms
Z3 Watchdog
Z3 Comp
Block Relay
Single Pole Open opto
VTS Block WI/DEF
Z1 Trip
DEF Aided Trip
Dist Aided Trip
1
1
0
t
100ms
Figure 5-14
POR 2 scheme
&
&
t
0
CTX
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.12
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 183 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 184 of 345
PSD
COS opto
CRX2
SOTF En
Z3 Watchdog
50ms
S
R
&
Any Trip
DEF AIDED En
(menu)
DEF_F
&
R
DEF_F
&
1
&
CRX1
&
Z2A
S
Q
R
&
Z2B
&
Aided Trip B
Aided Trip C
S
Q
R
&
Z2N
Aided Trip A
S
R
Z2C
Aided Trip N
Q
R
TIMER 2
TIMER 1
Z2 Comp
DEF_R
Z3 NOT Z2
&
&
&
Dist Aided
Trip
t
TDG =TD
TD
t
TDG
LDHSI0
&
&
&
LDHSZ2
250ms
Breaker Open
opto
100ms
&
CTX
t
0
&
R
Z1 Comp
Z2 Comp
0
t
&
Q
S
10ms
100ms
Z3 Watchdog
Z3 Comp
Block Relay
Single Pole Open opto
VTS Block WI/DEF
Z1 Trip
DEF Aided Trip
Dist Aided Trip
&
1
1
&
t
0
0
t
100ms
60ms
LDOVA
LDOVB
LDOVC
&
&
t
0
4us
&
WI Ind
=1
WI N Ind
&
&
&
Note Timer TDG is set equal to Timer TD
Figure 5-15
&
S
Q
WI A Ind
&
S
Q
WI B Ind
&
S
Q
R
WI C Ind
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 185 of 345
A feature is provided which enables fast tripping to be maintained along the whole
length of the protected line, even when one terminal is open. This is the "ECHO"
feature and it is initiated 250ms after the Breaker Open optical isolator has been
energised. The 250ms time delay is provided to prevent superfluous open terminal
echo
due to the delay in drop off of the signal send following a trip. However, there will
be no time delay introduced in echoing the signal when the breaker is already
open.
A further feature of this scheme is the Weak Infeed Echo and Tripping. When one
end of the line is connected to a weak infeed terminal, the distance or DEF
measuring elements at the weak infeed end would not be able to operate for a
forward fault. Consequently the relay at the strong infeed end terminal would not
be able to operate instantaneously for end zone faults, in the absence of carrier
signal from the weak infeed end terminal, and the weak infeed end would fail to
trip during these conditions. However, with certain additional scheme logic, it is
possible to achieve rapid tripping of both ends for any internal faults.
A requirement of the scheme is that the Zone 3 measuring elements are set reverse
looking to cover the reach of the Zone 2 elements.
The weak infeed condition is detected by the receipt of a carrier signal and the
failure of operation of Zone 3 and DEF reverse looking measuring elements. For an
external fault, behind the weak infeed terminal, when the fault infeed is from the
strong infeed terminal source, the reverse looking Zone 3 would operate and block
the operation of the weak infeed circuit. However, for an internal fault, the distance
or DEF measuring elements at the weak infeed terminal would not operate, thus
enabling the weak infeed circuit.
When a carrier signal is received by the relay at the weak infeed end, a 10ms timer
is started, provided that:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
At the same time a 60ms timer is started provided one or more voltage level
detectors have reset. After the 10ms time delay, a carrier signal (CTX) is sent
allowing the relay at the strong infeed end to trip. The 60ms delay before issuing a
weak infeed aided trip is to provide stability during current reversals in a parallel
line.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 186 of 345
If the distance relays operate normally at both ends, the signal receive signal will
still be available even after the relay reset subsequent to fault clearance, due to the
delay in the reset of the carrier signal. This condition can operate the weak infeed
circuit causing weak infeed trip and Signal Send (CTX), unless further action is
taken.
To prevent this, a latch circuit is provided to inhibit the weak infeed feature, if any
of the Zone 1, Zone 2 distance elements or DEF forward looking element operate
and trip the breaker. Before the carrier signal is received from the other end, the
comparators may reset after a fault clearance, and hence a time delay on drop off
of 100ms is provided in the inhibit circuit. The latch resets only after the carrier
signal resets.
When high source impedance's are present, there is the possibility of inadvertent
operation of the weak infeed circuit for external faults due to the reverse looking
Zone 3 or DEF elements failing to operate to generate the required inhibit signal.
To safeguard against this problem high set current level detectors of the same
phase as any Zone 2 element or DEF forward looking element must have also
operated before the carrier signal is sent to the other end.
5.13
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 187 of 345
If during fault conditions the trip signal is not shorted out the communication
equipment will issue LGS and CRX signals. The communication receive logic in this
case behaves as in the standard schemes. However if the trip signal is shorted out
the communications equipment will issue LGS only. Under these conditions the
unblocking schemes can issue distance aided trips for a short duration up to
150ms. A delay TDW is necessary to prevent over tripping during transient loss of
guard signal.
All four permissive schemes have their unblocking counterparts namely, PUR
UNBLOCK, POR 1 UNBLOCK, POR 2 UNBLOCK and POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK.
5.14
Blocking schemes
Optimho contains 2 blocking schemes labelled BLOCKING and BLOCKING 2.
5.14.1
Blocking Scheme
The BLOCKING scheme is shown in a logic equivalent form in Figure 5-16. The
scheme incorporates the basic scheme described in Section 5.7. For relays with the
optional DEF fitted, DEF aided tripping can be enabled or disabled via the menu.
The DEF uses the same signalling channel as the distance.
The directional Zone 2 and/or the DEF forward looking elements, gated with
additional high set level detectors (see later) are required to trip the circuit breakers
provided a blocking signal optical isolator input (CRX) has not been received from
the remote end of the feeder, indicating that the fault is beyond the remote
busbars. The reverse looking Zone 3 and/or DEF reverse looking elements are
required to send the blocking signal (CTX) for all external faults. However, since the
Zone 3 comparators may have a forward offset, a blocking signal could be sent for
some internal faults. The directional forward looking Zone 2 elements are thus
used to cancel the blocking signal for these cases.
When single or three pole tripping is selected the DEF aided trip (three pole) is
delayed for 20ms to give the distance Zone 2 ground fault elements time to issue a
single pole trip if appropriate, and to block the DEF forward looking element (see
Section 4.4). The delay is not required when three pole only tripping is selected.
Once issued, the distance aided trip is only removed when the Zone 2 elements
reset and the DEF aided trip is only removed when the DEF forward looking
element reset. This allows time for breaker failure protection to operate in the event
of a local breaker failure for a fault near the remote end of the line.
When SOTF is enabled and active (SOTF En) the BLOCKING scheme is prevented
from issuing aided trips but the carrier send logic is run. The Channel out of Service
optical isolator (COS) converts the BLOCKING scheme to BASIC and also converts
any Zone 1 single pole trips to three pole and can be used to block auto-reclose
(see Section 5.18). This optical isolator is required for the correct operation of the
scheme.
In practice a time delay on pick up for the tripping signal TP is required for faults
detected by the Zone 2 elements. This is to allow time for a blocking signal to be
sent from the remote end, should it prove necessary, and to be received at the local
end. A similar timer TPG is provided for the DEF forward element.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 188 of 345
A delay on drop off for the signal received (CRX) is also provided in the blocking
scheme (TD and TDG), to safeguard against inadvertent tripping out of the healthy
section of a faulted double circuit line, during a possible reversing current situation
(see Section 5.15.3). Monitor points labelled Timer 1 and Timer 2 are used during
commissioning to check various timers.
When very high source impedance's are present, there is the possibility of
inadvertent tripping occurring for external faults due to the overreaching elements
failing to operate to generate the required blocking signal. To safeguard against
this problem the Zone 2 and/or DEF forward looking elements are gated with the
appropriate high set current level detectors (LDHS) before an accelerated aided trip
can be initiated. (see Figure 5-3)
5.14.2
Blocking 2 scheme
The BLOCKING 2 scheme is shown in a logic equivalent form in Figure 5-16B. The
scheme incorporates the basic scheme described in Section 5.7. For relays with the
optional DEF fitted, DEF aided tripping can be enabled or disabled via the menu.
The DEF uses the same signalling channel as the distance. The scheme is designed
for use with signalling equipment that requires a normally open signal start contact
and a normally open signal stop contact but it will work with just signal start contact
if required.
The directional Zone 2 and/or the DEF forward looking elements, gated with
additional high set level detectors (see later) are required to trip the circuit breakers
provided a blocking signal optical isolator input (CRX) has not been received from
the remote end of the feeder, indicating that the fault is beyond the remote
busbars. The reverse looking Zone 3 and/or the Low Set Zero Sequence current
level detector (LDLSI0) are required to send the blocking signal (SIGNAL SEND) for
all external faults. However, since the level detector sees faults in either direction,
the blocking signal is removed by operation of the SIGNAL STOP contact controlled
by the directional forward looking Zone 2 elements and/or the forward looking
DEF comparator.
When single or three pole tripping is selected the DEF aided trip (three pole) is
delayed for 40ms to give the distance Zone 2 ground fault elements time to issue a
single pole trip if appropriate, and to block the DEF forward looking element (see
Section 4.4). The delay is not required when three pole only tripping is selected.
Once issued, the distance aided trip is only removed when the Zone 2 elements
reset and the DEF aided trip is only removed when the DEF forward looking
element reset. This allows time for breaker failure protection to operate in the event
of a local breaker failure for a fault near the remote end of the line.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 189 of 345
When SOTF is enabled and active (SOTF En) the BLOCKING 2 scheme is
prevented from issuing aided trips but the carrier send logic is run. The Channel
out of Service optical isolator (COS) converts the BLOCKING 2 scheme to BASIC
and also converts any Zone 1 single pole trips to three pole and can be used to
block auto-reclose (see Section 5.18). This optical isolator is required for the correct
operation of the scheme.
In practice a time delay on pick up for the tripping signal TP is required for faults
detected by the Zone 2 elements. This is to allow time for a blocking signal to be
sent from the remote end, should it prove necessary, and to be received at the local
end. A similar timer TPG is provided for the DEF forward element.
A delay on drop off of the SIGNAL START contact is also provided in the blocking 2
scheme (TD and TDG) to maintain the blocking signal, to safeguard against
inadvertent tripping out of the healthy section of a faulted double circuit line, during
a possible reversing current situation (see Section 5.15.3). Monitor points labelled
Timer 1 and Timer 2 are used during commissioning to check various timers.
To prevent false operation of the scheme due to short interruption of the blocking
signal a 2ms/5ms timer is included in the signal receive logic.
During marginal external faults with low fault currents there is the possibility of the
reverse looking elements failing to operate and therefore not sending the block
signal, whilst the forward overreaching elements at the other end of the line
operate and trip. To safeguard against this problem the Zone 2 and/or DEF
forward looking elements are gated with the appropriate high set current level
detectors (LDHS) before an accelerated aided trip can be initiated thus ensuring the
external fault will be seen at both ends of the line. (see Figure 5-3)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 190 of 345
Z3 NOT Z2
DEF_F
DEF AIDED En (menu)
&
&
Z2
CTX
&
&
DEF_R
TPG
&
LDHS I0
t
0
&
&
COS opto
&
20ms
0
SOTF En
Basic Scheme
Trip
DEF Delay Trip
Any Trip
CRX opto
1
1
Q
R
Timer 1
t
TDG
Timer 2
t
TD
TP
LDHSZ2
&
&
Dist Aided
Trip
Z2A
&
Z2B
&
Aided Trip A
Aided Trip B
Aided Trip C
Aided Trip N
S
R
Z2C
&
S
R
Z2N
&
S
R
Figure 5-16
Q
R
Blocking scheme
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 191 of 345
Z3 NOT Z2
LDLSI0
DEF En (menu)
Z2
&
&
1
t
DEF_F
&
&
t
TDG
SIGNAL STOP
TIMER 2
TIMER 1
t
TPG
100ms
&
LDHSI0
t
0
R
S
&
&
COS opto
&
40ms
SIGNAL START
SOTF En
Basic SchemeTrip
1
1
Q
R
Test Point
t
t
TP
LDHSZ2
2ms
CRX opto
(CTX)
&
&
Z1 Trip
DEF Aided Trip
Dist Aided Trip
SIGNAL START
TD
DEF_R
DEF AIDED En (menu)
&
5ms
&
&
Dist Aided
Trip
Z2A
&
Z2B
&
Aided Trip A
Aided Trip B
Aided Trip C
S
R
Z2C
&
S
R
Z2N
&
S
Q
R
Figure 5-16b
Q
R
Blocking 2 scheme
Aided Trip N
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.15
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 192 of 345
5.15.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 193 of 345
The current reversal sequence diagram shows how the relays in the healthy line are
prevented from maloperation due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers
in the faulted line and the instance in the cycle at which it takes place. After current
reversal, the Zone 2 comparators of the relay at D will initiate the transmission of
the permissive trip signal from substation D to substation C and the relay at C will
be similarly prevented from maloperation. The relays at both D and C substations
being enabled once again when the faulted line is isolated and the current reversal
guard timer setting TD has expired.
5.15.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.15.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 194 of 345
(Figure 5-20)
The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when the
blocking signal transmission started by the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators is
received on a healthy line to inhibit the aided trip. A time delay TP is needed with
the Zone 2 comparators in order to allow for the blocking signal transmission to be
received in case the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators had operated for an
external fault.
Recommended TP setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms +
16ms.
When the current reverses and the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators reset, the
blocking signal transmission is stopped and the timer TD is started. After time TD,
the scheme resets and the relay aided trip is enabled once again.
Recommended TD setting = 20ms - minimum signalling channel reset time ms.
The current reversal sequence diagram shows how the relays in the healthy line are
prevented from maloperation due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers
in the faulted line and the instance in the cycle at which it takes place. After current
reversal, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators at substation D reset, but those
at substation C operate to send the blocking signal to substation D and inhibit the
aided trip. After the faulty line is isolated, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators
will reset and the scheme aided trip restored when the timer setting TD has expired.
5.15.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 195 of 345
The current reversal sequence diagram shows how the relays in the healthy line are
prevented from maloperation due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers
in the faulted line and the instance in the cycle at which it takes place. After current
reversal, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators at substation D reset but the
block is maintained for time TD, in order to allow the relays at substation C to send
the blocking signal to substation D and inhibit the aided trip. After the faulty line is
isolated, the reversed looking Zone 3 comparators at subsation C and the forward
looking comparators at subsation D will reset.
5.15.5
(Figure 5-21)
The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF Permissive Overreach scheme
logic is similar to the distance scheme with reversed looking Zone 3 comparators
POR 2, except that the operation of the scheme is controlled by the reversed
looking directional earth fault comparator instead of the distance reversed looking
Zone 3 comparators. It uses a separate current reversal guard timer TDG, but it
shares a common signalling channel.
Recommended TDG setting = maximum signalling channel reset time ms + 35ms.
Note:
5.15.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 196 of 345
(Figure 5-22B)
The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF Blocking 2 scheme logic is
similar to the distance blocking scheme, except that the operation of the scheme is
controlled by both the low set current zero sequence level detector (LDLSI0) and the
reverse looking directional element (DEF_R) instead of the distance Zone 3
comparators. It uses a separate current reversal guard timer TPG to allow time for
the blocking signal to be received in the event of an external fault, and a second
timer TDG to maintain the blocking signal until the forward looking directional
comparator (DEF_F) at the opposite end has reset.
Recommended TPG setting = maximum signalling channel operating time ms
+4ms.
Recommended TDG setting = maximum signalling channel operate time ms
+14ms.
Note:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 197 of 345
Fault
A
L1
C
Strong
Source
Weak
Source
L2
BEFORE CURRENT REVERSAL
Fault
A
L1
C
Strong
Source
L2
Weak
Source
Figure 5-17
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 198 of 345
Fault
Fault
&
CRX
TP
&
Z2
Aided trip
TD
CTX
&
Current reversal logic
Z1B
R
E
L
A
y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
CB Operating time
TP
Z2D
D
Z2C
CTX
Z2C Reset
TD
Reset
CTX
Reset
Time
Fault
Inception
Current
Reversal
Relay D
Disabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 5-18
Relay D
Enabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 199 of 345
Fault
Fault
Z2
0
&
Z3R
CTX
TD
&
CB Operating time
Z1B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
Z3RD
TD
Z3RD
Reset
D
Z2C
CTX
Z2C Reset
Reset
CTX
Reset
Time
Fault
Inception
Current
Reversal
Relay D
Disabled
Current reversal sequence
Figure 5-19
Relay D
Enabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 200 of 345
Fault
Fault
CRX
&
TD
TP
Z2
0
CTX
&
Z3R
Current reversal logic
Z1B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
CB Operating logic
Z3RD
Z3RD
Reset
CTX
Z2C
C
TP
Z2C Reset
CTX
Reset
TD
Reset
Time
Fault
Inception
Current
Reversal
Relay C
Disabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 5-20
Relay C
Enabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 201 of 345
Fault
Fault
CRX
&
TP
Z2
Stop CTX
&
Start CTX
0
Z3R
&
TD
Current reversal logic
Z1B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
CB Operating time
B
Z3RD
TD
Z3RD
Reset Reset
D
CTX
Z2C
TP
CTX
Reset
Z2C Reset
Time
Fault
Inception
Current
Reversal
Relay C
Disabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 5-20b
Relay C
Enabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 202 of 345
Fault
Fault
Aided trip
DEF F
&
0
DEF R
&
CTX
TDG
&
CB Operating time
DEF RD
Reset
DEF RD
DEF FC
CTX
DEF FC
Reset
TDG
Reset
CTX
Reset
Time
Current
Reversal
Fault
Inception
Relay D
Enabled
Relay D
Disabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 5-21
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 203 of 345
Fault
Fault
CRX
&
TDG
TPG
DEF F
0
CTX
DEF R
&
Current reversal logic
CB Operating time
Z1B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
DEF RD
Reset
CTX
DEF FC
TPG
DEF FC
Reset
CTX
Reset
TDG
Reset
Time
Current
Reversal
Fault
Inception
Relay C
Disabled
Figure 5-22
Relay C
Enabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 204 of 345
Fault
Fault
CRX
&
TPG
DEF F
Stop CTX
&
0
DEF R
&
Start CTX
1
TDG
LDLDI0
Current reversal logic
Z1B
R
E
L
A
Y
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
CB Operating time
DEF RD
LDLSI0D
DEF FD
TPG
DEF RD TDG
Reset Reset
CTX
C
DEF FC
LDLSI0D
TPG
DEF RC
DEF FC
Reset
CTX
CTX
Reset
Time
Fault
Inception
Current
Reversal
Relay C
Disabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 5-22b
Relay C
Enabled
Relay D
Disabled
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.16
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 205 of 345
5.17
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-23
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 206 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 5-24
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 207 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.18
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 208 of 345
5.19
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 209 of 345
Z1X(T)
BAR on Z1Y(T) TRIP (menu)
&
Z1YT
Z2T
BAR on DEF AIDED TRIP (menu)
&
1
BAR on DEF DELAY TRIP (menu)
&
1
BAR on CHANNEL OUT (menu)
BAR
0
t
100ms
&
&
SOTF Trip
Z3T
Figure 5-25
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 210 of 345
Z3A
&
Z2 Comp
Z2A
Z1 Comp
&
Z1A
Z1A'
WI A Ind
LDLSA
LDOVA
&
1
&
Start A
&
Z3B
&
Z2B
&
Z1B
Z1B'
WI B Ind
LDLSB
LDOVB
&
1
&
Start B
&
Z3C
&
Z2C
&
Z1C
Z1C'
WI C Ind
LDLSC
LDOVC
&
1
&
Start C
&
Z3N
&
1
Z2N
Z1N
Z1N'
WI N Ind
DEF_F/R
1
&
Any Z1Z2Z3
SOTF Trip
LDLSN
1
1
LDLSI0
SOTF COMPARATOR (menu)
SOTF En
&
&
Figure 5-26
&
&
&
Start N
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 211 of 345
Self monitoring
6.1.1
Introduction
Optimho relays have continuous self-monitoring. If a failure is detected an alarm is
issued by extinguishing the "Relay Available" LED and closing the "Relay Inoperative
Alarm" contact.
Diagnostic information is automatically displayed if the failure is such that it does
not disable the main microcontroller or the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Monitoring of the analogue circuits includes :
a)
b)
Analogue circuits
The internal voltage rails +5V, +12V, -12V and +12V (relays) are constantly
monitored. In the event of any of the voltages dropping below specified tolerance
limits, or failure of the external dc supply, then the "Relay Inoperative Alarm"
contact will be closed and the "Relay Available" LED extinguished. Also, should the
+5V rail fail, the main microcontroller will be held reset.
Voltage Transformer Supervision logic (see Section 5.2) can be set to block the
operation of the relay in the event of the failure of a VT fuse. All models have an
optically coupled isolator to monitor the auxiliary contact of a miniature circuit
breaker for applications were the VT supplies are protected by a Miniature Circuit
Breaker (MCB) instead of fuses.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 212 of 345
Current Transformer supervision logic (see Figure 6-2), is used to examine the
status of the current input circuits. The logic is based on the premise that for healthy
line conditions, when the three phase currents are well balanced, the biased low-set
neutral level detector (see Section 4.3) will not be operated.
If the biased neutral low-set level detector operates, for a period of five seconds
continuously, without the operation of one of the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
then the relay will respond by closing the "Relay Inoperative Alarm" contact and
extinguishing the "Relay Available" LED. The main microcontroller writes the
message:
'ERROR# I~FAIL
'
'
'
The digital bus structure consists of eight address lines, eight data lines, a READ
line and a WRITE line. During normal operation the software cycles through
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 213 of 345
checking one line from the address bus and data bus each loop of the main
microcontroller program.
The check consists of reading an address (1,2,4,8,16,32,64, or 128), which will
individually put an address line to a logic 1. The individual reads of these
addresses is immediately followed by a READ of address 255, which results in the
previous address being output as data from the address latch in the bus checking
hardware. This results in the corresponding data lines being individually set to a
logic 1. By cycling through the addresses listed above, and following each with a
READ to address 255, then each line on the address bus and data bus will be
individually set to a logic one.
The complete cycle is as listed below :
Operation
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
READ
WRITE
READ
Note:
X = do not care
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 214 of 345
6.1.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 215 of 345
RAM are tested and cleared. If any locations cannot be written to or read from
correctly, then an error condition exists.
The main microcontroller board uses EEPROM (Electrically Eraseable
Programmable Read Only Memory) to provide non-volatile storage of relay settings
and fault records. Whenever data is written to the EEPROM a checksum value for
the data is computed and also stored. The data is then read back from the
EEPROM and a further checksum calculated. Provided this checksum matches the
one stored with the data originally, then the data is intact. If the checksums do not
match then an error condition exists.
Should an error condition be detected in either the RAM or EEPROM, then a default
diagnostics page is written to the LCD, indicating an error on the main
microcontroller board in slot 11. An alarm is also issued by extinguishing the "Relay
Available" LED, and closing the "Relay Inoperative Alarm" contact. Monitor option
24 (see Section 3.14.4) may be used to determine whether the error is in internal
RAM, external RAM, or the EEPROM.
6.1.5
Watch-dog monitoring
Optimho relays use several 80C51 microcontrollers in the hardware
implementation. These microcontrollers perform the various functions required, e.g.
level detectors, sequence comparators, voltage memory feature, frequency
tracking, combinatorial logic, etc. These various functions are performed by an
80C51 microcontroller that has been "masked" with the software required for all
the features.
On dc energisation, each microcontroller "identifies" its required function by
energising a control line and reading the resultant information from one of its input
ports. The microcontroller then releases the control line and, based on the
information returned to the input port, runs the required software. According to the
software function required, the microcontroller assigns one of the output pins as its
"watch-dog" output. The output pin used for this purpose is unique for each
software application.
Each loop of the software the microcontroller toggles the status of the watch-dog
pin. This produces a square wave output, the frequency of which is determined by
the loop time of the software that is being run (typically 100us - 200us). The output
from the watch-dog pin is used to trigger a re-triggerable monostable
multivibrator, the output of which will be at a logic low (0) provided that the
microcontroller keeps re-triggering the monostable input.
Should the microcontroller fail to output the watch-dog signal the monostable
circuit will respond by taking its output signal to a logic high (1). The CR circuit on
the output of the monostable will transfer the logic high as a pulse to the reset pin
of the microcontroller, thus re-starting it.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 216 of 345
If the microcontroller fails to re-start correctly the output from the monostable will
stay high. Figure 6-5 shows a schematic representation of the watch-dog feature.
The monostable output is also connected to the output data latch.
Each time the main microcontroller loops through its software program it reads the
data from all the processing boards output data latches. The status of the data bits
representing watch-dog outputs are examined and should any watch-dog bit be
high (1) then the data from that latch will be declared void for that loop of the
main microcontroller program.
Before issuing a trip signal, the main microcontroller again reads the status of the
watch-dog signals. If any have operated since the last read of the watch-dogs then
the main microcontroller does not issue the trip signal and re-starts its program
loop.
Should any watch-dog circuit operate then the main microcontroller writes a
message to the default diagnostic page on the LCD, indicating which board slot the
error has been detected. An alarm is also issued by extinguishing the "Relay
Available" LED and closing the "Relay Inoperative Alarm" contact.
A further advantage of the watch-dog feature is that it is also capable of detecting
other board failures. The "quiescent" state of the digital data bus is for all lines to
be at a logic high (1). When the main microcontroller reads the output data from
the latch, the watch-dog "bit" will be low provided that:
a)
b)
c)
In the LFZP 111 model, equipped with both Quadrilateral and Mho ground fault
characteristics, remedial action is taken if a watch-dog operation on the
Quadrilateral comparator board occurs and the Quadrilateral characteristic had
been selected via the menu. If the Zone 3 quadrilateral ground fault watch-dog
operates, then the alternative Zone 3 lenticular ground fault elements are used. If
the Zone 1 / Zone 2 quadrilateral watch-dog operates, then the alternative Zone 1
/ Zone 2 shaped mho ground fault elements are used. Since most system faults are
ground faults, this capability considerably increases the overall availability of the
relay. The error associated with the Quadrilateral board will be alarmed in the
usual manner.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 217 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 218 of 345
Self monitoring
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 219 of 345
&
LDVO
LDLSN
DEF_F/R
LDHSA
LDLSA
&
LDHSB
LDLSB
&
1
LDHSC
LDLSC
&
LDHSN
LDLSN
&
Figure 6-2
Relay
Fail
5s
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 220 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 221 of 345
RD
WR
Ad0
Ad1
Ad2
Ad3
Ad4
Ad5
Ad6
Ad7
take in Adr
take in Adr
LE
latch Adr
output
Adr to
Data bus
OE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
high impedance output
pulled up
Ad0
Ad1
Ad2
Ad3
Ad4
Ad5
Ad6
Ad7
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
COMPARE
FAILS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 222 of 345
Watchdog monitoring
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.2
6.2.1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 223 of 345
6.2.2
Initialisation
On power up or after a reset the main microcontroller performs the following
functions:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.2.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 224 of 345
Main loop
After the initialisation the software enters the main program loop as shown in
Figure 6-6. This loop consists of a number of modules which are run in sequence.
The loop takes approximately 2 to 3ms to run.
The user interface and serial communication modules handle the display,
keyboard, printer and RS232 serial communication functions. The remaining
modules handle the distance and DEF relay functions.
The internal registers used for storing data are cleared and the data is read from
all the latches on the boards. This data is sorted and stored in the microcontroller's
internal registers.
The other software modules process this data storing the results in internal registers.
Finally the appropriate data is outputted to the various boards in the relay.
6.2.4
Timers
Extensive use is made of software timers. These are run in a separate
microcontroller under the control of the main microcontroller.
Three types of timers are required. The simplest are fixed length timers whose
length is defined in the timer microcontroller (Table 6-1).
The second type are variable length timers whose length is defined by the
initialisation software (Table 6-2).
The third type are variable length timers whose length is defined by the menu
settings (Table 6-3). The actual timer lengths are passed to the timer
microcontroller as part of the initialisation.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 225 of 345
INITIALISATION
TOGGLE WATCHDOG
CLEAR OPTO
REGISTERS
USER
INTERFACE
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
BASIC SCHEME
Section
3.1-3.12
Section
3.13
CLEAR
REGISTERS
BUS CHECK
VTS LOGIC
5.8
SELECTED SCHEME
Section
5.9-5.15
TRIP LATCHING
LOGIC
Section
5.18
COMBINING LOGIC
YES
BASIC SCHEME
NO
Section
6.1
Section
Section
5.1
FILTER SWITCHING
MEMORY COUNT
Section
5.17
Section
5.2
EXTERNAL
FAULT LOCATOR
STARTS
Section
5.20
BAR LOGIC
Section
5.19
Section
6.1
OUTPUT CONTACT
INFORMATION
Section
8.6
MONITOR
TEST OPTIONS
Section
3.14
LEVEL
DETECTOR
Section
DEF LOGIC
Section
4.4
INDICATION
Section
5.5
ANOMALOUS
CONDITIONS
Section
5.6
SOTF LOGIC
PSB LOGIC
5.3
OUTPUT INTERNAL
DATA
Figure 6-6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 226 of 345
Timer name
Pole Dead A Ph DO
Pole Dead B Ph DO
Pole Dead C Ph DO
VTS Accelerated
Indication PU
SOFT Current no
Volts Pick Up
LDLSI2 Drop Off
Z1 Ph Comparator
Block
Z2 Ph Comparator
Block
Weak Infeed PU
Trip Drop Off
Loss of Guard
Drop Off
Signal Received DO
Block Auto-reclose
Drop Off
Weak Infeed any
Comparator DO
POR/Weak Infeed
Carrier Echo
DEF Reset
SOTF Dead Time
Any Pole Dead DO
All Poles Dead DO
ALARM LED flash
VTS Pick Up
SOTF Dead Time
Home Key Delay
Weak Infeed PU
POR Carrier Delay
Permissive scheme
Disable
Real time clock
Timer
Setting ms
22.5
22.5
22.5
20
20
20
35
35
60
60
200
100
100
100
100
22.5
200
240
250
750
5500
110 000
900 000
10
100
150
1000
Timer ref.
Timer name
Setting ms
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 227 of 345
T8
Bandpass filter
(volts)
POR Circuit
Breaker Open PU
Distance
Preference
Relay blocked
opto drop off
Reset key repeat
Bandpass filter
(current)
Anomalous
conditions
T12
T19
T24
T27
T32
T44
30
250
50
or 20
20
2000
40
5000
Table 6-3 Timers whose length are set via the menu
Timer ref.
Timer name
T1
T35
T36
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
T42
T43
TDW
TZ2
TZ1X
TZ1Y
TZ3
TZ6
TD
TP
TDG
TPG
Minimum
ms
0
100
100
100
100
20
0
0
0
0
Maximum
ms
98
9980
9980
9980
9980
90
98
98
98
98
Step
ms
2
20
20
20
20
5
2
2
2
2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.2.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 228 of 345
Input routine
The input routine reads the status of all the comparators, level detectors, optical
isolators and the DEF if fitted. It checks the validity of the data by testing the
watchdog bit, as described in Section 6.1.5 and stores the data in internal RAM for
use later in the loop.
The following is a list of all the input signals and the action taken on testing the
various check bits. In all cases if the watchdog bit (WD D7) is a 1 data from that
particular latch is ignored.
Distance comparators
If the quadrilateral (QUAD) characteristic is selected ground fault data from the
Quad latches is used instead of the ground fault data from the mho/lenticular
latches.
BOARD
ZJ0130
ZJ0130
ZJ0131
ZJ0132
ZJ0132
ADDRESS
62H
63H
44H
51H
52H
ADDRESS
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
62H
WD
CpCAZ1
CpBCZ1
CpABZ1
CpCZ1
CpBZ1
CpAZ1
63H
WD
WD
MEM
WD CLK
CpCAZ2
CpBCZ2
CpABZ2
CpCZ2
CpBZ2
CpAZ2
44H
WD
CpABZ6
CpCAZ3
CpBCZ3
CpABZ3
CpCZ3
CpBZ3
CpAZ3
51H
WD
CpCZ2
CpBZ2
CpAZ2
CpCZ1
CpBZ1
CpAZ1
52H
WD
CpCZ3R
CpBZ3R
CpAZ3R
CpCZ3F
CpBZ3
F
CpAZ3
F
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 229 of 345
Level detectors
BOARD
ZJ0136
ZJ0136
ADDRESS
1BH
1CH
ADDRESS
D7
1BH
WD
1CH
D6
D5
LDHSI0 LDLSI2
D4
LDV0
D3
D2
D1
D0
LDLSB
LDLSA
D1
D0
BOARD
ZJ0133
ADDRESS
12H
ADDRESS
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
12H
WD
Reset
Ind
Relay
Blocked
CRX
COS
D5
D4
D3
D2
Breaker Single
Open
Pole
Open
Reset
Z1Ext
/LGS
6.2.6
BOARD
ZJ0139
ADDRESS
09H
ADDRESS
D7
09H
WD
D6
CpDEFR CpDEF
D2
D1
D0
Output routine
As the loop is run the various control signals such as pole dead A, bandpass filter
switching etc. are built up in internal registers. At the end of each loop the output
routine sends this data to the appropriate latches on the boards in order to control
the relay circuits.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 230 of 345
Distance comparators
BOARD
ZJ0130
ZJ0131
ZJ0132
ADDRESS
64H
45H
53H
ADDRESS
D7
REGISTER
O_P_COMPA
O_P_COMPC
O_P_COMPB
D4
D3
D2
PDA
PDB
PDC
Reset C Count 4
45H
PDA
PDB
PDC
Reset C Count 4
53H
Count 3 Reverse
PDA
PDB
PDC
Reset C Count 4
D4
D3
D2
64H
D6
D5
D1
D0
AC input
BOARD
ZJ0134
ZJ0135
ADDRESS
03H
07H
ADDRESS
D7
D6
D5
03H
Filter
Volt
Filter
Volt
AMP
hyst
AMP
Hyst
Filter
Current
07H
REGISTER
O_P_AC1
O_P_AC2
D1
D0
THETA Ph
THETA N
Level detectors
BOARD
ZJ0136
ADDRESS
1DH
ADDRESS
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
1DH
D1
D0
Reset
BOARD
ZJ0139
ADDRESS
0AH
ADDRESS
D7
0AH
D6
Filter Count 3
Current
Output relays
REGISTER
O_P_DEF
D5
D4
D3
Reset
All
D2
D1
D0
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 231 of 345
BOARD
ZJ0140
ZJ0140
ZJ0140
ADDRESS
05H
04H
06H
REGISTER
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
ADDRESS
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
05H
53-55
49-51
45-47
41-43
37-39
29-35
29-33
29-31
04H
54-56
50-52
46-48
42-44
38-40
30-36
30-34
30-32
06H
81-83
77-79
73-75
69-71
65-67
57-63
57-61
57-59
(e.g. 50-52 refers to the contact connected across the external connector terminal
numbers 50 and 52)
The data in OUTPUT1, OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT3 is dependent on the contact
configuration selected via the menu. See Section 8.0 for output configurations.
6.3
6.3.1
Introduction
See Fig. 6-7
The single PCB (ZJ0143) power supply unit is contained within a solid enclosure
which is mounted on the back of the Optimho. It can be detached from the main
relay case by removing four retaining nuts and withdrawing the push-on power
leads from the terminal block.
Three versions of the power supply are available, for nominal input voltage ratings
48/54, 110/125, 220/250 volts dc. These versions have operating ranges 37.5 to
64.8, 87.5 to 150, 175 to 300 volts d.c. respectively, each version produces
regulated output voltage rails with maximum load current capabilities of +12V @
1A, +12V @ 0.5A, +5V @ 0.5A, and -12V @ 0.5A. Any output can be
short-circuited for a brief time with no resultant power supply damage.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.3.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 232 of 345
Operation
As can be seen by reference to Fig.6-7, the dc supply from the secure station
battery is used as a power source for the production of the isolated smooth and
regulated internal supply rails. The dc is firstly passed through a filtering section
which attenuates electrical noise and voltage spikes and ensures that the Optimho
is immune to interference generated by other equipment connected to the station
battery. It also prevents the power supply from transmitting interference to this
same equipment.
The filtered voltage is sensed by the voltage detector and when this exceeds a
minimum value the internal voltage rail of the power supply electronics is
energised. This eliminates the danger of power supply maloperation for input
voltages less than the minimum operating voltages given above.
The "feed forward" principle is used in the pulse width modulator section to produce
a 40kHz square wave with a mark to space ratio (duty factor) which varies inversely
with the filtered supply voltage. This ensures that the power supply output voltages
remain relatively constant despite differing or changing input supply voltages. The
switching transistor is driven "on" and "off" by the pulse width modulator to energise
the primary of the transformer with current from the filtered voltage supply. The
transformer electrically isolates the station supply from the relay electronics (2kV for
1 minute) and transforms the primary voltage to a level suitable for the outputs.
Screens are incorporated on the transformer to render the relay insensitive to
common mode interference between the station battery supply and the relay
case/ground.
A pulsed voltage waveform is produced at each of the transformer secondaries
which are smoothed by L - C low pass filters to produce near constant dc voltages.
It is then necessary to regulate these voltages since small variations in them occur
due to ripple, input voltage variation and load regulation. This is accomplished by
the use of solid state regulator devices which also feature overcurrent and thermal
overload protection.
If some part of the power supply fails such that a large current is drawn
from the station battery then a fusible resistor, connected in series with
the station battery voltage supply, operates and disconnects the battery
voltage. Before resetting this device the fault resulting in its operation
must be investigated.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-7
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 233 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 234 of 345
6.4
6.4.1
Versions
There are two versions of the main microcontroller board :
ZJ0138 001
ZJ0138 002
6.4.2
Introduction
This board contains the main 80C51 microcontroller integrated circuit (sometimes
referred to as main processor) which together with peripheral components forms a
computer based system which controls operation of the relay. The main elements of
this system are :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.4.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 235 of 345
6.4.4
Main microcontroller
The main microcontroller is referred to as a microcontroller rather than a
microprocessor because the device is actually a self contained micro computer
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 236 of 345
system fabricated as a single integrated circuit. The device contains; a CPU (Central
processing Unit) comprising an Arithmetic and Logic Unit (ALU), 128 bytes of RAM
and 4K bytes of masked ROM, 4 Bi-directional 8 bit Ports (P0 to P3), two 16 bit
timer/counters and a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receive and Transmit) for serial
communication.
The CPU is responsible for executing software instructions and also provides a
powerful boolean processor which is used extensively to implement the relay scheme
logic. The device is configured to run software code residing in both internal masked
ROM and external EPROM. The internal ROM is referred to as masked because this
code is pre-programmed during manufacture and cannot be changed.
6.4.5
6.4.6
Identifier circuit
The 4k of masked program code within each 80C51 microcontroller comprises
several distinct programs. The function implemented by a particular microcontroller
(i.e. main microcontroller, comparator, level detector etc.) is dependant on the
program code selected. In order for the 80C51 to know which function is required
an external identify circuit is used. The identifier circuit utilises a transistor which is
configured to ground a port pin of the 80C51. The particular port pin grounded
uniquely identifies the program code required. This principle is used for all 80C51
devices with the exception of the SLAVE microcontroller, this device is identified by a
unique code issued by the main microcontroller. Refer to Section 6.1.5 for a detailed
explanation.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.4.7
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 237 of 345
6.4.8
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.4.9
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 238 of 345
6.4.10
Serial communication
80C51 UART
All serial communications are handled by a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receive
and Transmit) device within the main microcontroller. This device enables full duplex
communication (transmit and receive simultaneously) at several baud rates with
various protocols, refer to Section 3.13. The UART is controlled from software stored
in EPROM.
RS232
Two separate RS232 buffer/converter circuits are provided, one for the front (LOCAL)
serial port and one for the rear (MODEM) serial port. The function of these circuits is
to convert TTL logic signals used by the main microcontroller to corresponding signal
levels required for serial communications and visa versa. A TTL logic 1 output is
transformed to a voltage level in the range +5V to +15V. A TTL logic 1 input is
transformed from a voltage in the range +3V to +15V. A TTL logic 0 output is
transformed to a voltage in the range -5V to -15V. A TTL logic 0 input is transformed
from a voltage in the range -3V to -15V.
Each RS232 device is enabled from data bus line D5 ( 1 for LOCAL, 0 for MODEM)
via a latch circuit connected to the internal data bus. The latch circuit is in turn
controlled by an output signal from the main microcontroller and the external write
(WR) signal. Data is read and written serially to the RS232 devices using the TX
(Transmit) and RX (Receive) port connections from the main microcontroller. Modem
control lines RTS (output) and DTR (output) are derived from data lines D3 and D4
respectively, and applied to the modem RS232 buffer via a latch circuit. The latch
circuit is controlled by an output signal from the main microcontroller and the
external write (WR) signal. Modem control lines CTS (input) and DSR (input) are
connected from the RS232 modem buffer to appropriate port pins on the main
microcontroller.
6.4.11
Monitor circuits
DC rail monitor
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 239 of 345
Circuits are provided to monitor the 5V, 12V and -12V dc rail voltages. If the 5V dc
rail drops by more than 10% a reset is applied to the main microcontroller. The reset
is only removed when the 5V rail is within 10% of nominal 5V. Similarly, a reset is
applied if either the +12V or -12V dc rails are lost. In addition to resetting the main
microcontroller the CONTACT CLEAR and RELAY FAIL signals are pulled low when a
reset is issued. The CONTACT CLEAR signal is applied to all output auxiliary relay
boards (ZJ0140) to prevent operation of any output auxiliary relay. The Relay
Inoperative Alarm contact closes and the Relay Available LED is extinguish when the
RELAY FAIL signal goes low.
Watchdog monitor
Both the main and slave micro controllers are monitored by separate watchdog
circuits. The function of a watchdog circuit is to initiate a reset in the unlikely event of
a software upset. The operating principle of the watchdog circuit relies on the
software code executing a periodic toggling of an output port connected to an
external monostable circuit. The periodic signal is used to hold off the output from
the monostable circuit which is ac coupled to the reset pin of the main
microcontroller. Should a software upset occur, the periodic signal will be lost and
consequently a reset will be issued. The slave microcontroller reset pin is controlled
from the main microcontroller.
6.4.12
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.4.13
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 240 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 241 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
T1
T2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 242 of 345
T3
T4
T5
T6
T8
T7
T9
T10
T11
T1
T12
T2
OSC
ALE
PSEN
RD, WR
3
ADDRESS A15 - A8
PORT 2
3
PORT 0
FLOAT
A7 - A0
ADDRESS A15 - A8
8
6
INST IN
FLOAT
FLOAT
A7 - A0
FLOAT
INST IN
FLOAT
ALE
PSEN
RD
7
5
3
PORT 2
ADDRESS A15 - A8
3
PORT 0
INST IN
FLOAT
A7 - A0
6
FLOAT
ADDRESS
OR FLOAT
FLOAT
DATA IN
ALE
PSEN
WR
6
5
2
PORT 2
ADDRESS A15 - A8
2
PORT 0
INST IN
FLOAT
A7 - A0
3
DATA OUT
Figure 6-9
ADDRESS
OR FLOAT
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 243 of 345
TRI-STATE CONTROL
FOR RD, WR, RS & R/W
BUFFER
A15
A14
A13
A12
TRI-STATE CONTROL
FOR ADDRESS BUS
LATCH
AND
A11
RD
Figure 6-10
AND
OR
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
FOR DATA BUS
TRANSCEIVER
OR
TRI-STATE CONTROL
FOR DATA BUS
TRANCEIVER
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 244 of 345
6.5.1
Versions
There are two versions of the front panel module, these are :GJ0240 001 (Board ZJ0137 001) for horizontal aspect,
GJ0240 002 (Board ZJ0166 001) for vertical aspect.
6.5.2
Mechanical
The front panel board is mounted on the hinged front panel assembly. Connections
are made to the main microcontroller board (ZJ0138) via a 64 way plug/socket
connector. Connections are made to the opto-isolator board (ZJ0133) and output
relay boards (ZJ0140) via a 64 way ribbon cable connector mounted on the side of
the front board. A special hinge alignment mechanism ensures that the front panel
board connector locates accurately with the main microcontroller board connector
when the front panel is closed. A spring loaded support arm is provided to hold the
front panel open when withdrawing or inserting circuit boards.
6.5.3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 245 of 345
applied to the external data bus, are written to the LCD latch circuit whenever a write
(WR) instruction to the LCD latch address (39H) is executed by the main
microcontroller.
6.5.4
Keypad operation
The keypad consists of four cursor (arrow) keys mounted in a cruciform pattern, a
RESET key, a SET key and a ACCEPT/READ key. One side of each key is connected
to 0V, the other side is connected to a data line. When a key is pressed the
connected data line is grounded. When a key is not pressed, the connected data line
is pulled high (5V) via a pull up resistor. The table below shows data line key
connections and the corresponding code present on the data bus when each key is
pressed in turn.
KEY
UP
RIGHT
DOWN
LEFT
SET
ACCEPT/READ
RESET
No Key
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
PARALLEL PORT
PIN CONNECTED
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 246 of 345
A latch circuit is used to buffer the external data bus from the keypad keys. The latch
circuit is controlled by the output of an address decoding circuit connected to the
external address bus. A unique address (38H) is allocated for the control of the latch
circuit. The main microcontroller reads the keypad status by executing a read (RD)
instruction from address 38H. Software code run by the main microcontroller is used
to de-bounce a key by only actioning it if its status has remained constant for more
than about 20ms. The keypad connected data lines are also connected to the
PARALLEL port pins, as indicated in the table above, this allows key presses to be
mimicked by grounding the appropriate PARALLEL port pin using external test
equipment connected to the PARALLEL port. Note, pins 22 to 25 on the PARALLEL
port are connected to 0V.
6.5.5
6.5.6
Parallel port
Output signals - printer strobe
The Printer Strobe signal is used in conjunction with the Printer Busy signal to
implement handshaking between the relay and a connected parallel printer. Print
data sent to the PARALLEL port is only acknowledged and read by a parallel printer
when the Printer Strobe signal is low. The Printer Strobe signal is controlled by the
data line output D3 of a latch circuit connected to the external data bus. The latch
circuit is controlled by the output from an address decoding circuit connected to the
external address bus. A unique address (3BH) is allocated to control the latch circuit.
Output signals - DC
For monitoring purposes the 5V, 12V, -12V and 12V(Relay) dc rail voltages are
brought out to PARALLEL port pins 18, 19, 20 and 21 respectively via 10 kohm
resistors.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 247 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 248 of 345
PARALLEL
PORT PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Note:
6.5.7
PRINTER
CONNECTIONS
STB (Pin 1)
D0 (Pin 2)
D1 (Pin 3)
D2 (Pin 4)
D3 (Pin 5)
D4 (Pin 6)
D5 (Pin 7)
D6 (Pin 8)
D7 (Pin 9)
Do not connect
BUSY (Pin 11)
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
0v (Pin 22)
0v (Pin 23)
0v (Pin 24)
0v (Pin 25)
FUNCTION NAME
Printer strobe
(Output)
Data line D0
(Output)
Data line D1
(Output)
Data line D2
(Output)
Data line D3
(Output)
Data line D4
(Output)
Data line D5
(Output)
Data line D6
(Output)
Data line D7
(Output)
Data line D6 RESET key
(Input)
Data line D7 Printer Busy (Input)
Data line D5 READ key
(Input)
Data line D4 SET key
(Input)
Data line D3 LEFT key
(Input)
Data line D2 DOWN key (Input)
Data line D1 RIGHT key
(Input)
Data line D0 UP key
(Input)
5v
Monitor
(Output)
12v
Monitor
(Output)
-12v
Monitor
(Output)
12v(Relay) Monitor
(Output)
0v
0v
(Note: All are commoned,
0v
only 1 connection
0v
necessary)
Indication LED's
Three indication light emitting diodes (LED) designated TRIP (red), ALARM (yellow)
and RELAY AVAILABLE (green) are provided. The TRIP and ALARM LED's are
controlled by the data line outputs D0 (for TRIP LED) and D2 (for ALARM LED) of a
latch circuit connected to the external data bus. The latch circuit is controlled by the
output from an address decoding circuit connected to the external address bus. A
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 249 of 345
unique address (3BH) is allocated to control the latch circuit. In order to turn ON the
TRIP LED a data byte having bit D0 set is written to the data bus at address 3BH. To
turn OFF the TRIP LED a data byte having bit D0 cleared is written to the data bus at
address 3BH. The ALARM LED is similarly controlled using data bit D2. The RELAY
AVAILABLE LED is operated from the normally open contact of the Relay Inoperative
Alarm auxiliary relay mounted on output relay board ZJ0140 002. Under normal
working conditions the RIA auxiliary relay is picked up and the RELAY AVAILABLE LED
is turned on.
6.5.8
Serial Port
Relevant connections made to the 25 way D type front mounted (LOCAL) SERIAL port
are routed directly to the main microcontroller board (ZJ0138) via the 64 way
front/main microcontroller plug/socket.
Note, this port is intended for local connection only and as such has only limited
protection against high voltage interference. Precautions should be taken to isolate
external connections made to this port if excessive noise voltages are possible, refer
to Section 3.13.
Summary Table - SERIAL port pin connections for front (local) socket
SERIAL
PORT PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 to 24
25
FUNCTION NAME
0V (Ground)
TXD (Transmit)
RXD (Receive)
Not connected
Reserved, do not connect
Not connected
0V (Signal ground)
Not connected
Reserved, do not connect
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-11
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 250 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 251 of 345
6.6
6.6.1
Introduction
The board contains seven optical isolators as shown in block diagram form in Figure
6-12. These allow the scheme logic to access information from external equipment
and take appropriate action, as described in Section 5.0.
The main microcontroller reads the status of the optical isolators via the address and
data bus.
6.6.2
Voltage rating
There are two different voltage ratings (Vx2) as shown in the table.
Vx2
48/54V
110/125V
Operative Range
37.5 to 60V
87.5 to 137.5V
Maximum Withstand
64.8V
150V
For Vx2 = 220/250V the 110/125V option is used with an external resistor box
GJ0229 002.
6.6.3
Implementation
The PCB plugs directly into the rear Midos terminal block and communicates with the
main microcontroller through the ribbon cable at the front of the relay. The rear
connection and function of each optical isolator are shown in the following table.
CASE TERMINAL
+ve
-ve
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
NAME
Reset Zone 1 Extension / Loss of Guard
Single Pole Open
Breaker Open
Channel Out of Service
CRX
Relay Blocked
Reset Indications
The optical isolators have a defined minimum operating voltage of greater than 10V.
Transient operation is prevented by filtering the output of each optical isolator.
Transient suppressers are fitted across the inputs to prevent damage to the optical
isolators. A screen, connected to the case, diverts interference to the case, thus
preventing coupling into the secondary circuits.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-12
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 252 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.7
6.7.1
Introduction
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 253 of 345
The input module provides the electrical isolation between the relay and substation
equipment for the ac voltage and current inputs. The module contains three voltage
transformers, five current transactors and 2 printed circuit boards (ZJ0134 &
ZJ0135) which contain calibration and filter circuits. The transformers are mounted
on a metal plate with their primaries wired to a Midos terminal block. The
secondaries are wired to a small backplane on the rear of the module. The
backplane has edge connectors for two PCBs and a connector to couple it to the
main backplane.
The module connects to the rear terminal block for external connections and to the
main backplane for internal connections.
Block diagrams of the 2 PCBs are shown in Figures 6-13 and 6-14.
The main microcontroller controls setting etc. via the digital address and data bus.
The analogue signals are transferred to the measuring boards located in the central
section of the case via the analogue bus. The voltage and current circuits will be
described separately.
6.7.2
Under normal conditions the distance measuring elements use the voltage signal
produced by the low pass filter. However, the measuring elements are automatically
switched to the filtered output of the bandpass circuits after a predetermined interval
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 254 of 345
of time from the incidence of a fault. This ensures that, if the comparator operating
time has been extended by abnormally severe exponential or high frequency
components of the voltage signal, the comparators have the opportunity of
remeasuring on a relatively uncontaminated voltage signal.
This arrangement prevents any possibility of excessively long comparator operating
times which might otherwise occur under certain extreme conditions, such as:
a)
b)
c)
Severe CVT transient errors with high SIR and high fault
position.
Severe travelling wave distortion on a long line at high
fault position.
Large mismatch between source and line time constants with
high SIR and high fault position. An example is shown in
Figure 6-16.
The voltage level detectors, distance comparators and the zero sequence current
level detector are used as fault detectors for the purpose of controlling the transfer
from normal to bandpass filtered voltage signals (see Section 5.16). Solid state
switches are used under the control of the main microcontroller.
The reset time of the voltage level detectors is 0 to 5.5ms depending on
point-on-wave of fault incidence, and a further delay of 30ms is introduced by a
software timer. Resetting of any voltage level detector causes all three phases of
voltage signal to be transferred to the bandpass filter outputs. The time delay of 30
to 35.5ms between fault inception and signal transfer is sufficient to allow fast
tripping to occur, if electrical conditions permit, before the intervention of the filters.
If fast tripping does not occur, the delay is long enough for the transient errors of the
bandpass filters caused by the collapsing voltage to have decayed away before
signal transfer to the bandpass outputs. At the instance of switching in the voltage
bandpass filters, a step in the voltage waveform may arise and to ensure that this
causes no confusion to the comparators a momentary inhibit pulse is sent to all the
comparators.
The voltage supply is switched back to normal when:
a)
b)
When the relay trips the circuit breaker the relay reach is increased by 5%. This is
achieved by reducing the gain of the voltage buffer amplifiers, which reduce the
outputs VA, VB and VC, by 5%. This hysteresis under control of the main
microcontroller defines the reset ratio of the relay and prevents chatter of relay
output contacts for faults on the boundary of operation.
The B phase output from the bandpass filter (VMEM IN) is used to generate the
synchronous memory facility on the Zone 1/2 comparator board (ZJ0130).
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 255 of 345
The overall transfer functions for the voltage input signals at the nominal power
system frequencies are:
Vout/Vin = 0.066299 /-10 (50 Hz models)
Vout/Vin = 0.065874 /-12 (60 Hz models)
6.7.3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 256 of 345
-INZN = (I * 0.3325)/(In * KZN) V /-(THETA N - 12) (60 Hz)
The respective output signals are:-IAR = (I * 0.3273)/In V /(-180 - 13) (50 Hz models)
-IAR = (I * 0.3250)/In V /(-180 - 15) (60 Hz models)
INR = (IAR + IBR + ICR)
Note: Phases B and C output signals are derived similarly.
6.7.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 257 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 258 of 345
D0 - D7
Address &
RD / WR
decoding
logic
Ad0 - Ad7
RD WR
Latch
Latch
I1
DAC to set
KZPH mag
Low Pass
Filter
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
THETA PH
Angle Set
IAZPH
LDIA
I2
4 Ohm
Setting
Low Pass
Filter
DAC to set
KZPH mag
Low Pass
Filter
-IAX
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
THETA PH
Angle Set
IBZPH
LDIB
I3
4 Ohm
Setting
Low Pass
Filter
DAC to set
KZPH mag
Low Pass
Filter
-IBX
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
THETA PH
Angle Set
ICZPH
LDIC
I4
I5
Figure 6-13
-ICX
4 Ohm
Setting
Low Pass
Filter
DAC to set
KZN mag
Low Pass
Filter
4 Ohm
Setting
Low Pass
Filter
INX
4 Ohm
Setting
Low Pass
Filter
IPX
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
-IN
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 259 of 345
D0 - D7
Address &
RD / WR
decoding
logic
Ad0 - Ad7
RD WR
Latch
THETA N
Angle Set
-IN
E1
Low Pass
Filter
Amplitude
Hysteresis
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
E2
Low Pass
Filter
Amplitude
Hysteresis
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
E3
Low Pass
Filter
Amplitude
Hysteresis
Switched
Bandpass
Filter
-IAX
Bandpass
Filter
93 DEG LAG
-IBX
Bandpass
Filter
93 DEG LAG
-ICX
Bandpass
Filter
93 DEG LAG
-INZN
VA
VB
VC
-IAR
-IBR
-ICR
INR
Figure 6-14
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-15
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 260 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 261 of 345
V-IZ
NO ZERO CROSSINGS
COMPARATOR CANNOT OPERATE
V-IZ
30-35.5ms
Figure 6-16
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-17
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 262 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 263 of 345
6.8
6.8.1
Introduction
Optimho requires various voltage and current level detectors for its operation. These
level detectors are located on this PCB, a block diagram is shown in Figure 6-18.
Twelve level detectors are required in the standard relay with an additional three if
the DEF option is fitted.
The main microcontroller communicates with the PCB via the address and data bus.
It reads the status of the level detectors, controls the settings for the DEF level
detectors when fitted and sends resets when required.
6.8.2
Implementation
The principle of operation of a level detector is described in Section 4.3. The
hardware consists of an analogue comparison circuit where the input signal is
compared with positive and negative reference levels producing a logic signal and a
80C51 masked programmed microprocessor running an algorithm. The reference
levels were chosen so that the pick up level is 70% of Vn or 2.932V, the required
level for the voltage level detectors. Other lower pick up levels are obtained by
amplifying the input signal.
As part of the continuous monitoring the negative reference is monitored and an
alarm given if it is not within the required tolerance. Both the 80C51s have
watchdog circuitry to monitor the software. A local reset is given should a failure
occur and an alarm is also given.
To prevent chatter each level detector has approximately 15% hysteresis. This is
achieved by reducing the reference on individual level detectors when they operate.
The table below lists each level detector with its corresponding T1 and T2 timer
settings and its pick up level in terms of percent of rating and voltage level on the
PCB.
Table 6-4 Level Detectors
IC6
NAME
T1 (cycles)
T2 (cycles)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
LDOVA
LDOVB
LDOVC
LDLSIO
LDVO
LDLSI2
LDHSI0
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.15
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
1.1
0.275
0.275
*
*
*
PICK UP
% OF RATING
70%
70%
70%
5%
45%
3.5%
5%
PICK UP
VOLTS
2.932V
2.932V
2.932V
13.39mV
1.8945V
9.37mV
13.39mV
PICK UP
% OF RATING
5%
PICK UP
VOLTS
16.74mV
NAME
T1 (cycles)
T2 (cycles)
D0
LDLSA
0.275
0.275
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
6.8.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 264 of 345
LDLSB
LDLSC
LDHSA
LDHSB
LDHSC
LDLSN
LDHSN
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.15
0.15
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
0.275
1.1
1.1
5%
5%
7.5%
7.5%
7.5%
5%
16%
16.74mV
16.74mV
25.11mV
25.11mV
25.11mV
16.74mV
51.36mV
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 265 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 266 of 345
RELAY FAIL
D0 - D7
Address &
RD / WR
decoding
logic
Ad0 - Ad7
RD WR
Latch
VA
VB
VC
3I0
3I2B
3 DAC's
To set
Level
Detector
Pickup
Levels
Amplitude
Comparators
& level
shifting
circuits
LDOVA
LDOVB
LDOVC
LDLSI0
LDV0
LDLSI2
LDHSI0
D7
-ve reference
level monitor
+ve
-ve
Detector
output
Latch
LEVEL
DETECTORS
in 80C51
WD
+ & - voltage
Reference level
Circuit
D0
Level
Watchdog
Monitor &
Reset
Control
Circuits
reset
Reset
Latch
LDIA
LDIB
LDIC
G
G
G
WD
Amplitude
Comparators
& level
shifting
circuits
LDLSA
LDLSB
LDLSC
LDHSA
LDHSB
LDHSC
LDLSN
LDHSN
G
LEVEL
DETECTORS
in 80C51
G
G
Amplitude
Comparators
& level
shifting
circuits
Variable Reference
Level formed by
Full Wave Rectifying
Ph-Ph currents &
Peak smoothing
Figure 6-18
D0
Level
Detector
output
Latch
D7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.9
6.9.1
Introduction
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 267 of 345
Operation
Zone reach settings
The voltage vectors from the analogue bus (see Section 6.7) are attenuated by the
12 bit Digital to Analogue converters, and buffered to provide the required zone
reach multiplication. These attenuated sine wave voltage signals are then mixed with
the IZ base setting vectors from the analogue bus, squared up and level shifted to
generate the V-IZ vectors. These form the `A` input to the main comparator
processor. The sine wave IZ vectors are also squared up to be used in the directional
line inhibits and memory sensitivity.
The V-IZ vectors for Zone 1/1X/1Y and Zone 2 Quadrilateral forward reactance
reach are also supplied, via the backplane bus, to the Quadrilateral ground fault
comparator board (ZJ0132). The quadrilateral Zone 1 guard zone requires a
forward setting which is ten times that of the Zone 1 ground fault setting (see Section
4.2.6). This is obtained by further attenuating the Zone 1 voltages, after the Zone
1/1X/1Y attenuation, by a factor of ten, mixing these with the appropriate IZ signals
and squaring to produce the (V-IZ)GZ1 square waves.
For underground cable protection the phase and ground reaches are halved. This is
accomplished by altering the mix ratio of the voltage vector with the IZ base setting
vector, to effectively double the voltage vector and hence halve the reach.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 268 of 345
Polarising circuits
The polarising signals required for the shaped mho characteristics (see Section 4.2)
form the `B` input to the main comparator. They consist of mixing the three
phase-neutral voltages and the memory signals, squaring and digitally phase
shifting. The voltage memory signals VMEM A, VMEM B, VMEM C are produced
within the inhibit/voltage memory processor using VMEM IN [VB (bandpassed)] as
the phase-neutral reference vector for the voltage memory. This permanently
bandpassed filtered voltage is used to prevent high frequency interference signals
corrupting the voltage memory. When the memory is not available it is replaced with
a small percentage of -IZ signal. This provides a restraining influence in the
polarising for close up three phase faults after the memory has expired. This prevents
operation of Zone 1 and Zone 2 main comparator for close up 3 phase reverse
faults.
The polarising signals are also used in forming the directional line inhibits for Zone 1
and Zone 2 and are provided for the reverse Zone 3 shaped mho, and the
quadrilateral directional line.
Comparators
The main comparator treats the input square waves `A` and `B` as logic variables
which can each have a high or low logic state at any time (see Section 4.1). Basically
if signal `A` lags `B` and no directional or external pole dead inhibits are present
the comparator will issue a trip (high logic ) to the appropriate output data latch.
The main comparators for Zone 1 and Zone 2 are implemented in 80C51 micro
controllers. One 80C51 is used for Zone 1/1X/1Y phase-neutral and phase-phase
faults and one for Zone 2 phase-neutral and phase-phase faults. Each main
comparator has directional inhibit inputs which when active force it to restrain. The
inhibit comparator is implemented in a 80C51 microcontroller (clocked at 12MHz),
and provides the directional inhibits operating on Zone 1 and Zone 2. The main
comparator clocks are 10MHz for 50Hz power system frequency and 12MHz for
60Hz. This clock is divided down by a factor of 800 and used for digital phase
shifting in the polarising circuits to provide the required phase shifts appropriate to
the nominal system frequency.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 269 of 345
External controls
External controls from the main microcontroller board are written to the input data
latch, these include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Monitoring
All comparators and polarising clock are monitored by watch-dog circuits. In the
event of failure an alarm will be read from the appropriate output data latch by the
main microcontroller board. The technique used will only allow a trip from the output
data latch if it is followed by a successful bus check (see Section 6.1). A watch-dog
failure may indicate a failure of the micro controllers, clock circuitry, address
decoding logic or output latch.
Data transfer
Digital inputs to and from the board are controlled by address decoding and data
latches. When the appropriate address is placed on the address bus and the read
RD or write WR signal is activated then the information will be written into the
required data latch or read from the required data latch.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-19
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 270 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 271 of 345
Vpol A Z1
IAZph + INZn
Inh A
Vpol B Z1
Z1 A Directional Inh
Z1 B Directional Inh
Z1 C Directional Inh
Z1 AB Directional Inh
Z1 BC Directional Inh
Z1 CA Directional Inh
IBZph + INZn
Inh B
Vpol C Z1
ICZph + INZn
Inh C
Vpol AB Z1
A
IABZph
Vpol BC Z1
A
IBCZph
Vpol CA Z1
A
ICAZph
Watchdog
CK
Vmem-in
Synchronous Polarising
Vmem-run Control
Figure 6-20
Vmem A
Vmem B
Vmem C
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 272 of 345
6.10
6.10.1
Introduction
Operation
Zone reach settings
The forward Zone 3 reach is obtained by attenuating the voltage vectors with the 12
bit DACs (digital to analogue conversion) and buffering to provide the required zone
reach multiplication. These attenuated sinewave voltage signals are then mixed with
the IZ base setting vectors from the analogue bus, squared up and level shifted to
generate the (V-IZ) vectors.
The reverse Zone 3 reach is similarly obtained, the fractional settings being obtained
by an amplifier on the voltage signals. The (V+IZ) vectors are obtained by mixing the
voltage signals with the IZ vectors, squaring and level shifting. The (V+IZ) and (V-IZ)
signals form the `A` inputs to the main comparator processor and inhibit processor
respectively.
For underground cable protection the phase and ground reaches are halved. This is
accomplished by altering the mix ratio of the voltage vector with the IZ base setting
vector, to effectively double the voltage vector and hence halve the reach.
The Power Swing Blocking zone (Zone 6) operates only on the A-B phase-phase
element. The forward and reverse reaches are set in a similar manner to the Zone 3,
but using the AB phase-phase voltage and IZ quantities to obtain the Zone 6 (VIZ)AB and (V+IZ)AB vectors. Zone 6 has the same range of forward and reverse
reach settings as Zone 3.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 273 of 345
Polarising circuits
The polarising signals required to produce the offset lenticular are described as
follows. The (V-IZ) and (V+IZ) vectors are phase shifted by the appropriate angles
using digital shift registers. Digital multiplexers are then used to select the
appropriate signals for the a/b aspect ratio selected. The resulting vectors (V-IZ)/-o
and (V+IZ)/-o form the `B` inputs to the main comparator and inhibit comparator.
The partially cross polarised vectors to produce the reverse Zone 3 shaped mho are
obtained from the Zone 1 / Zone 2 board ZJ0130, and when selected form the `B`
input to the main comparator.
Comparators
The main comparator treats the input square waves `A` and `B` as logic variables
which can each have a high or low logic state at any time, (see section 4.1). Basically
if `A` lags `B` and no inhibits are present the comparator will issue a trip (logic
high) to the appropriate output data latch.
The inhibit for the reverse shaped mho is the external pole dead signal.
The lenticular characteristic is produced by the intersection of two circles generated
by the main and inhibit comparators. The inhibit characteristic together with the pole
dead inputs now form the inhibit signal to the main comparator.
The main comparators for Zone 3 phase-phase and phase-ground, and Zone 6
phase-phase faults are implemented in a 80C51 microcontroller. The inhibit
comparator is implemented in a 80C51 microcontroller. The main comparator clock
is 10MHz for a 50Hz power system frequency and 12MHz for 60Hz, the clock for the
digital phase shift registers is divided down from this to give the required phase shifts
appropriate to the nominal frequency. The inhibit comparator clock is 12MHz.
External controls
External controls from the main processor board are written to the input data latch,
these include;
1.
2.
3.
4.
Monitoring
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 274 of 345
All comparators and aspect shift registers are monitored by watch-dog circuits so
that in the event of failure an alarm will be read from the appropriate output data
latch by the main processor board. The technique used will only allow a trip from the
output data latch if it is followed by a successful bus check (see Section 6.1). A
watch-dog failure may indicate a failure of the microcontrollers, clock circuitry,
address decoding logic or output latch.
Data transfer
Digital inputs to and outputs from the board are controlled by address decoding
logic and data latches. When the appropriate address is placed on the address bus
and the read RD or write WR signal is activated then the information will be written
into the required data latch, or read from the required data latch.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-21
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 275 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 276 of 345
=1
=1
A
B
Inh A
(V-IZ)B Z3
(V+IZ`)B Z3
(V+IZ`)C Z3
(V+IZ`)AB Z6
(V-IZ)AB Z3
(V+IZ`)AB Z3
(V-IZ)BC Z3
(V+IZ`)BC Z3
(V-IZ)CA Z3
(V+IZ`)CA Z3
&
Z3 B Inh
&
Z3 C Inh
&
Z6 AB Inh
&
Z3 AB Inh
&
Z3 BC Inh
Z3 CA Inh
A
B
Inh C
(V-IZ)AB Z6
A
B
A
B
A
B
&
D
CK
Figure 6-22
Z3 A Inh
Inh B
(V-IZ)C Z3
&
Q
C
Watchdog
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 277 of 345
6.11
6.11.1
Introduction
(ZJ0132)
Operation
Producing the quadrilateral characteristics
Zone 1 characteristic
The main comparator of Zone 1 produces the top or "reactance" line of the
quadrilateral from:
`A` input = ( V-IZ )
`B` input = INR
The polarising vector INR is obtained by summing the three calibrated -IAR, -IBR,
-ICR signals provided from the input module (see Section 6.7). The top line moves
with active power-flow to avoid the overreach or underreach problems associated
with phase-current-polarised reactance characteristics.
The other three sides of the Zone 1 quadrilateral are formed by two inhibit
comparators arranged to inhibit the main comparator. The main comparator can
only count up when the two inhibit comparators agree that the impedance is within
the operating zone. The signals used are as follows:
"Directional" line
`A` = Vpol
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 278 of 345
`B` = IZ
Right-hand "resistance" line
`A` = IZ
`B` = V-IR
Left-hand "resistance" line
`A` = V+IR
`B` = IZ
Throughout, V is the faulty phase voltage, the voltage vectors from the analogue bus
are attenuated by the 12 bit Digital to Analogue converters, and buffered to provide
the required Right-hand and Left-hand resistive reach.
Vpol is the ground fault cross polarising vector inputted from the ZJ0130 board and
IZ is the residually compensated vector (IPHZPH+INZn) provided from the input
module (see Section 6.7).
The IR signal for the resistance lines is derived from the phase current only, the
absence of residual compensation permitting good phase selection for
single-pole-tripping purposes.
Zone 1 Guard Zone
The three Zone 1 ground fault comparators each have a corresponding "guard" zone
(see Section 4.2.6), whose characteristic shape comprises the same side and
directional lines as Zone 1, the signals used are as follows:`A` = Z1 guard zone (V-IZ)
`B` = IZ-10
The top line of the "guard" zone has ten times the reach of Zone 1. The Zone 1
Guard zone (V-IZ) vectors are set and inputted from the ZJ0130 board, also due to
the different polarisation (IPhR+INR), under two-phase-to-ground fault conditions the
reactance lines of the Zone 1 and corresponding "guard" zone tilt with respect to
each other. This action is used to prevent operation of the ground fault comparators
for two-phase-to-ground faults
(see Section 4.2.6).
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 279 of 345
Zone 2 Characteristic
The main comparator of Zone 2 produces the top or "reactance" line of the
quadrilateral from the following vectors:`A` input = ( V-IZ ) ground fault vectors inputted from the ZJ0130
board
`B` input = IPhR+INR
To avoid having to provide guard zones for Zone 2 and 3, the polarising signal
(IPhR+INR) for these two zones provides a compromise between single phase and
two-phase to ground fault requirements.
The other three sides of the Zone 2 quadrilateral are formed in a similar manner to
Zone 1.
Zone 3 Characteristic
Zone 3 Forward and reverse offset
The forward and reverse offset quadrilateral characteristics of Zone 3 are produced
in a similar way to that of Zones 1 and Zone 2. The main comparator producing the
forward top or "reactance" line from:`A` input = ( V-IZ )
`B` input = IPhR+INR
and the reverse offset "reactance" line from:`A` input = IPhR+INR
`B` input = ( V+IZ )
The other three sides of the Zone 3 forward and reverse offset are formed in a
similar manner to Zone 1 acting as the inhibit to the main comparator.
Zone 3 Reverse
The quadrilateral Zone 3 reverse is selected from the menu and will then only
monitor the Zone 3 reverse quad, output from the main comparator.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 280 of 345
Comparators
The main comparators treat the input square waves `A` and `B` as logic variables
which can each have a high or low logic state at any time (see Section 4.1). Basically
if signal `A` lags `B` and no sideline/directional inhibit is present then the
comparator will issue a trip ( high logic ) to the appropriate output data latch.
The main comparators for Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are implemented in 80C51
micro controllers which have inhibit inputs that are composite signals from the
directional and sideline vectors, which when active force it to restrain. The inhibit
comparators are also implemented in 80C51 micro controllers. The main
comparator clocks are 10MHz for 50Hz power system frequency and 12MHz for
60Hz. The inhibit comparator clock is 12MHz.
External Controls
External controls from the main processor board are written to the input data latch,
these include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Monitoring
The main and inhibit comparators are monitored by watchdog circuits. In the event
of failure an alarm will be read from the appropriate output data latch by the main
processor board. The technique used will only allow a trip from the output data latch
if it is followed by a successful bus check. A watch-dog failure may indicate a failure
of the micro controllers, clock circuitry, address decoding logic or output latch.
Data transfer
Digital inputs to and outputs from the board are controlled by address decoding
logic and data latches. When the appropriate address is placed on the address bus
and the read RD or write WR signal is activated then the required information will be
written into, or read from, the required data latch.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-23
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 281 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 282 of 345
Vpol A
IAZph+INZn
Directional A
Vpol B
IBZph+INZn
Directional B
Vpol C
ICZph+INZn
Directional C
&
Side A (fwd)
Side A (rev)
&
Fwd / Rev
&
Side B (fwd)
Side B (rev)
&
Side C (fwd)
Side C (rev)
(V-IZ) B GZ1
IBR+INR
(V-IZ) C GZ1
ICR+INR
&
&
&
=1
B
A
B
A
Z2C Inh
&
IAR+INR
Z2B Inh
&
(V-IZ) A GZ1
Z2A Inh
B
D
CK
Figure 6-24
Q
C
Watchdog
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 283 of 345
Inh A
(V+IR)A
IAZph+INZn
A
B
A
(V-IR)A
Side A (rev)
Side A (fwd)
Side B (rev)
Side B (fwd)
Side C (rev)
Side C (fwd)
Directional A
Inh B
(V+IR)B
IBZph+INZn
A
B
A
(V-IR)B
Directional B
Inh C
(V+IR)C
ICZph+INZn
A
B
A
(V-IR)C
Directional C
D
CK
Figure 6-25
Q
C
Sidelines & pole dead inhibits forward & reverse inhibits ZJ0132
Watchdog
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 284 of 345
6.12
6.12.1
Introduction
The Directional Earth Fault (DEF) feature, (optional on LFZP111, 112 and 114) is
used to cover high resistance ground faults. See Section 4.4 for a description. The
board contains circuits to produce the signals for the four types of polarising
required, the comparators for forward and reverse looking directional elements, an
overcurrent unit and a mag-inrush circuit. A block diagram of the board is shown in
Figure 6-26.
The main microcontroller communicates with the PCB via the address and data bus.
It reads the status of the comparators, controls the settings for the DEF, the switched
filters etc. and sends resets when required.
6.12.2
Comparators
The principle of operation of the comparator is described in Section 4.1. The
directional elements employ two sequence comparators, one forward looking, the
other reverse looking, both contained in an 80C51 microcontroller. The A and B
input signals are swapped over for the reverse looking element. The directional
element inhibit is controlled by the main microcontroller. The comparator has a
watch dog circuit to monitor it as described in Section 6.1.5.
6.12.3
POLARISING
ZERO SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE
ZERO SEQUENCE
CURRENT
ZERO SEQ. VOLTAGE &
CURRENT
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE
A INPUT
B INPUT
3VO /-THETA G
3IO /-90
IP
3IO /-90
3IO /-90
3V2B /-THETA G
3I2B /-90
The appropriate signals are connected to the comparator via analogue solid state
switches controlled by the main microcontroller.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 285 of 345
The zero sequence voltage (3V0) is derived internally by summing the three phase neutral voltages VA, VB and VC. The resulting signal is phase lagged by the DEF
characteristic angle THETA G and converted to a square wave (3VO /-THETA G) to
produce one input to the comparator.
The signal 3I0 /-90 is derived from INX. This signal is filtered by a second order
bandpass filter with centre frequencies equal to the nominal supply frequency and Q
values of 0.5. This filter reduces the harmonic and travelling wave distortion in the
current signals. The unfiltered signal is normally used being switched to the filtered
signal under the control of the main microcontroller (see Section 5.16). The signal,
3I0, is converted to a square wave suitable for the comparator input.
The signal IPX derived from a current transactor is filtered by a second order
bandpass filter with centre frequencies equal to the nominal supply frequency and Q
values of 0.5. This filter reduces the harmonic and travelling wave distortion in the
current signals. The signal is then phase lagged 90 and converted to a square wave
to produce an appropriate signal (IP) for the comparator.
Zero sequence voltage and current polarising is obtained by mixing the signals 3VO
/-THETA G and IP. The ratio is chosen such that the resultant signal level caused by
rated 3V0 is the same as that caused by rated IP. The factor k in Table 6-5 = 16.
Negative sequence polarising requires negative sequence voltage for the polarising
quantity and negative sequence current for the operate quantity.
The negative sequence voltage signal is produced from signals VA, VB and VC
according to the following formula:
3V2B = -(VAB + VCA /60)
The resulting signal is phase lagged by the DEF characteristic angle THETA G and
converted to a square wave (3V2B /-THETA G) to produce one input to the
comparator.
The negative sequence current signal is produced from signals -IAX, -IBX and -ICX
according to the following formula:
3I2B = -(IAB + ICA /60)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 286 of 345
The resulting signal is filtered by a second order bandpass filter with centre
frequencies equal to the nominal supply frequency and Q values of 0.5. This filter
reduce the harmonic and travelling wave distortion in the current signals. The
unfiltered signal is normally used being switched to the filtered signal under the
control of the main microcontroller (see Section 5.16). The signal, 3I2B, is converted
to a square wave suitable for the comparator input.
Negative sequence voltage and currents are derived using filters to mix and phase
shift the input signals. Most filters are prone to unacceptable errors as the frequency
drifts away from the nominal thus limiting the sensitivity. These errors are caused
because the filter produces a fixed time shift (CR time constant) rather than a fixed
phase shift, in this case +60, as the input frequency varies. These errors are
overcome by a filter which has 8 selectable centre frequencies and which is
automatically adjusted to the appropriate one thus maintaining errors below the
required sensitivity level. See Figure 4-31. The adjustment is made by an 80C51
microcontroller measuring the system frequency and controlling the filter. The
microcontroller has a watch-dog circuit to monitor it as described in Section 6.1.5.
6.12.4
6.12.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-26
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 287 of 345
DEF ZJ0139
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 288 of 345
6.13
6.13.1
Introduction
The Optimho distance relay fault locator is optional on relay types LFZP111, 112,
113 (but see section 4.5.1) and 114. The fault locator module consists of a printed
circuit board ZJ0165 and an attached electromagnetic screen. The board plugs into
the bus system of the relay. Data is exchanged between the main microcontroller in
the relay and the locator, and the locator also measures line voltages and currents
digitally. The outputs to the main microcontroller include accurate fault location
measurements.
The fault locator board for the Optimho Distance Relay makes use of the 80C186
16 bit microprocessor. The following features are incorporated on the board:a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
80C186 Processor
8k or 32k 16 bit Non Volatile Memory
32k,64k or 128k 16 bit Read Only Memory
32k or 128k 16 bit Random Access Memory
8 Channel 12 Bit Data Acquisition System
Watch-dog Timer
8 bit Parallel Communication to Protection
Mode Link Connections
Test Serial I/O Port
Test 8 Bit Parallel Output Port
80C186 Processor
The 80C186 processor is a 16 bit device constructed in CMOS. A high level of
integration is incorporated in the IC so many functions are resident on-chip,
reducing the chip count for such a versatile processing unit. Many of the on-chip
functions including the timers, interrupts and memory management unit have been
used to produce a minimal hardware board which requires minimal system software.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.13.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 289 of 345
Memory
The memory is arranged in three blocks; static, read only and non-volatile. Since the
80C186 has programmable memory select outputs, three of these are used solely to
decode the addresses. The start address and size of these three blocks are set by
writing to memory locations in the 80C186 control block.
The following memory sizes are used on the fault locator:
6.13.4
Memory Type
Size
Static RAM
Erasable
Programmable ROM
Electrically
Erasable PROM
32k words
32 k words
8 k words
6.13.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 290 of 345
In order to free the 80C186 processor from as much control of the sampling system
as possible, a circuit which handles the sampling of several channels automatically
has been designed. The system is started by a single pulse from a timer pin on the
80C186. Successive channels are fed through the multiplexer, sampled and
converted. The 80C186 is interrupted after each conversion and reads the value. The
timer pins on the 80C186 can be configured to pulse at a defined frequency
indefinitely, also interrupting the processor to inform it of the beginning of a sample
set.
Input filters
The input filters are two stage single pole types with a voltage 3db point at 320Hz.
An operational amplifier is used as a buffer between the two stages.
Multiplexer
An 8 channel multiplexer is provided and this device has a low channel resistance.
The output of this is fed into the high input impedance of the sample/hold circuit.
Thus each of the inputs are passed in turn to the A/D converter via the sample/hold
circuit for conversion to a digital level.
Sample/hold
The sample/hold circuit is a precision device which holds the instantaneous input
level for the duration of time which the following A/D converter requires to perform
its function.
Analogue to digital converter
The A/D converter which converts an input analogue signal to 12 bits of digital data
in less than 25s. The device is configured to output data to a 16 bit bus. Tri-state
buffers are used between the converter and the 80C186 data bus. The top bit of the
ADC output is inverted and fed to each of the top four bits of the 80C186 bus. This
converts the output into a 16 bit signed integer which is presented onto the data bus
when the device is read as a peripheral.
Control circuit
The control circuit sends signals to the multiplexer, sample/hold, A/D converter and
80C186, making the software processing overhead on the 80C186 minimal. The
system's major component is a decade counter. Successive pins on the counter
become active as it is clocked, and some of these pins control the sequence and
timing of the data acquisition components. Once every pin has pulsed, one channel
has been selected, sampled and converted. This counter is clocked from the output
of a programmable divider which is factory set to suit the system clock frequency.
6.13.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 291 of 345
The reset circuit ensures that the reset pin on the 80C186 is held low for a period of
approximately 11ms after power is applied.
This ensures that the microprocessor does not attempt to execute its program until
the power supply rails on the board are fully established.
Watch-dog
The watch-dog circuit is formed by a dual monostable circuit. Once the first
monostable is triggered by accessing it as a peripheral its output goes high for
84ms. The output will continue to stay high if the monostable is re-triggered before
84ms has expired. If, however, the monostable is not re-triggered, the output will go
low, causing the second monostable to trigger. The second monostable pulses the
reset pin low for 7ms. The relay fail line is pulled low when the watch-dog times out.
This line triggers the "Relay Inoperative Alarm".
6.13.7
6.13.8
Pins
1,4
2,5
3,6
Note:
6.13.9
Bit No
0
1
2
Link On (Bit = 0)
60 Hz
1A relay
Test Mode
No Link (Bit = 1)
50 Hz
5A relay
Locator Mode
The test mode is only used as a factory test feature and requires
specialised equipment.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 292 of 345
Serial fault locator output information is available however from the relay serial
output ports at the front and rear of the relay. These ports use the relays main
microcontroller to communicate with the fault locator.
6.13.10 Test eight bit parallel output port
An 8 bit output latch is provided on the board and this is used for factory test
purposes. The output pins of the latch are brought out onto a 10 way single in line
header.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-27
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 293 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.14
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 294 of 345
6.14.1
Mechanical arrangement
Three printed circuit boards (PCBs), each with eight auxiliary relays plus their
associated drive circuits, are used to provide a total of 24 auxiliary relay circuits.
Parts 001, 002 and 003 of a common PCB type ZJ0140 are used, these are
located in slot position numbers 3, 4 and 2 respectively.
In order to minimise the effects of external electrical interference the three output
PCBs are mounted within a screened area of the relay case, separate from the relay
measuring circuits, as shown in Figure 2-1.
A special connector, mounted on the output PCB, enables the PCB to plug directly
into the terminal block/s mounted at the back of the relay case. This arrangement
provides a compact design and eliminates hand wired connections with a
consequent improvement in reliability.
A standard 64 way ribbon cable connector mounted on the adjacent (input) side of
the output PCB facilitates connection to the relay circuitry via a 64 way ribbon cable
connected to the front panel board.
6.14.2
Each auxiliary output relay is driven from a simple two stage npn/pnp transistor
switching circuit. The drive circuits for all auxiliary relays are identical. For all except
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 295 of 345
the RIA circuit (version 002 only), a capacitor discharge assist is used on each drive
circuit to speed up the pick up time of the auxiliary relay. Since the nominal rating
of the auxiliary relay is approximately half (5V) the Vcc (12V) voltage applied to the
driving circuit, the auxiliary relay is initially energised, via the charged capacitor, at
approximately twice its nominal rating when the pnp transistor turns on. The
discharge from the capacitor provides additional amp turns which speeds up pick
up of the auxiliary relay. A resistor in series with the pnp transistor drops about 7V,
leaving 5V across the auxiliary relay.
Version ZJ0140 002
Refer to Figure 6-29 for block diagram illustration of the above output PCB.
This version is basically identical to versions 001 and 003 with some additional
circuitry to control the Relay Inoperative Alarm (RIA) RL1.
Operation of RL2 to RL7 is as described above for versions 001 and 003.
No capacitor assist is required for the RIA auxiliary relay since very fast operating
speed is not required, a 12V rated auxiliary relay is therefore used.
The Relay Inoperative Alarm contact is normally closed when the auxiliary relay is
de-energised.
Under normal working conditions, when the relay is available for protection
operation, the RIA auxiliary relay is energised and its output contact is open. The
RIA auxiliary relay also has a separate normally open contact which is connected to
operate the Relay Available LED on the front panel board.
Contact clear
This signal line is controlled by the main microcontroller. Its function is to prevent
operation of any output auxiliary relay (except Relay Inoperative Alarm on version
002) if certain error conditions are detected. Refer to Sections 6.1 and 6.2 for a
description of diagnostics and action taken. When pulled low, this control line
clears the latching circuit outputs and thereby turns OFF all (except RIA) auxiliary
relays.
During dc power up, a capacitor/resistor circuit holds the latching circuit clear line
low. This resets the outputs from the latching circuit and thus prevents operation of
any output auxiliary relay whilst power up initialisation is in progress.
Relay fail and time delay circuit (Version 002 only)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 296 of 345
The Relay Inoperative Alarm circuit on version 002 is controlled by the D0 output
from the latching circuit and also the RELAY FAIL line. This line, which is normally
held high when the relay is available for protection operation, is pulled low for
various conditions as described in Section 6.1.
A time delay circuit delays de-energisation of the Relay Inoperative Alarm auxiliary
relay by approximately 0.5s when the RELAY FAIL line is pulled low.
In the event of any transiently initiated watchdog reset signals issued locally to any
board other than the main microcontroller board, the RELAY FAIL line is pulled low.
If a local board reset is accomplished successfully within a 0.5s interval the RELAY
FAIL line is taken high again and the reset event is not annunciated by closure of
the Relay Inoperative Alarm contact.
Any persistent fault condition will be detected by the main microcontroller which will
de-energise the RIA circuit by setting the D0 data output of the latch circuit, this will
cause the RIA contact to close and will extinguish the Relay Available LED.
6.14.3
Noise suppression
To minimise the effects of external electrical interference and interference
generated when switching inductive loads, special consideration has been given to
screening and PCB layout. The layout of the PCB ground plane, earthing, power
rails and auxiliary relays are particularly important.
Ground plane and earthing
A 0V ground plane, extending below the 8 auxiliary relays, and connected to the
0V side of the auxiliary relay coil (OV(1), see Figures 6-28 & 6-29) is connected to
case earth via the extreme top and bottom terminals of the special PCB mounted
terminal strip.
Each output auxiliary relay has two contacts but only one contact is used (except the
RIA auxiliary relay which uses its other contact to operate the internal Relay
Available LED). The unused contact from each auxiliary relay is connected to the
0V(1) ground plane. All other remaining circuitry utilises 0V, which is connected to
the relay back plane via the 64 way ribbon cable. For a general description of
grounding arrangements refer to Section 2.0.
Power rails
A separate 12V (Relay) power rail is provided to supply the output auxiliary relays
only. Any noise induced onto this rail is shunted directly back to the relay power
supply unit.
Position of auxiliary relays
The output auxiliary relays are positioned as far away from the control and drive
circuits as is possible, this arrangement reduces the affects of radiated interference
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 297 of 345
6.14.5
6.14.6
Output option
A commission option menu test facility is available to allow operation of all output
contacts, refer to Section 3.5.5.
6.14.7
Monitor option
The status of all output contacts can be viewed using the monitor option test facility
in the commission tests section of the menu, refer to Section 3.5.4.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-28
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 298 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 6-29
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 299 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 300 of 345
ZJ 0140 002
ZJ 0140 001
32
31
RL1
RL2
35
RL3
36
RL3
63
RL3
29
30
57
37
38
65
RL4
RL4
RL4
39
40
67
41
42
69
RL5
RL5
RL5
43
44
71
45
46
73
RL6
RL6
RL6
47
48
75
49
50
77
RL7
RL7
RL7
51
52
79
53
54
81
RL8
RL8
RL8
56
55
SLOT 4
61
34
RL2
RL2
59
RL1
RL1
33
Figure 6-30
ZJ 0140 003
SLOT 3
83
SLOT 2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 301 of 345
Input ratings
AC voltage Vn:
AC current In:
Frequency fn:
50Hz or 60Hz.
Operative frequency
range:
DC supply Vx1:
Vx1
48/54V
110/125V
220/250V
Operative Range
37.5 to 60V
87.5 to 137.5V
175 to 275V
Maximum Withstand
64.8V
150V
300V
There is negligible change of accuracy with change of voltage within the operative
range.
DC supply Vx2:
7.2
AC current:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 302 of 345
Burdens
AC voltage circuits: 0.1VA per phase at Vn.
AC current circuits: 0.08VA per phase (In = 1A).
0.5VA per phase (In = 5A).
DC supply 1:
DC supply 2:
7.4
Distance elements
7.4.1
Settings
Impedance:
Range of positive sequence settings referred to line VT and CT secondaries:
Zone 1, Zone 1X, Zone 1Y, Zone 2 and Zone 3 reach:
In = 1A range is
In = 5A range is
Zone 3 reverse:
In = 1A range is
In = 5A range is
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 303 of 345
Attenuation factors KZ1, KZ1X, KZ1Y, KZ2, KZ3 and KZ3' operate on voltage
signals and are specific to Zone 1, Zone 1X, Zone 1Y, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 3
reverse respectively. The positive sequence reach for Zone 1 is given by:Zone 1
= KZ1.KZPh.5/In
= KZ1.KZPh.5/2.In
Either KZPh or KZ1 is set to unity. To obtain the formula for other zones employed,
replace KZ1 by the appropriate attenuation factor for the zone.
Extra settings for ground fault distance:
KZN
ZLO ZL1
=
KZPh
3ZL1
Where ZL0 and ZL1 are the vector values of zero and positive sequence impedance
of the protected line.
Quadrilateral resistive reach settings:
Setting ranges:
SETTING
KZPh
KZN
KZ1
KZ1X
MINIMUM
0.04
0.0
1.00
1.00
MAXIMUM
1.0
1.360
49.98
49.98
STEP
0.001
0.001
0.02
0.02
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 304 of 345
KZ1Y
KZ2
KZ3
KZ3'
KR
Z3 Lenticular a/b
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.2
1
49.98
49.98
49.98
49.9
30
1.00, 0.67, 0.41
Characteristic angle:
THETA Ph =
Residual compensation
angle:
THETA N =
Note:
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.1
1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 305 of 345
Setting ranges:
SETTING
THETA Ph
THETA N
THETA Ph
THETA N
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
STEP
50
85
5
50
85
5
45
80
5
-45, -35, -25, to 80 in steps of 5
*
*
**
**
7.4.3
Characteristic angle:
2.
Resetting ratio:
105%.
Current sensitivity
Determined by the low set current level detectors. The sensitivity varies inversely with
the base setting (KZPh) and is given by:
0.05 * In / KZPhA.
7.4.4
Timers
Timer ranges:
SETTING
TZ1X
TZY1
TZ2
TZ3
TP
TD
TDW
TPG
TDG
Timer accuracy:
MINIMUM
100ms
100ms
100ms
100ms
0ms
0ms
0ms
0ms
0ms
1% of setting and 3ms
MAXIMUM
9980ms
9980ms
9980ms
9980ms
98ms
98ms
98ms
98ms
98ms
STEP
20ms
20ms
20ms
20ms
2ms
2ms
2ms
2ms
2ms
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.4.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 306 of 345
Polarising
Proportion and type of cross polarising for Zones 1 and 2 for partially cross
polarised mho and for Zones 1 and 2 directional lines.
Phase to Ground fault:
Phase to Phase to Ground fault:
Phase to Phase fault:
)
) 16% square wave from healthy
) phases
3 Phase fault:
Synchronous memory is effective for 16 cycles after fault incidence and is available
12.5 cycles after energising the line.
7.4.6
Reset times:
Quad characteristic
The trip contacts are sealed in for 60ms following the initial
contact closure. Thereafter, the maximum reset time is 35ms.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 307 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 308 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 309 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 310 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Figure 7-8
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 311 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Figure 7-10
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 312 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 313 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 314 of 345
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Operating Time(ms)
min
max
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 315 of 345
b)
c)
0.05 * In / KZPh
The operating time for close up 3 Phase faults and close up Phase to Ground faults
were measured for each of the modes of SOTF operation and for Line VTs and Bus
Bar VTs.
SOTF times (50Hz relays)
Fault
Type
Source
Impedance
angle 88
3P/F
G/F
mho
G/F
quad
108
36
3
108
36
3
108
36
3
Any comparator
Line VTs
min
29
29
29
29
28
30
30
30
29
max
35
34
35
37
37
37
37
38
37
By Level detectors
max
24
23
22
27
25
27
29
26
23
min
32
31
30
32
31
31
32
31
31
max
37
36
35
39
39
38
39
39
38
min
25
22
24
27
27
25
27
27
25
max
32
32
32
43
33
34
43
33
34
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.6
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 316 of 345
7.7
15%
SETTING
KZ6
KZ6'
TZ6
Z6 Lenticular a/b
MINIMUM
1.00
0.2
20ms
MAXIMUM
49.98
49.9
90ms
1.00, 0.67 & 0.41
STEP
0.02
0.1
5ms
The PSB feature may be enabled or disabled, and can be set to surround either
Zone 3 or Zone 2. The later option is used if Zone 3 is set reverse looking. When
enabled the PSB feature can be set to give alarms only or to block individually
selected zones. Blocking disabled if a ground fault occurs or (if DEF fitted) a phase
fault occurs during a power swing.
7.8
Block auto-reclose
Auto-reclose is blocked after SOTF trips and Zone 3 time delayed trips.
Auto-reclose may be enabled or blocked on:
Zone 1 or aided trip caused by 2 or 3 phase fault
Zone 1 or aided trip caused by 3 phase fault
Zone 1X time delayed trip
Zone 1Y time delayed trip
Zone 2 time delayed trip
Channel out of service
DEF aided trip
DEF time delay trip
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.9
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 317 of 345
IF
X/R
RB
RCT
RL
Where:
The calculation is done for ground faults and phase faults and the highest knee
point voltage calculation is used.
Burdens:
The resistance of the relay current transactors measured at twice rated current are
given below. They do not include the DEF polarising CT.
Fault type
3P/F
G/F
7.10
In = 1A
In = 5A
0.073 to 0.079
0.146 to 0.152
0.012 to 0.02
0.024 to 0.04
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 318 of 345
Setting ranges:
SETTING
Lowset 3Io
THETA G
Highset 3Io
DEF MUTL*t
DEF Base setting Is
MINIMUM
0.05In
10
0.05In
0.025
0.05In
MAXIMUM
0.8In
80
0.8In
1.000
1.2In
Polarising:
Sensitivity:
Polarising quantity:
Operating quantity:
1V Residual Voltage or
1.5% Polarising Current as appropriate.
3I0 & 3I2 (if appropriate) set via menu.
Overcurrent curves:
IEC:
CURVE 1
CURVE 2
CURVE 3
CURVE 4
(Standard Inverse)
(Very Inverse)
(Extremely Inverse)
(Longtime Stand-By Earth Fault)
American:
CURVE 5
CURVE 6
CURVE 7
CURVE 8
Definite time:
2 SECOND
4 SECOND
8 SECOND
STEP
0.05In
10
0.05In
0.025
0.05In
+10% to 0%
definite time 3% over 2Is to 31Is.
curves 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 & 8 5% over 2Is to 31Is.
curve 3 7.5% over 2Is to 20Is.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 319 of 345
100
50
10
curve 4
curve 1
Operating
time (s)
0.5
curve 2
curve 3
0.1
1
10
Figure 7-17
50
100
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 320 of 345
100
50
10
Operating
time (s)
curve 5
curve 6
curve 7
0.5
curve 8
0.1
1
10
Figure 7-18
50
100
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.11
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 321 of 345
The positive sequence reach for the fault locator is given by:
Zone F = KZF.KZPh.5/In (for overhead line models)
Zone F = KZF.KZPh.5/2In (cable models)
KZPh and residual compensation are common to distance measuring elements.
KZM and THETA M are provided for mutual compensating the fault locator if
required.
Setting ranges:
SETTING
KZF
KZM
THETA M
Line units
Line Length
CT Ratio
VT Ratio
Accuracy:
MINIMUM
1.00
0.0
50
MAXIMUM
STEP
40.00
0.01
1.360
0.001
85
5
miles or km or 100%
0 to 99.99 in steps of 0.01 plus
100 to 999.9 in steps of 0.1
1 : 1 and 10 : 1 to 5000 : 1 in steps of 10 : 1
1 : 1 and 10 : 1 to 9990 : 1 in steps of 10 : 1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.12
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 322 of 345
Output contacts
Ratings:
Make and carry 0.2s
Carry continuously
Break
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 7-19
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 323 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 7-20
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 324 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Figure 7-21
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 325 of 345
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.13
Dimensions
Weight:
Overall size:
7.14
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 326 of 345
15kg
see Figures 7-19, 7-20 & 7-21
Serial communications.
Active port:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
No OF DATA BITS
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
Modem control lines:
7.15
PARITY
NONE
EVEN
ODD
NONE
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
NONE
Atmospheric environment
Temperature
IEC 255-6:1988
IEC 68-2-1:1990
IEC 68-2-2:1974
Cold
Dry heat
Humidity
IEC 68-2-3:1969
BS2011 part 2.1 Ca
Enclosure protection
IEC 529: 1989
BS 5490
7.16
No OF STOP BITS
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
Mechanical environment
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
Vibration
IEC 255-21-1:1988
BS 142: 1982 section 2.2
Category S2
7.17
7.19
Response Class 1
Durability
Loaded contact
Unloaded contact
7.18
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 327 of 345
Electrical environment
High frequency disturbance
IEC 255-22-1:1988 Class III
BS 142:1982 section 1.4
ANSI C37.90.1:1989
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 255-22-2: 1989 Class III
Electromagnetic interference
IEC 255-22-3 Class III
Draft ANSI C37.90.2
25MHz-1GHz 10V/m
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 328 of 345
8.2
Ac voltage:
15
16
17
18
8.3
Va
Vb
Vc
Vn
Ac current:
19-20
21-22
23-24
25-26
27-28
8.4
+DC
-DC
Ia
Ib
Ic
In
Ip or Im. This input can be used for zero sequence polarising the DEF or
for mutual compensating the fault locator.
Optical isolators:
+ve
58
62
66
70
74
78
82
-ve
60
64
68
72
76
80
84
FUNCTION
Reset Zone 1 Extension / Loss of Guard
Single Pole Open
Breaker Open
Channel Out of Service
CRX
Relay Blocked
Reset Indications
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.4.1
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 329 of 345
Breaker open
Circuit breaker contacts connected in series to indicate all poles open. Required
with busbar VTs or if the Weak infeed or echo feature of POR schemes are
required.
8.4.2
Relay blocked
Closed contact from miniature circuit breaker required when no VT fuses are used.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 330 of 345
NOTES
1) CT CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN
ARE TYPICAL ONLY
15
Va
2) a)
16
Vb
c)
b)
VT
SECONDARIES
DIRECTION OF POWER
FLOW FOR OPERATION
17
S2
29
31
33
35
C-4
37
39
C-5
41
43
C-6
45
47
C-7
49
51
C-8
53
55
C-9
C - 10
C - 11
30
32
34
36
C - 12
38
40
C - 13
42
44
C - 14
46
48
C - 15
50
52
C - 16
54
56
C - 17
C - 18
C - 19
57
59
61
63
C - 20
65
67
C - 21
69
71
C - 22
73
75
C - 23
77
79
C - 24
81
83
Vc
P1
P2
C-1
C-2
C-3
S1
18
Vn
19
Ia
20
21
A
Ib
22
B
23
PHASE
ROTATION
Ic
24
25
In
P2
26
P1
S2
27
S1
Ip
28
58
60
62
64
66
BREAKER OPEN
68
70
Vx2
CHANNEL OUT OF
SERVICE
72
74
CRX
76
78
RELAY BLOCKED
RESET INDICATIONS
80
82
4
5
84
6
7
13
Vx1
14
10
CASE EARTH
OPTIMHO
20
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
0V
+12V
-12V
DTR
REAR SERIAL
COMMUNICATION PORT
Figure 8-1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 331 of 345
NOTES
1) CT CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN
ARE TYPICAL ONLY
2)
15
Va
a)
b)
16
Vb
VT
SECONDARIES
DIRECTION OF POWER
FLOW FOR OPERATION
17
S2
29
31
33
35
C-4
37
39
C-5
41
43
C-6
45
47
C-7
49
51
C-8
53
55
C-9
C - 10
C - 11
30
32
34
36
C - 12
38
40
C - 13
42
44
C - 14
46
48
C - 15
50
52
C - 16
54
56
C - 17
C - 18
C - 19
57
59
61
63
C - 20
65
67
C - 21
69
71
C - 22
73
75
C - 23
77
79
C - 24
81
83
Vc
P1
P2
C-1
C-2
C-3
S1
18
Vn
19
Ia
PHASE
ROTATION
20
21
Ib
22
DIRECTION OF POWER
FLOW FOR OPERATION
23
Ic
P1
P2
S1
S2
24
25
In
PARALLEL
LINE
PROTECTION
26
27
Im
28
RESET ZONE 1
EXTENSION /
LOSS OF GUARD
SINGLE POLE OPEN
58
60
62
64
66
BREAKER OPEN
68
70
Vx2
CHANNEL OUT OF
SERVICE
72
74
CRX
76
78
RELAY BLOCKED
RESET INDICATIONS
80
82
4
5
84
6
7
13
Vx1
14
10
CASE EARTH
OPTIMHO
20
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
0V
+12V
-12V
DTR
REAR SERIAL
COMMUNICATION PORT
Figure 8-2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.4.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 332 of 345
The optical isolator must be energised during single pole dead times.
8.4.4
Unblocking schemes
For the unblocking schemes CRX is used for the unblock frequency (trip frequency)
and Reset Zone 1 Extension for the block frequency (guard frequency).
8.5
(Figure 3-7)
PIN NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
20
FUNCTION
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
0V
+12V
-12V
DTR
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 333 of 345
Output connections
The output relay connections are dependent on the relay version and are listed on
the next pages together with a list of abbreviations used.
The following conditions will cause the relay inoperative alarm contact RIA to
close:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Loss of dc supply.
Operation of voltage transformer supervision if this feature is set to
block tripping.
Failure detected by relay monitoring system.
Operation of Relay Blocked optical isolator.
Test mode selected.
Block contacts option selected.
When 3 phase tripping is selected TRIP A, TRIP B, TRIP C and ANY TRIP respond as
TRIP 3PH.
8.6.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
CONTACT
REFERENCE
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 334 of 345
10 LFZP 111 05
18 LFZP 146
18 LFZP 145
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
Z2 INST ph
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z3 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )+Z2 ( T )
Z1X ( T )
START A
START B
START C
START G
Z3.NOT Z2
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
PSB
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z3 ( T )
ANY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
SIGNAL STOP
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
PSB
04
RIA
VTS
ANY TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 (T)
Z3 (T)
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
Z2 INST
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
05
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
SIGNAL SEND
SIGNAL STOP
TIME DELAY
ANY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
START
BAR
BAR
TRIP PH
TRIP G
Z1 G TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TIME DELAY
TIME DELAY
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.2
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 335 of 345
10 LFZP 111 06
18 LFZP 147
18 LFZP 143
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
9-31
C-2
9-33
C-3
9-35
C-4
7-39
C-5
1-43
C-6
5-47
C-7
9-51
C-8
3-55
C-9
0-32
C-10
0-34
C-11
0-36
C-12
8-40
C-13
2-44
C-14
6-48
C-15
0-52
C-16
4-56
C-17
7-59
C-18
7-61
C-19
7-63
C-20
5-67
C-21
9-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
DEF FWD
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z3 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )+Z2 ( T )
Z1X ( T )
DEF FWD
DEF ( T )
Z2 INST ph
DEF REV
Z3.NOT Z2
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
PSB
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z3 ( T )
DEF TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
SIGNAL STOP
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
PSB
04
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
TRIP C
DEF TRIP
Z2 INST/DEF F
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
05
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIPC
SIGNAL SEND
SIGNAL STOP
TIME DELAY
DEF TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
START
BAR
BAR
TRIP PH
TRIP G
Z1 G TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TIME DELAY
TIME DELAY
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.3
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 336 of 345
10 LFZP 112 03
18 LFZP 165
18 LFZP 163
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
Z2 INST ph
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z3 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )+Z2 ( T )
Z1X ( T )
START A
START B
START C
START G
Z3.NOT Z2
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
PSB
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z3 ( T )
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
SIGNAL STOP
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
PSB
04
RIA
VTS
ANY TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
Z2 INST
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.4
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 337 of 345
10 LFZP 112 04
18 LFZP 166
18 LFZP 164
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
DEF FWD
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z3 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )+Z2 ( T )
Z1X ( T )
DEF FWD
DEF ( T )
Z2 INST ph
DEF REV
Z3.NOT Z2
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
PSB
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z3 ( T )
DEF TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
SIGNAL STOP
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
PSB
04
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
TRIP C
DEF TRIP
Z2 INST/DEF F
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.5
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 338 of 345
10 LFZP 113 01
18 LFZP 174
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
Z2 INST ph
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z3 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )+Z2 ( T )
Z1X ( T )
START A
START B
START C
START G
Z3.NOT Z2
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
PSB
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z3 ( T )
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
SIGNAL STOP
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
PSB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.6
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 339 of 345
10 LFZP 114 05
18 LFZP 181
18 LFZP 177
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
Z2 INST ph
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z2 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )
Z1X ( T )
START A
START B
START C
START G
Z2 INST
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
ANY TRIP
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z1X ( T )
ANY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
Z1Y ( T )
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
TRIP
04
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
TIME DELAY
ANY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
LDHS PHASES
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
BAR
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 340 of 345
06
RIA
VTS
ANY TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
Z2 INST
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.7
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 341 of 345
10 LFZP 114 06
18 LFZP 176
18 LFZP 183
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
02
RIA
SOTF
Z1 Ph
DEF FWD
BAR
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Z2 ( T )
Z1Y ( T )
Z1X ( T )
DEF FWD
DEF ( T )
Z2 INST ph
START
Z2 INST
Z1 A-G
Z1 B-G
Z1 C-G
Z2 INST A-G
Z2 INST B-G
Z2 INST C-G
ANY TRIP
VTS
03
RIA
VTS
TRIP 3PH
TRIP 3PH
Z1
Z2 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
Z1X ( T )
DEF TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
Z1Y ( T )
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
TRIP
04
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP B
SIGNAL SEND
SOTF
TIME DELAY
DEF TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
LDHS PHASES
BAR
START
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
ANY TRIP
BAR
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 342 of 345
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
06
RIA
VTS
DIST TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
TRIP B
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
TRIP C
DEF TRIP
Z2 INST/DEF F
BAR
BAR
START A
START B
START C
START N
SIGNAL SEND
AIDED TRIP
SOTF
PSB
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.8
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 343 of 345
Reserved
This contact arrangement is common to all versions and is used during the GEC
ALSTHOM T&D production testing of all relays.
CONTACT
REFERENCE/
TERMINAL No
C-1
29-31
C-2
29-33
C-3
29-35
C-4
37-39
C-5
41-43
C-6
45-47
C-7
49-51
C-8
53-55
C-9
30-32
C-10
30-34
C-11
30-36
C-12
38-40
C-13
42-44
C-14
46-48
C-15
50-52
C-16
54-56
C-17
57-59
C-18
57-61
C-19
57-63
C-20
65-67
C-21
69-71
C-22
73-75
C-23
77-79
C-24
81-83
CONTACT
CONFIGURATION
RESERVED
RIA
VTS
BAR
ANY TRIP
START A
START B
START C
START G
SOTF
AIDED TRIP
Z1
Z2 ( T )
Z3 ( T )
SIGNAL SEND
PSB
DEF TRIP
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.6.9
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 344 of 345
Trip alarms
Z1
Z1X(T)
Z1Y(T)
Z2(T)
Z3(T)
SOTF
DIST TRIP
DIST AIDED
DEF AIDED
DEF (T)
TIME DELAY
DEF TRIP
ANY TRIP
AIDED TRIP
TRIP PH
TRIP G
Zone 1 trip
Zone 1X time delay trip
Zone 1Y time delay trip
Zone 2 time delay trip
Zone 3 time delay trip
Switch on to fault trip
Distance trip
Distance aided trip
DEF aided trip
DEF time delayed trip
Any time delayed trip
Any DEF trip
Any trip
Any aided trip
Trip for a phase fault
Trip for ground fault
Miscellaneous aarms
RIA
VTS
PSB
Starts
START
START A
START B
START C
START G
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chaper 2
Page 345 of 345
Miscellaneous
BAR
SIGNAL SEND
SIGNAL STOP
LDHS PHASES
Block auto-reclose
Initiate signal send
Stops signal send (Z2 INST or DEF FWD)
LDHSA or LDHSB or LDHSC
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 1 of 26
Default level
The top of the menu tree is designated the default level. when the operator interface is not in use
the liquid crystal display will always show an appropriate default page. the normal default or
root page will be as selected in the section of the menu.
'OPTIONS
'IDENTIFIERS
'
'
This will be either a blank page or a group identification string of up to 32 characters which has
been entered by the user (see Section 3.10) or the setting group number selected. Under certain
conditions, as indicated below, the root page may be replaced by one of the following default
pages which are listed in a hierarchical order, item a) having the highest precedence :
a)
'SERIAL COMMS
'LOGGED ON
'
'
b)
'Push SET to
'update changes
'OR
'Push SET to
'update group
'
'
'
'
'
c)
'Z1
'AN V~FAIL
'
'
d)
'PwrSwg TEST
'ENABLED
'
'
e)
'CONTACTS
'BLOCKED
'
'
f)
'ERROR# SLOT No 1
'5 6 7 8 9 10 11
'
'
g)
'ERROR# I~FAIL
'
h)
'Please set
'CALENDAR CLOCK
'
'
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 2 of 26
MENU TREE
ROOT OR
DEFAULT
DISPLAY
OPTIONS
ACTIVE SETTINGS
OPTIONS
PRINT
PRINT SETTINGS
PRINT FAULT RECORDS
OPTIONS
FAULT RECORDS
VIEW RECORDS
CLEAR RECORDS
OPTIONS
METERING
OPTIONS
IDENTIFIERS
SET GROUP IDENTIFIER
SOFTWARE VERSION
DEFAULT DISPLAY
OPTIONS
CALENDAR CLOCK
READ TIME & DATE
SET TIME & DATE
CLOCK REFERENCE
OPTIONS
COMMISSION TESTS
CONTACT CONTROL
ON LOAD DIR TEST
PwrSwg TEST
MONITOR OPTION
OUTPUT OPTION
OPTIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL CONTROL
OPTIONS
SETTINGS
CONTACT CONFIGURATION
SCHEME
DISTANCE
BLOCK AUTORECLOSE
VT SUPERVISION
START INDICATION
DEF
FAULT LOCATOR
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
!
OPTIONS
ACTIVE SETTINGS
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 3 of 26
ACTIVE SETTINGS
GROUP = 1
GROUP
SETTING TRAP
ACTIVE SETTINGS
GROUP = 1 "
8 SETTING GROUPS
ARE AVAILABLE
If no change made
If change made
Push SET to
update group
SET
settings group
updated
#
RESET
OPTIONS
settings group
change ignored
push ! to print
'printing in'
'printer not'
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 4 of 26
push ! to print
all settings
push ! to print
fault records
'progress'
or
Note
1)
'OPTION '
'PRINT '
display is stepped to from the root or default display when the ! key is pressed
provided the default display is not :'Please set
'
'CALENDAR CLOCK '
For this display the menu steps to:'OPTIONS
'
'CALENDAR CLOCK '
2)
'ready'
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
FAULT
RECORDS
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 5 of 26
FAULT RECORDS
push ! to view !
$
push ! to view
LAST FAULT
push ! to view
LAST FAULT -1
push ! to view
LAST FAULT -2
push ! to view
LAST FAULT -3
FAULT RECORDS
clear records
push SET to
clear records
is displayed.)
SET
all fault
records cleared
Note, if ACCESS LEVEL (COMMUNICATIONS section) is set to LIMITED, the display:'FAULT RECORDS'
'clear records
'
is not visible
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
METERING
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 6 of 26
Va= 63.50 KV
0.0 degrees
!
$
Vb= 63.50 KV
-120.0 degrees
Vc= 63.50 KV
120.0 degrees
Ia= 2.00 KA
- 20.0 degrees
Ib= 2.00 KA
-140.0 degrees
Ic= 2.00 KA
100.0 degrees
REAL POWER
= 358.0 MW
REACTIVE POWER
= 130.3 MVAR
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
IDENTIFIERS
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 7 of 26
IDENTIFIERS
GROUP !
$
GROUP IDENTIFIER
push ! to set
IDENTIFIERS
SOFTWARE VERSION
!
$
(Only if FAULT
LOCATOR fitted)
IDENTIFIERS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
SOFTWARE VERSION
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
18 LFZP xxx x
SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT LOCATOR
FAULT LOCATOR
18 LFZP xxx x
DEFAULT DISPLAY
Blank display
DEFAULT DISPLAY
Blank display "
DEFAULT DISPLAY
GROUP ID "
Note:
Group 1 GROUP
IDENTIFIER is used as
the logon password for
the serial communications
DEFAULT DISPLAY
ACTIVE GROUP "
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
CALENDAR CLOCK!
!
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 8 of 26
CALENDAR CLOCK
READ TIME & DATE !
$
CALENDAR CLOCK
SET TIME & DATE !
$
1980 JAN 01
00:00:00
SET TIME & DATE
SET YEAR 1980
$
SET TIME & DATE
SET DAY 01
$
(Time is set when
#is pressed)
$
SET TIME & DATE
SET MINUTE 00
CALENDAR CLOCK
CLOCK REFERENCE !
CLOCK REFERENCE
RELAY CRYSTAL !
CLOCK REFERENCE
RELAY CRYSTAL "
CLOCK REFERENCE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE "
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
!
COMMISSION TESTS
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 9 of 26
COMMISSION TESTS !
CONTACT CONTROL
$
ALL CONTACTS !
ENABLED
ALL CONTACTS
ENABLED "
ALL CONTACTS
BLOCKED "
CONTACTS BLOCKED
EXCEPT ANY TRIP "
COMMISSION TESTS
ON LOAD DIR TEST !
$
*1
or
'Fault NOT seen'
'as FORWARD'
or
'Test aborted '
'check I &/or V'
COMMISSION TEST
PwrSwg TEST
$
PwgSwg TEST
DISABLED !
PwgSwg TEST
DISABLED"
*2
PwgSwg TEST
ENABLED"
COMMISSION TEST
MONITOR OPTIONS
MONITOR 23456789
!
OPT 25
$
COMMISSION TEST
OUTPUT OPTION
********
MONITOR
23456789
OPT 25 "
********
*3
*4
!
or 'Contacts blocked'
(If contact block has
been selected)
*5
*1
Note, this test is only active whilst the SET key is held pressed. The RELAY AVAILABLE LED is turned off and the RIA
contact closes when the page :- 'ON LOAD DIR TEST''push SET to test' is displayed and the SET key is pressed. The
RELAY AVAILABLE LED is turned on and the RIA contact opens when the SET key is released.
*2
Note, when Power Swing test is enabled, monitor option number 8 should be selected in order to view relay response
*3
*4
Note,
a) this test is only active whilst the SET key is held pressed. The RELAY AVAILABLE LED is turned off and the RIA contact
closes when the page :- 'push SET to test' , 'OUTPUT OPT #xx' is displayed. The RELAY AVAILABLE LED is turned on
and the RIA contact opens when the user steps back to the page:-'COMMISSION TEST' 'OUTPUT OPTION'
b) The 15 minute timeout feature is not applicable when the page :-.'push SET to test' 'OUTPUT OPT #xx' is displayed
c) Output options are detailed in section 3.14
*5
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
!
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 10 of 26
COMMUNICATIONS
ACCESS LEVEL !
ACCESS LEVEL
FULL !
ACCESS LEVEL
FULL"
$
ACCESS LEVEL
LIMITED"
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL CONTROL
!
SERIAL CONTROL
ACTIVE PORT !
$
ACTIVE PORT
MODEM !
ACTIVE PORT
MODEM "
ACTIVE PORT
LOCAL"
( BAUD Settings
are :4800
2400
1200
600
300 )
SERIAL CONTROL
MODEM BAUD RATE
$
SERIAL CONTROL
MODEM PROTOCOL
MODEM PROTOCOL
DATA PARITY STOP
$
DATA PARITY STOP
8 EVEN 1 "
DATA PARITY STOP
8 ODD 1 "
DATA PARITY STOP
8 NONE 2 "
DATA PARITY STOP
7 EVEN 1 "
DATA PARITY STOP
7 ODD 1 "
DATA PARITY STOP
7 EVEN 2 "
DATA PARITY STOP
7 ODD 2 "
DATA PARITY STOP
7 NONE 2 "
Note,
1) To gain access to the menu via the serial comms the user must first type in the Group 1 GROUP IDENTIFIER, see IDENTIFIER
section, followed by carriage return. Provided the ID matches that stored in the relay a prompt GECAM: will appear. The user
then types LOGON followed by carriage return, at which point he will be logged onto the menu provided the LCD display is at a
root or default display. The message 'Operator interface in use' will be written to the VDU if the menu is not at the root or default
level.
2) When the GECAM: prompt is displayed on the remote VDU, the relay LCD changes to :-'Serial comms.' 'Logged on'
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 11 of 26
COMMUNICATIONS continued:-
SERIAL CONTROL
CONTROL LINES
$
CONTROL LINES
IN USE "
CONTROL LINES
NOT IN USE "
SERIAL CONTROL
LOCAL BAUD RATE !
$
SERIAL CONTROL
LOCAL PROTOCOL !
LOCAL PROTOCOL
DATA PARITY STOP!
4) When the MODEM serial comms. is logged on, the option to select
LOCAL port is not available, this prevents lockout of the modem
control.
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
OPTIONS
SETTINGS !
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 12 of 26
SETTINGS
CONTACT
CONFIG!
CONTACT CONFIGRESERVED!
CONTACT CONFIGRESERVED"
$
1) RESERVED contact configuration is
for GECAM test use only
2) For all versions a minimum of 3 or 4
contact configurations are always
available, additional configurations may be
available for specific relay versions
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 13 of 26
SCHEME
SELECTION !
$
SCHEME SELECTION
BASIC !
$
SCHEME
SELECTION
TP = 98ms !
TP = 98ms "
SCHEME SELECTION
BASIC "
SCHEME SELECTION
Z1 EXTENSION"
$ SCHEME
SELECTION
TD = 98ms !
TD = 98ms "
SCHEME SELECTION
PUR "
$ SCHEME
SELECTION
TDW= 98ms!
TDW= 98ms "
SCHEME SELECTION
PUR UNBLOCK"
SCHEME SELECTION
POR 1"
(Except 114
version)
SCHEME SELECTION
POR 1 UNBLOCK"
SCHEME SELECTION
POR 2"
SCHEME SELECTION
POR 2 WI TRIP"
SCHEME SELECTION
POR 2 UNBLOCK"
SCHEME POR 2
W1 TRIP UNBLOCK"
SCHEME SELECTION
BLOCKING"
SCHEME SELECTION
BLOCKING 2"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 14 of 26
(Versions 111,112
SCHEME SELECTION
DEF ELEMENTS
DEF ELEMENTS
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL ENABLED!
ALL ENABLED"
(Only if DEF
ELEMENTS
ALL
ENABLED)
DEF ELEMENTS
DEF AIDED TRIP!
(Scheme timer
range = 0 to
98ms in 2ms
steps)
$
Note, DEF AIDED TRIP is set to
BLOCKED if BASIC,Z1 EXTENSION,
or PUR UNBLOCk schemes are
selected
(Highset 3Io
range=0.05
to 0.8In in
0.05In steps)
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL BLOCKED"
DEF HIGHSET
3Io = 0.8In"
$
DEF AIDED TRIP
TPG = 98ms !
$
DEF AIDED TRIP
TDG = 98ms !
LOSS OF LOAD
FEATURE ENABLED!
LOSS OF LOAD
FEATURE ENABLED "
$
LOSS OF LOAD
FEATURE BLOCKED "
(Only if ENABLED)-
LL ENABLED BY
LS I LEVEL DET !
LL ENABLED BY
LS I LEVEL DET "
LL ENABLED BY
HS I LEVEL DET "
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 15 of 26
DISTANCE
TYPE OF TRIP
$
TYPE OF TRIP
1 OR 3 POLE
TYPE OF TRIP
1 OR 3 POLE"
TYPE OF TRIP
3 POLE ONLY"
DISTANCE
ZONE 1 TRIPPING !
$
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
ENABLED
!
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
ENABLED"
ZONE 1 TRIPPING
BLOCKED"
DISTANCE
TIME DELAY TRIP!
$
(TZ1X range =
100ms to 9980ms in 20ms steps)
(TZ1Y range =
100ms to 9980ms in 20ms steps)
(TZ2 range =
100ms to 9980ms in 20ms steps)
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
(THETA N range = 50 to 85 in 5
steps, versions 111, 112 & 114 only)
(THETA N range = -45,-35, -25 to
80 in 5 steps, version 113 only)
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 16 of 26
DISTANCE
BASE SETTING!
$
BASE SETTING
KZPh = 1.000
$
BASE SETTING
! KZPh = 1.000"
BASE SETTING
THETA Ph = 85
$
! BASE SETTING
THETA Ph = 85"
BASE SETTING
KZN= 1.360
$
BASE SETTING
! KZN= 1.360"
BASE SETTING
THETA N = 85
BASE SETTING
! THETA N = 85"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 17 of 26
DISTANCE SETTINGS
continued:(Version 111
only)
DISTANCE
DIST G CHAR'STIC
$
DIST G CHAR'STIC
MHO
$
DIST G CHAR'STIC
MHO "
DIST G CHAR'STIC
QUADRILATERAL"
KR range = 1 to 30 in
(steps of 1)
DIST G CHAR'STIC
KR = 30
!
DIST G CHAR'STIC
KR = 30"
(Only if QUADRILATERAL)
(KZ1 range = 1.00 to
49.98 in steps of 0.02)
DISTANCE
Z1 & Z2 SETTING !
$
DISTANCE ZONE 3
SETTING !
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1 = 49.98 !
$
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1X = 49.98 !
$
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1Y = 49.98 !
$
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ2 = 49.98 !
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1 = 49.98"
ZONE 3 SETTING
OFFSET !
$
ZONE 3 SETTING
OFFSET"
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1X = 49.98"
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1Y = 49.98"
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ2 = 49.98"
(Only for
OFFSET)
DISTANCE
SWCH ON TO FAULT !
$
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3'= 49.9 !
$
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3= 49.98 !
$
ZONE 3 SETTING
LENT a/b = 1.00 !
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3'= 49.9"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED !
$
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED"
ZONE 3 SETTING
KZ3= 49.98"
ZONE 3 SETTING
LENT a/b = 1.00"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BLOCKED"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
DISTANCE
SETTINGS
continued:-
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 18 of 26
(Only if ENABLED)
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED IN 110s!
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED IN 110s"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
ENABLED IN 0.2s"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BY COMPARATORS!
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BY COMPARATORS"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BY LEVEL DETECT"
SWCH ON TO FAULT
BY LD OR COMP"
DISTANCE
PwrSwg DETECTOR!
PwrSwg DETECTOR
ENABLED!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
ENABLED"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
BLOCKED"
(Only if ENABLED)
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TIMING Z6-->Z2!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TIMING Z6-->Z2"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TIMING Z6-->Z3"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To BLOCK Z1"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1X!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1X"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To BLOCK Z1X"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1Y !
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To ALLOW Z1Y"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
To BLOCK Z1Y"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 19 of 26
DISTANCE
SETTINGS continued
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO ALLOW Z2!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO ALLOW Z2"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z2"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO ALLOW Z3!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO ALLOW Z3"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TO BLOCK Z3"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TZ6 = 90ms!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6 = 49.98!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6' = 49.9!
$
PwrSwg DETECTOR
LENT a/b = 1.00!
PwrSwg DETECTOR
TZ6 = 90ms"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6 = 49.98"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
KZ6' = 49.9"
PwrSwg DETECTOR
LENT a/b = 1.00"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
SETTINGS
BLOCK AUTORECLSE!
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 20 of 26
BLOCKA/R ON
Z1+AT 2&3Ph/F!
$
BLOCK A/R ON
Z1+AT 2&3Ph/F"
ALLOW A/R ON
Z1+AT 2&3Ph/F"
BLOCK A/R ON
Z1+AT 3Ph/F"
BLOCK A/R ON
Z1X(T) TRIP"
ALLOW A/R ON
Z1X(T) TRIP"
BLOCK A/R ON
Z1Y(T) TRIP"
ALLOW A/R ON
Z1Y(T) TRIP"
BLOCK A/R ON
Z2(T) TRIP !
$
BLOCK A/R ON
Z2(T) TRIP"
ALLOW A/R ON
Z2(T) TRIP"
BLOCK A/R ON
CHANNEL OUT !
$
BLOCK A/R ON
CHANNEL OUT"
ALLOW A/R ON
CHANNEL OUT"
BLOCK A/R ON
DEF DELAY TRIP !
$
BLOCK A/R ON
DEF DELAY TRIP"
ALLOW A/R ON
DEF DELAY TRIP"
BLOCK A/R ON
DEF AIDED TRIP !
BLOCK A/R ON
DEF AIDED TRIP"
ALLOW A/R ON
DEF AIDED TRIP"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
SETTINGS
VT SUPERVISION
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 21 of 26
VT SUPERVISION
TO ALLOW TRIP!
VT SUPERVISION
TO ALLOW TRIP"
$
VT SUPERVISION
TO BLOCK TRIP"
VT SUPERVISION
SELF RESETTING!
SELF RESETTING
ENABLED!
SELF RESETTING
ENABLED"
SELF RESETTING
DISABLED"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
SETTINGS
START INDICATION!
!
$
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 22 of 26
START INDICATION
ENABLED!
START INDICATION
ENABLED"
START INDICATION
BLOCKED"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 23 of 26
SETTINGS
DEF !
$
DEF
LOW SET !
$
DEF
ELEMENTS !
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL ENABLED !
$
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL ENABLED "
DEF ELEMENTS
ALL BLOCKED "
(Only if ALL
ENABLED)
DEF ELEMENTS
DELAY TRIP !
$
(Only if
ENABLED)
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 24 of 26
DEF POLARISING
NEGATIVE SEQ V !
DEF POLARISING
NEGATIVE SEQ V"
DEF POLARISING
ZERO SEQ I"
DEF POLARISING
ZERO SEQ V "
DEF POLARISING
ZERO SEQ V & I "
(THETA G range = 10 to
80 in 10 steps)
DEF ELEMENTS
ANGLE !
$
DEF ANGLE
THETA G = 80 !
DEF ANGLE
THETA G = 80 "
DEF ELEMENTS
MAG INRUSH !
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 25 of 26
SETTINGS !
FAULT LOCATOR
(KZF range = 1 to 40 in
0.01 steps.)
FAULT LOCATOR
REACH !
$
REACH
KZF = 40.00 !
REACH
KZF = 40.00"
FAULT LOCATOR
LINE UNITS !
$
LINE UNITS
= km !
LINE UNITS
= km"
LINE UNITS
= miles"
LINE UNITS
= 100%"
(Only if km selected)
FAULT LOCATOR
LINE LENGTH !
$
LINE LENGTH
999.9 km !
LINE LENGTH
999.9 km "
FAULT LOCATOR
LINE LENGTH !
$
LINE LENGTH
999.9 miles !
LINE LENGTH
999.9 miles"
FAULT LOCATOR
LINE LENGTH= 100%
$
FAULT LOCATOR
CT RATIO =5000:1 !
$
FAULT LOCATOR
CT RATIO =5000:1"
FAULT LOCATOR
VT RATIO =9990:1 !
$
FAULT LOCATOR
VT RATIO = 9990:1"
MUTUAL COMP
ENABLED"
MUTUAL COMP
DISABLED "
(Only if MUTUAL
COMP ENABLED)
MUTUAL COMP
KZM =1.360"
MUTUAL COMP
KZM =1.360 !
$
MUTUAL COMP
THETA M = 85 !
MUTUAL COMP
THETA M = 85
"
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911B
Chapter 2
Appendix A
Page 26 of 26
SETTING TRAP
If no change made
If change made
SET
#
RESET
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 1 of 6
Glossary of terms
a/b Code bit
A/D
ALE
BAR
Block auto-reclose
B.P.Filter
COS BAR
CK
Clock
COS
Channel Out-Of-Service
CpAZ1
CRX
Carrier receive
CTS
Clear to send
CTX
Carrier transmit
CVT
DCE
DEF
DEF BU
DEF SOTF
DEF T BU
DSR
DTE
DTR
E2PROM }
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 2 of 6
EEPROM }
EPROM
G/F
Ground faults
IAR
IAZph
LCD
LDCpAZ1
LDHSA
LDHSI0
LDLSA
LDLSI0
LDLSI2
LDOVA
LDV0
LED
LGS
Modem
Modulator / demodulator
Mux
Multiplexer
Osc
Oscillator
PDA
P/F
Phase faults
PORT 0
PORT 2
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 3 of 6
PSB
PSD
PSEN *
RAM
RD *
Read
RIA
RL29-31
RS
RS232
RTS
Request to send
R/W
RXD
Received data
SOTF CNV
Switch-on-to-fault current-no-volts
SOTF EN
Switch-on-to-fault enable
SOTF TRIP
Switch-on-to-fault trip
Timer 1
Timer 2
TXD
Transmitted data
VA
Voltage ac (A phase)
Vmem A
Vpol A
VTS
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 4 of 6
WI
Weak infeed
WR *
Write
Z1A
Zone 1 (A phase)
Z1XS
Z1XT
Z1YT
Z2A
Zone 2 (A phase)
Z2T
Z3A
Zone 3 (A phase)
Z3T
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
Figure G-1
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 5 of 6
Logic Symbols
Service Manaul
LFZP 11x
R-5911D
Chapter 2
Glossary
Page 6 of 6
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION AND HANDLING
R-5911
CHAPTER 3
Page 1
1.
RECEIVING ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.
HANDLING........................................................................................................................... 2
3.
STORAGE ............................................................................................................................. 2
4.
INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 2
4.1 Rack mounting.................................................................................................................. 2
4.2 Panel mounting ................................................................................................................. 3
4.3 Earthing ............................................................................................................................ 3
5.
6.
7.
R-5911
CHAPTER 3
Page 2
INSTALLATION
Section
1.
RECEIVING
Remove the relay from the container in which it is received and inspect for obvious
damage. If damage has been sustained in transit, a claim should be made immediately
to the transport company concerned and a report sent to the nearest GEC Alsthom
Protection and Control office or agent.
Section
2.
HANDLING
The relay in its case is extremely robust and no special precautions are necessary.
However, to prevent the ingress of dirt, it is strongly advised that modules, or PCBs are
not removed from the case. If the front plate is opened, care should be taken when it is
reclosed, to fully locate the 64 way connector between the processor PCB (slot #11)
and the front plate PCB, before the front plate screw is tightened. This can be achieved
by pressing firmly on the frontplate directly infront of the connector.
Section
3.
STORAGE
If not required for immediate use, return the relay to its original wrapper and carton and
store in a clean dry place. The silica gel unit supplied with the relays delivered outside
the United Kingdom should be heated at 60-70C for one hour before being replaced.
Section
4.
INSTALLATION
Relays should be installed in a location free from excessive vibration. The relay cases
can be supplied for either rack or panel mounting.
4.1
Rack mounting
Relays for rack mounting are supplied in cases designed for housing in standard 19 inch
(483 mm) racks.
4.2
R-5911
CHAPTER 3
Page 3
Panel mounting
Relays can be supplied for either flush or semi-projecting panel mounting. Panels
should be vertical to within 5. Dimension, fixing details and cut-out sizes for the cases
are shown in the relevant case outline drawing.
Flush mounted relays are inserted from the front into the panel cut-out and secured by
means of nuts and bolts through holes in the upper and lower flanges in the relay and
corresponding holes in the panel.
Semi-projecting mounted relays are fitted with an extending collar and are otherwise
secured using the same means as those described for the flush mounted relays.
When installation is complete the relays must be set up and commissioned as described
in the relevant instructions.
4.3
Earthing
The relay case earthing terminal on the rear of the relay case must be connected to earth
(ground).
Section
5.
The modules/boards in Optimho contain circuitry which consists of devices that have
been manufactured by the CMOS process (Complementary Metal Oxide Silicon).
CMOS devices are susceptible to damage due to static discharge and for this reason it is
essential that the correct handling procedure is followed:The following procedure is recommended when handling all modules:1.
Before removing modules from the Optimho case, the operator should firstly
ground himself to the relay case, in order to remove any static charge
difference between the operator and the Optimho.
2.
3.
Modules must not be passed from one person to another unless both persons
are grounded.
4.
Section
6.
R-5911
CHAPTER 3
Page 4
Notes on wiring
In the event of a power supply failure access is required to the back pack. This would
be assisted if the wiring loom does not run across the back pack.
Section
7.
The calibration of the boards in the input module is related to the specific current and
voltage transformers in that module. Therefore, under no circumstances should the
boards be replaced with boards from another module without the module being
recalibrated.
CHAPTER 4
COMMISSIONING
Service Manual
LFZP11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Contents
Page 1 of 3
Page
1.
2.
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
GENERAL NOTES
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS
Wiring
Rating details
CT shorting contacts
Insulationtest
SECONDARY INJECTION TESTS (MAIN)
Isolation
Initial Checks
Settings
Test plugs
Level detector checks
Voltage level detectors
Fixed current level detectors
Biased high set and low set residual current level detectors
Reach and fault location checks
Fault locator
Ground faults zone 1
Phase faults zone 1
Zone 1X reach (If applicable)
Zone 1Y reach (If applicable)
Zone 2 reach checks
Zone 3 reach checks (Not fitted on LFZP 114)
Resistive reach check (If quadrilateral characteristic is applicable) 16
Operation times
Zone 1 operation times
Zone 1X operation time (If applicable)
Zone 1Y operation (if applicable)
Zone 2 operation time
Zone 3 operation time
Power swing blocking checks
Zone 6 reach check
TZ6 time
Simulated power swing with blocking checks
Voltage transformer supervision
Operation on zero sequence volts
Timing check
Instantaneous indication
Blocking check
Switch on to fault
Memory feature (Synchronous polarising)
Loss of load accelerated trip feature
Fault location using mutual compensation
1
1
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
25
26
Service Manual
LFZP11x
5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5..5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
R5911D
Chapter 4
Contents
Page 2 of 3
Page
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
33
34
34
35
35
35
36
37
37
37
38
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
41
42
44
44
47
47
47
48
48
49
49
49
50
51
Service Manual
LFZP11x
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
R5911D
Chapter 4
Contents
Page 3 of 3
Page
Figure 1
Figure 1a
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8a
Figure 8b
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
51
51
53
57
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 1 of 70
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
} capable of
} supplying
} rated current
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 2 of 70
n)
o)
Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant external connection
diagram and/or scheme diagram. If test blocks type MMLG are provided, the
connections should be checked to the scheme diagram particularly that the supply
connections are to the live side of the test block (coloured orange and allocated
with odd numbered terminals 1, 3, 5, 7 etc.). See Figure 1 for recommended
connections.
3.2
Rating details
Check that the ratings for frequency, current, ac volts, auxiliary dc supplies Vx(1)
and Vx(2) are correct. These will appear on the nameplate on the front of the
relay.
Note:
3.3
CT shorting contacts
Observing electro static discharge precautions (i.e. wear an earthed wrist strap or
touch earth and only handle the module by the front plate and board edges) and
ensuring that all dc supplies are isolated from the relay, open the relay front panel.
Remove the input module (on the right hand side using the handle provided) and
check that the contact block within the case is fitted with CT shorting contacts. The
following pairs of terminals will be provided with shorting facilities 19 and 20, 21
and 22, 23 and 24, 25 and 26, 27 and 28. If the MMLB test blocks are fitted the
relay is easily isolated from its supply CTs using Figure 2 Test Plug 1 connection.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 3 of 70
P1
S2
MMLG 01
TEST BLOCK 1
S1
IA
IB
IC
SIGNAL
SEND
IN
DEF
CURRENT
POLARISATION
P2
P1
S2
S1
19
20
21
22
10
23
11
12
24
13
14
13
15
16
14
17
18
49
19
20
51
21
22
25
23
24
26
25
26
27
27
28
28
60
64
68
NOTE:
IF DEF CURRENT POLARISATION
IS NOT REQUIRED THE SAME
INPUT TERMINALS CAN BE USED
TO PROVIDE MUTUAL COMPENSATION
FOR THE FAULT LOCATOR
72
76
80
MMLG 01
TEST BLOCK 2
84
58
62
BREAKER OPEN
66
70
CARRIER RECEIVE
10
74
RELAY BLOCKED
11
12
78
13
14
15
16
17
18
77
19
20
79
VA
VB
21
22
15
23
24
16
VC
VN
25
26
17
27
28
18
DC SUPPLY
ANY TRIP
* INHIBITS PSB,DEF
Figure 1 Recommended MMLG test block connections for Optimho 11X relays
O
P
T
I
M
H
O
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 4 of 70
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
IA
IB
IC
IN
I pol
DEF OR
FAULT LOCATOR
MUTUAL COMPENSATION
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
CHECK VOLTS V
X1
BEFORE LINKING
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE AFTER
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
Figure 1a
VA
VB
VC
VN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 5 of 70
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
CURRENT COIL
PHASE ANGLE METER
+
-
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
VOLTAGE COIL
PHASE ANGLE METER
+
-
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 6 of 70
Pass current through each pair of contacts to ensure a circuit is indicated or check
that a low resistance is measured.
The equipment label is on the back of the front panel and gives PCB/Module
identification numbers. These numbers are needed if replacements are ever
required. The external connection diagram number is also given (10 LFZP11 0 )
SAFETY ADVICE
DO NOT OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL
AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
When type MMLG test block facilities are installed it is essential that the sockets in
the type MMLB01 test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary
windings are LINKED BEFORE THE TEST PLUG IS INSERTED INTO THE TEST
BLOCK. Similarly, an MMLB02 single finger test plug must be terminated with an
ammeter BEFORE IT IS INSERTED to monitor CT secondary currents.
3.4
Insulation test
This test may be done by the main plant contractor at an earlier date. An
electronic or brushless insulation tester should be used having a dc output not
exceeding 1000V.
Deliberate circuit earthing links removed for these tests must subsequently be
replaced. The relay and associated wiring may be tested between :
a)
b)
Isolation
All the relay contacts can be prevented from operating while the rest of the relay
functions normally and gives indications also signals for operation times may be
taken from the monitor point box. It is, however, necessary to check the operation
of contacts during commissioning so alternative trip isolation must be obtained as
necessary.
It is possible to inhibit all contacts, except ANY TRIP if only secondary injection tests
are being performed rather than full commissioning. See Chapter 2 Appendix A
for the menu tree plan.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.2
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 7 of 70
Initial checks
If the dc supplies are available on the panel they should be checked for correct
polarity and voltage before linking through to the relay. If the panel supply is
unavailable, a suitable supply should be connected to the relay side of the test
block.
On power up it will be observed that the red and yellow LED's (trip and alarm
respectively) will flash on and then off once, followed by the green LED (relay
available) lighting and remaining on. The power up process takes about 700ms.
Check the Relay Inoperative Alarm contact (RIA) is open.
Note 1:
On power up the LCD will display the prompt "Please Set CALENDAR
CLOCK". It is not necessary to conform to this prompt, however, to
prevent confusion it should now be set.
It should be noted that if the dc auxiliary supply Vx(1) is removed the CALENDAR
CLOCK will have to be reset.
Note 2:
4.3
If after power up the relay inoperative alarm contact closes and there is
an error on the LCD, investigation is required. If the watchdog
system has found a problem an appropriate error message will be
seen on the LCD.
Settings
When commissioning an Optimho for the first time the engineer should allow an
hour to get familiar with the menu.
All settings on the optimho are by means of a built in keypad, and the settings
should now be entered. It is recommended that the final service settings are used
during commissioning. The software version number should be checked (in menu
under identifiers), reference should then be made Chapter 2 output connections
for standard models, or Chapter 5 for special models, for the contact
configuration tables. The chosen contact configuration should then be checked
against the wiring diagram.
Note:
The menu returns to the `default display' or `press set to update
changes' if left in another part of the menu for 15 minutes or longer.
The relay can store eight independent groups of settings identified as group 1 to 8.
Ensure that group 1 is selected for the first or only new set of settings to be
entered. The user can select the default display to be either a blank display, the
group identification code or the active group number selected.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 8 of 70
The user has to decide what commissioning is necessary for any additional setting
groups that will be used. If only different zone reaches are involved then the user
may select to test the appropriate settings. Alternatively having proved that correct
settings can be selected by the menu then for additional groups of settings it may
only be necessary to obtain a record or printout of the selections. Alternatively a
complete repetition of the commissioning procedure for each additional group
used may be required by some users.
4.4
Test plugs
If GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C MMLG 01 Test Blocks are installed, it is
recommended that they are wired as shown in Figure 1 and the test plug type
MMLB 01 wired for normal secondary injection as shown in Figure 1a.
4.5
4.5.1
OPT 06
The monitor point box has the added advantage that the data is on the box all the
time once a monitor option has been selected even if the relay is in another part of
the menu.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.5.2
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 9 of 70
OPT 06
Note:
The biased neutral level detector will operate at the same value. If the
biased neutral low - set level detector operates, for a period of five
seconds continuously, without the operation of one of the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
then the relay will respond by closing the "Relay Inoperative Alarm" contact and
extinguishing the "Relay Available" LED. The main micro controller writes the
message:
,
,
, ERROR# IFAIL ,
to the fault diagnostic page on the LCD
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 10 of 70
The relay calculates the neutral current from the vector addition of phase currents.
Thus the message may be created during commissioning but will automatically
reset and can be ignored in these circumstances.
When an 'error' message is given closure of the inoperative alarm contact only
means investigation is necessary NOT that the relay has been taken out of service.
ii) High Set
current setting is given by:
7.5 x 1 x In Amps 10%
100 KZPh
Select monitor option 07
Inject current as above and determine the pick up and drop off. Drop off to be
within 20% of pick up.
LCD Position/Socket No
MONTIOR
OPT 07
4.5.3
Biased high set and low set residual current level detectors
The biasing only comes into action when a minimum phase difference current is
exceeded. The residual signal is derived by summing the vectors of the voltages in
the relay which are proportional to the phase currents.
The operation level when biasing varies directly with the highest phase difference
current until a limit is reached. The minimum operate level varies inversely with
KZPh. In commissioning it is only necessary to check this fixed level.
i) Low set
The minimum operate current is given by:
5 x 1
x In Amps 20%
100 KZPh
Select monitor option 06
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 11 of 70
Inject current in turn into each pair of phase termination's and determine the pick
up and drop off of each level detector. The drop off should be within 20% of pick
up.
LCD POSITIONS/SOCKET NO
MONTIOR
OPT 06
9
N
OPT 07
4.6
9
N
4.6.1
Fault locator
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 12 of 70
If the fault locator is fitted checks can be done on its location readings while
checking Zone 1 reaches. The location reading is based on the secondary ohm
setting being unaffected by whatever CT and VT ratios are selected in the fault
locator part of the menu its only reach setting KZF sets the line length in ohms.
Locations can be selected to be given in percentages, miles or kilometres.
If Zone 1 is set to 80% of the line then KZF is set to 1.25 x KZ1.
If miles or kilometres have been set just multiply the line length by the above
percentage to check the location given for the Zone 1 reach.
Pressing the `ACCEPT/READ' key after a fault brings up the fault location, the
alarm LED then ceases to flash and the indications could be reset, however,
continued pressing of the `ACCEPT/READ' key will display all the pre-fault and
fault information. Time delayed trips will have no pre-fault information available if
starts are not enabled.
Reverse faults will give a negative reading but locations given should be regarded
as a guide only. SOTF trips will give a location and the fault information will
indicate the faulted phase or phases.
Note: The fault locator has five cyclic buffers for acquired data. At any moment in
time one buffer must be in use for acquiring new data thus the fault locator can
store raw data for up to four faults.
If more than four faults occur within a 20 second period the fault locator may
ignore faults until a fault data buffer is free. In this situation if data from a previous
fault exists in the buffer it will be available with the new fault type and time
information which will always be correct.
Note: If mutual compensation is to be used on the fault locator see Section 4.13.
4.6.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 13 of 70
Make small adjustments, say 1%, to the impedance and re-apply to the relay until
the highest impedance which gives the indication Z1 AN occurs.
Note 1:
If the Circuit Breaker Open optical isolator input is connected then all
faults can appear as SOTF. Appropriate action must be taken to
prevent the optical isolator input from being energised. This is easily
done if the recommended test blocks are used.
Note 2:
The loop impedance required for the LFZP113 version is half that given
by all the formulae in Section 4.6 as the nameplate formulae have a
divide by 2 factor.
It will also be seen that the ALARM LED will flash continuously and the TRIP LED will
light. The trip may now be accepted by pressing the ACCEPT/READ key (two
presses will be necessary if the fault locator is fitted, the second press will only be
effective when the fault location calculation is finished, this may be 3 seconds for
one fault and much longer for a series of faults) which will cause the ALARM LED
to stop flashing and become continuously illuminated. Pressing the RESET key will
extinguish the ALARM and TRIP LED's and clear the fault information on the LCD.
However, any new event is automatically displayed and the previous 3 stored for
menu recall.
The measured impedance should be within 10% of the calculated value assuming
the angle of the impedance presented is within 5 of THETA Ph and N as set on
the relay. If the angle difference is greater then KZN and KZPH must be added
vectorially before applying the appropriate zone multiplier.
Check the appropriate contacts operate, for single or three phase tripping as
selected. In particular check the ANY TRIP contact and the Block Auto-reclose (BAR)
contact.
Change the direction of the current and ensure that the relay does not operate
(check with a close up fault briefly applied).
Repeat the above tests for the other two phases i.e. B-N and C-N.
4.6.3
4.6.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 14 of 70
4.6.6
4.6.7
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 15 of 70
Indication locks to first zone giving trip and can only change when a
new event occurs, therefore Zone 1 indication of operation will be
given on the LCD, for Zone 2, indication will be given by selecting
monitor option 12 and observing LCD positions 2, 3 and 4 for A, B
and C ground faults respectively. For Zone 3, monitor option 13
should be selected, LCD positions 2, 3 and 4 indicating A, B and C
ground faults respectively.
4.7
Operation times
4.7.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 16 of 70
b)
If the polarising quantities are not correctly provided by the test set, some
slower times may be measured. This may be noticed when doing phase
to phase faults.
c)
d)
If the polarising quantities are not correct or if the voltage filters are in initially
times may increase by 10-20ms. Times on 60Hz relays are approximately 10%
faster.
4.7.2
4.7.3
Z1X does not have to be smaller than Z1Y but they must both be set
smaller than the largest forward looking zone. Time stepped zone
operation times include the operation times of two comparators.
4.7.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 17 of 70
Apply a fault midway between Zone 2 and the next inward zone and check the
operation time as in 4.7.2 The measured time should be within 40ms of the set
time. Check for correct indication and contact operation.
4.7.5
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.8
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 18 of 70
If set around Zone 3, and the Lenticular characteristic is selected, it is usual to have
the aspect ratios set the same.
The recommended settings for the Power Swing Blocking characteristic Zone 6
forward and reverse reach can be obtained from the following expressions:
With Zone 3 set looking in the forward direction:
Z6 forward reach = 1.3 x Z3 forward reach
Z6 reverse reach = 0.3 x Z3 forward reach + Z3 reverse reach
With Zone 3 set looking in the reverse direction:
Z6 forward reach = 1.3 x Z2 forward reach
Z6 reverse reach = 0.3 x Z2 forward reach
With these impedance settings, the recommended timer setter TZ6 is 50ms.
4.8.1
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 19 of 70
MONTIOR
OPT 08
8
1
TZ6 Time
Select monitor option 08 and insert the monitor box into the "parallel" socket on
the front of the relay. Arrange a timer capable of working off 5V levels to start on
socket 8 (going 0 to 5V) and stop on socket 9 (going 0 to 5V), 22 being common.
(The timer should be set to `Break for Start' and `Break for Stop').
Apply an impedance midway between Zone 6 and Zone 2 or 3 as appropriate.
The timer will start when comparator A-B picks up and will stop when TZ6 time has
expired.
The time measured should be TZ6 10%
4.8.3
OPT 08
Z1
Z1XT
Z1YT
Z2T
Z3T
With this it is easy to check which zones are being blocked by the PSB feature in
the menu selection. The power swing will be simulated by applying an A-B fault
just outside Zone 3 or Zone 2 as appropriate, moving the fault to just inside the
zone and then moving it again to inside Zone 1.
Apply the fault used in 4.8.3 and again move in to just inside Zone 2 or Zone 3 as
appropriate and then move the fault again to inside Zone 1 in less time than the
lowest time delay setting.
Only the forward zones not blocked by the PSB feature will change form 0 to 1 on
the LCD display.
Note:
If a close up fault is applied from a volts only condition then all forward zones
enabled in the 'distance' part of the MENU will be seen as operating. Indications
for operation of the time stepped comparator zones are latched in this monitor
option.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.9
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 20 of 70
4.9.1
4.9.2
Timing check
Timing is checked by using a double pole switch to remove one healthy voltage
and start a timer which is stopped by the VTS alarm contact. The time obtained
should be as stated above.
4.9.3
Instantaneous indication
To perform this check it is necessary to provide the relay with zero sequence
voltage but no zero sequence current, and a Zone 1 comparator operation.
This can be acheived by applying a prefault condition of two phases of nominal
voltage, and one phase where the voltage is below the VTS detector setting. The
current inputs can either be zero, or a balanced condition. Then before the VTS 5.5
second time delay has elapsed switch to a Zone 1 fault condition. Instantaneous V
~ FAIL indication should be given.
For a test with three phase volts and a single phase
4.9.4
Note 1:
If a pole dead is seen before and not during the fault VTS operation
will be delayed by 240ms.
Note 2:
Blocking check
If VTS is now set to BLOCK TRIP, check that the indication RELAY BLOCKED is
obtained when the above conditions are satisfied and no trip is given. The `RELAY
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 21 of 70
BLOCKED' indication can not be reset or other information viewed (other than date
and time of V~ FAIL) until normal volts are restored.
If self resetting has been selected in the menu the RELAY BLOCKED indication will
automatically reset when volts are restored leaving the V~ FAIL indication only.
If `blocking' is to be used only select it after all tests are finished.
4.10
Switch on to fault
The feature is enabled when all poles have been dead for either 200ms or 110s
as selected by the menu.
When the poles dead signal goes off, the feature remains available for 250ms.
To check, go from a poles dead condition to a fault condition and arrange a timer
to start when the fault is applied and to stop when the SOTF Alarm contact closes.
Confirm SOTF indication is given. Note, no phase indication is given, however any
phase information from the last event is retained.
The time obtained should be less than 40ms.
(Times will be faster if comparator operation is selected for SOTF trips).
If SOTF is set to be enabled after 110 sec then this period of time must elapse
before another shot is attempted.
If Busbar VTs are to be used, BREAKER OPEN opto isolator input should be
energised. Faults can then be applied in the normal way giving SOTF indication
and the times already indicated.
4.11
For a test set with three phase volts and three phase current this can be achieved
by applying a prefault condition, for at least 500ms, then switch to a fault
condition. The fault condition must have balanced three phase current above the
high set level detector setting, and the voltage must collapse to zero on all three
phases.
For a test set with three phase volts and single phase current, the test can be
carried out using a B-N fault condition. The A and C phase voltage inputs should
be removed, the connect the relay Va and Vc inputs to the B phase input, as shown
in Figure 4. A prefault condition should be applied for at least 500ms, the switch
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 22 of 70
to a B-N Zone 1 fault condition where the current is above the high set level
detector setting, and the voltage collapses to zero.
For both cases the Memory Time can be measured by measuring the dwell time of
the distance Trip contact (the dwell time is measured by arranging the timer to
start when the contact closes, and stop when the contact opens).
It may be necessary to select a different contact configuration for this test to
provide the 'distance trip' contact.
All other trip contacts are kept operated until the fault current is removed.
On 50Hz the time measured should be 330 - 360ms
On 60Hz the time measured should be 270 - 300ms
Note 1:
Note 2:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 23 of 70
TEST PLUG 1
IA
IN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 24 of 70
TEST PLUG 2
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE AFTER
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
VB
VN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.12
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 25 of 70
No signalling channel.
Signalling channel out of service.
No auto-reclose enabling the use of Zone 1 extension scheme.
It can only be used in conjunction with 3 pole only tripping and provides Loss of
Load tripping if Zone 2 and/or DEF forward comparators have operated and loss
of load is detected in two phases. Load must have been present in all three phases
prior to detecting a load loss and no other form of tripping is in progress (i.e. Zone
1 or aided). The presence and loss of load is detected via the low set or high set
current level detectors as selected on the menu.
A convenient way of testing this feature is to have the test set arranged for an A-G
fault just inside Zone 2 and to use a variac and resistor to supply current above the
selected level detector setting in phases B and C via one pole of a two pole switch.
The current should go in one direction though B phase and the opposite way
though C phase so that the resultant is zero.
Supply the current to phases B and C and connect a timer to start when the 2 pole
switch is opened and to stop when the relay ANY TRIP contact closes. Apply the
A-G fault from the test set and open the 2 pole switch before Zone 2 time delay
has expired (extend or disable the time if required). The relay will display (DIST +
DEF) LL if DEF* is fitted and enabled or DISTANCE LL if the DEF is not fitted or is
disabled. The trip time will be 30 to 40ms. The trip times on a real system will be
increased by the time taken for the remote circuit breaker to open.
Another method is to apply a perfect condition of three phase nominal voltage,
and three phase current above the low set level detector (or high set level detector).
Then to apply an A-N fault just within Zone 2, at the same time reducing the
current in B and C phases to zero. Indication of DISTANCE LL or (DIST + DEF) LL
should be give, with the measured trip time between 30 to 40ms.
* The DEF part of the logic has been removed for versions later than "C" series of
the LFZP.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4.13
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 26 of 70
in %, Miles or Kilometres, provided THETA Ph, THETA N and THETA M are within
10 of each other.
The mutual compensation can be enabled or disabled in the fault locator part of
the menu. However when enabled the compensation can NOT effectively be
shorted on the compensation terminals.
It should also be noted that if Io polarising is selected in the menu for the DEF
feature then the mutual compensation is automatically disabled even when you
may think it has been enabled in the menu.
The two relays on the parallel line ends should be connected on the relay panel to
the test set as shown in Figure 6. If the panel wiring is correct the predicted
location will be obtained, if incorrect a higher value will be obtained. As the same
current is going through both relays all the fault locator testing could be done in
this connection but it is not recommended as lead lengths involved could have an
appreciable effect on the phase angle of the fault presented to the relays. Testing
in this connection with the added lead resistance may effect the distance relays
performance and is not recommended.
If mutual compensation is set to unrealistic high values compared with the neutral
compensation than location errors can be obtained.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 27 of 70
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
IA
IB
IC
IN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
CHECK VOLTS V
X1
BEFORE LINKING
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE AFTER
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
Figure 5
VA
VB
VC
VN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
Test plug connections for secondary injection test of mutual compensation setting
on the fault locator
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 28 of 70
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
2
Figure 6
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
2
10
10
12
11
12
11
14
13
14
13
16
15
16
15
18
17
18
17
20
19
20
19
22
21
22
21
24
23
24
23
26
25
26
25
28
27
28
27
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
A B C N
VOLTAGE
RELAY
LINE 1
RELAY
LINE 2
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
2
10
10
12
11
12
11
14
13
14
13
16
15
16
15
18
17
18
17
20
19
20
19
22
21
22
21
24
23
24
23
26
25
26
25
28
27
28
27
PART OF
SCHEME
WIRING TO
REAR
TERMINALS
A
N
CURRENT
Connections to prove polarity of panel wiring for mutual compensation on the fault
locator
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 29 of 70
relay type LFZP114 does not have the POR 2 or blocking schemes:
BASIC:
Z1 EXTENSION:
PUR:
PUR UNBLOCK:
POR 1:
POR 1 UNBLOCK:
POR 2:
POR 2 WI TRIP:
POR 2 UNBLOCK:
Z3
POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK:
Z3
Permissive Underreach.
Unblocking Permissive Underreach.
Permissive Overreach using Tp & Td for current
reversal guard.
Unblocking Permissive Overreach using Tp & Td
for current reversal guard.
Permissive Overreach using reverse Z3 for
current reversal guard and including Weak
Infeed echo.
Permissive Overreach using reverse Z3 for
current reversal guard and including Weak
Infeed Trip.
Unblocking Permissive Overreach using reverse
for current reversal guard and including Weak
Infeed Trip.
Unblocking Permissive Overreach using reverse
for current reversal guard and including Weak
Infeed Trip.
BLOCKING:
BLOCKING2:
The Loss of Load Accelerated Trip feature can be selected in conjunction with any
of the above schemes but it is only functional if 3 pole only tripping is selected.
5.1
Zone 1 extension
If this scheme is selected, Zone 1 reach is extended to that of Zone 1X.
The loop impedance's required will be as given in 4.6.4
Ensure the opto isolator input for RESET ZONE 1 EXTENSION is de-energised.
Check the reaches as in 4.6 for each fault condition. Indication given will be as for
Zone 1, ie Z1 on the LCD.
Energise RESET ZONE 1 EXTENSION opto-isolator input and recheck the reaches
which will now by that of Z1.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 30 of 70
5.2
Permissive under-reach
5.2.1
5.2.2
If the UNBLOCKING scheme is selected LOSS OF GUARD (LGS) optoisolator input must also be energised from the same switch as CRX.
5.2.3
If the reach stepped Zones 1X, 1Y are used, the SIGNAL SEND contact
will go off after Zone 1X or Zone 1Y time delay.
5.3
Permissive overreach
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 31 of 70
If DEF aided tripping is to be used it should now be blocked until the later tests are
done alternatively Ph-Ph faults could be applied.
If POR 2 WI TRIP or POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK are to be used, the WEAK INFEED
TRIPPING feature should not be selected until that particular test is to be
performed.
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 32 of 70
That TP is not used in schemes which utilise the weak infeed feature and
the guard is initiated by Zone 3 set to be reverse looking.
Arrange a double pole switch to energise CRX opto isolator input and start a timer.
Select Monitor Option 19 and use terminals 3 and 22 on the monitor point box to
stop the timer. If using a timer, 22 must be connected to common and set to
`break to stop'.
Energise CRX opto isolator and note the time displayed on the timer which will be
TP setting + up to 7ms to allow for program loop time.
Note:
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 33 of 70
3) TD
When the current reversal guard is picked up, transfer tripping is inhibited until the
permissive trip signal is removed or the Zone 2 comparator operates in POR 1. In
POR 2 the guard is on when a reverse looking comparator is picked up. A delay
on reset (TD) is required in case the Zone 2 comparator picks up while the
permissive trip signal is in the process of resetting which would otherwise cause
healthy circuit tripping.
If POR 1 is selected, proceed as follows:
Select Monitor Option 19 and arrange a timer to start on terminal 9 (going 0 to
5V) and stop on terminal 3 (going 5V to 0) of the Monitor Point box with terminal
22 being common.
Timer should have `Break for Start' and `Make for Stop'.
Ensure CRX opto isolator is energised. Apply a Zone 2 fault and note the time
which will be TD setting + up to 5ms to allow for program loop time.
If an Unblocking scheme is selected, energise CRX and LGS opto isolator and then
proceed as above.
If POR 2 is selected, proceed as follows:
Select Monitor Option 19 and arrange a timer to start on terminal 8 (going 5V to
0) and stop on terminal 2 (going 5V to 0) of the monitor point box, 22 being
common.
Apply a reverse Zone 3 fault, reset the timer and then remove the fault
The time obtained will be TD setting + up to 5ms to allow for program loops.
Timer should have `Make for Start' and `Make for Stop'.
The time obtained will be TD setting + up to 5ms to allow for program loops.
5.3.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.3.5
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 34 of 70
5.3.6
5.3.7
If the weak infeed feature is to be used, the relay at the other end of the
line must also have POR 2 selected which will then only send carrier
when Zone 2 + high set current level detector have picked up.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 35 of 70
A time delay of 60ms + up to 10ms to allow for program loop time and auxiliary
relay contact operation time, should be obtained.
Aided trip indication should be obtained and 3 phase trips given.
Note:
5.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 36 of 70
TDG = 20ms - minimum signalling channel reset time
5.4.1
Measurement of TP
DEF aided tripping should be inhibited (if available) until later tests are done
(alternatively Ph-Ph faults should be applied).
Select Monitor Option 19 and arrange a timer to start on terminals 9 (going 0 to
5V) and 22 and to stop on the ANY TRIP contact.
Ensure CRX opto isolator and CHANNEL OUT OF SERVICE opto isolator are
de-energised.
A timer should have `Break to Start' and `Make to Stop' selected. Apply a fault just
outside Z1.
The time obtained will be TP setting + up to 6ms for program loop time
DISTANCE AIDED indication will be given on the LCD.
The aided trip alarm contact should be checked if used.
5.4.2
Measurement of TD
Arrange a double pole switch to de-energise CRX opto isolator and start a timer.
Select Monitor Option 19 and use terminals 3 and 22 to stop the timer (going 5V
to 0), a timer should be re-set to `Break To Start' and `Make To Stop'.
Ensure CHANNEL OUT OF SERVICE opto isolator is de-energised.
CRX opto isolator should initially be energised.
De-energise CRX opto isolator and note TD time which will be TD setting + up to
4ms to allow for program loop time.
Energise CRX opto isolator, apply a fault outside Zone 1 and check that a time
delay trip is obtained.
5.4.3
5.4.4
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.5
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 37 of 70
Blocking 2 scheme
In this scheme, a normally open contact is used to start sending carrier and a
normally open contact stops carrier send when it closes but it will work with just
signal start contact if required.
Zone 3 must be set reverse looking and this causes SIGNAL START, if the DEF is
fitted and enabled the low set zero sequence current level detector also causes
SIGNAL START.
The SIGNAL STOP is controlled by the Zone 2 comparator and also the DEF
forward comparator if fitted and enabled. Aided tripping is obtained when either
of these comparators operate and no block signal is received within a small delay
time. The START and STOP signals are also used internally to control aided
tripping.
Certain time delays are necessary to prevent maloperation. These time delays have
to be set to take into account different signalling channel times, comparator
operation times and logic processing times.
TP is the time set to delay tripping after Zone 2 comparator has operated to allow
a possible blocking signal to be received from the relay at the other line end.
For current reversal conditions a small delay in drop off of the blocking signal is
required to prevent unwanted trips while the Zone 2 comparator is resetting.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 38 of 70
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
5.5.2
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 39 of 70
5.5.3
5.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 40 of 70
Note 1:
Note 2:
Directional checks
Apply rated current of the correct polarity to DEF polarising input and to the
neutral CT. The phase difference between the two should be 0 and the DEF
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 41 of 70
6.3
6.3.1
Current sensitivity
Select Monitor Option 4
Current sensitivity is given by Is = SETTING x In
The available range is 5 to 120% In
Inject current for each phase to ground fault and note the level required to obtain
a `1' in LCD Position 3.
The DEF forward comparator must be picked-up, when a ground fault is applied,
this is shown by LCD Position 6 in Monitor Option 4.
Tolerance = +10%-0%
6.3.2
Operation Time
Set the relay to the required curve setting. For curves 1 to 4 inject 10 x Is (or see
Note 3) and note the time for the DEF TRIP contact to operate which will be
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
CURVE
Definite 2
Definite 4
Definite 8
Curve 1
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 4
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 42 of 70
TIME (x MULT t)
Secs
2
4
8
2.971
1.500
0.808
13.333
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 43 of 70
TEST PLUG 1
IA
IB
IC
IN
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
THESE CONNECTIONS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE
THE TEST PLUG IS
INSERTED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 44 of 70
6.4
Note 1:
Note 2
If single pole tripping has been selected (and is available i.e. COS not
energised) then if the fault is seen by Zone 1 DEF will be inhibited until a
3 pole trip occurs via Z1X.Z1Y or Zone 2. Either take this into account
or energise COS opto-isolator.
Note 3:
Note 4:
6.4.1
POR 2 DEF uses the same reversal guard timer setting as the distance,
there is only one menu setting for the drop off time delay for the guard,
is TD.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 45 of 70
100
50
10
curve 4
curve 1
Operating
time (s)
0.5
curve 2
curve 3
0.1
1
10
50
100
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 46 of 70
100
50
10
Operating
time (s)
curve 5
curve 6
curve 7
0.5
curve 8
0.1
1
10
50
100
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
6.4.2
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 47 of 70
6.4.3
Blocking
TPG
Select Monitor Option 19 and start a timer when M.P.7 goes to 5V on the
application of a fault only seen by the DEF forward comparator, stop the timer with
the any trip contact. (Monitor point 22 is the 0V common terminal). A timer should
have `Break to Start' and `Make to Stop'.
If single or 3 pole tripping is selected:Measured Time = TPG + 20ms + up to 8ms (for contact operation and processing)
Time delay to give distance single
pole tripping preference.
If 3 pole tripping is selected, the time measured will be as above less the 20ms.
TDG
Select Monitor Option 19. Connect MP2 to stop a timer which has a start given by
de-energising the CRX input.
A timer should have `Break to Start' and `Make to Stop'. The time obtained will be
TDG and up to 6ms processing time.
6.4.4
Blocking 2
TPG
Apply a ground fault that will only be seen by the DEF forward looking comparator
(i.e. a high impedance or resistive fault outside the reach of the distance).
Select Monitor Option 19, the pick-up of the DEF forward comparator is detected
by the output of the monitor box terminal 7 and the trip output by terminal 4.
Monitor box terminal 22 is the common zero volt rail.
Ensure CRX opto isolator and CHANNEL OUT OF SERVICE opto isolator are
de-energised.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 48 of 70
The time obtained will be TPG setting + up to 3ms for program loop time (+40ms
+ up to 3ms if single/three pole tripping is selected thus giving preference to
distance single pole tripping). DEF AIDED indication will be given on the LCD.
Check that the SIGNAL STOP contact closes and also the aided trip alarm contact
should be checked if used.
TDG
Select a reverse ground fault outside the reach of the distance elements and select
Monitor Option 19. The pick-up of the DEF reverse comparator is detected by the
output of the monitor box terminal 6 and the output on terminal 2 going low will
indicate when TDG has run out after DEF is allowed to reset. Monitor box terminal
22 is the common zero volt rail.
A timer should have `Make to Start' and `Make to Stop' selected.
Ensure CHANNEL OUT OF SERVICE opto isolator is de-energised.
Apply the fault and measure the time obtained on removing the fault. This will give
the set TDG + up to 3ms.
Also check that the SIGNAL START contact closes while the fault is applied.
6.4.5
6.4.6
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 49 of 70
7.2
Trip test
Trip isolation should be obtained if breaker operation is not wanted.
Auto reclose should be blocked.
Breaker operation will of course only occur if previously closed.
Select the appropriate output option in the commissioning tests part of the MENU.
When the SET button is pressed, the appropriate contact will operate as shown.
The relay inoperative alarm will also be closed.
CONTACT OPERATED
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 50 of 70
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Note:
7.3
29-33
29-35
37-39
41-43
45-47
49-51
53-55
30-32
30-34
30-36
38-40
42-44
46-48
50-52
54-56
57-59
57-61
57-63
65-67
69-71
73-75
77-79
81-83
TRIP A & ANY TRIP
TRIP B & ANY TRIP
TRIP C & ANY TRIP
TRIP A, B, C, 3PH & ANY TRIP
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.4
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 51 of 70
On load checks
As there could be a risk of tripping, maintain trip isolation or block contact
operation in the menu if required.
For the following checks it has been assumed that 2 type MMLG test blocks have
been fitted and are wired as recommended in Figure 1.
If alternative test facilities are provided, the panel wiring diagram will need to be
referred to and the procedure adapted to suit.
7.4.1
7.4.2
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 52 of 70
+M.W.
VA
IA
IA
-M.V.A.R.
+M.V.A.R.
IA
IA
-M.W.
- = IMPORT
+ = EXPORT
= TAN
-1
M.V.A.R.
MW
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 53 of 70
Directional check
The test must be carried out with the relay energised from the line voltage
transformers and current transformers with the load current above the minimum
sensitivity of the low-set current level detectors (5% In) and preferably at a lagging
power factor in the tripping direction.
Select on load directional check.
When the Set key is held pressed it automatically sets the relay low set current level
detectors to their most sensitive settings, THETA Ph to the minimum value and Zone
1 to a straight line directional characteristic. As shown in Figure 10.
All contacts will be disabled and the Relay Inoperative Alarm will close.
If the current vector Ia as determined in 7.4.2 is drawn on Figure 10, and it comes
inside the `Operate' area, then it will be seen as a `Forward Fault' when the Set
key is pressed. If In appears to be on a boundary line voltage rotation may be
necessary to give a definite confirmation.
If using MMLB test plugs, the voltage plug must be fully inserted BEFORE any
rotation is performed.
Push the SET key to perform the test. One of the three following messages will
appear which are self-explanatory.
a)
b)
c)
A check must be performed with the fault in the opposite direction which is
achieved by reversing the current input to the relay and the new appropriate
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 54 of 70
message seen when the set key is pressed.If MMLG Test blocks are fitted, this may
be achieved by referring to Figure 11.At the end of these tests the calendar clock
should be correctly set. Any relay inhibits or special test facilities should be
removed and trip links put back.
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 55 of 70
VA
RCA
OPERATION
NO OPERATION
PH min
Ia
VB
VC
OPERATION
NO OPERATION
FROM FIG. 9
LET TAN -1 M.V.A.R.
M.W.
THEN 1 MUST SHOW REASONABLE
AGREEMENT WITH
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 56 of 70
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 1
2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
MMLB 01
TEST PLUG 2
2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 57 of 70
Serial number:
Model:
Station:
Date:
Circuit:
Engineer:
Scheme type:
Witness:
1.
Preliminary Checks
a) Rating Details
b) CT Shorting Contacts
c) DC supply
d) Power up
e) Wiring
f) Relay Inoperative Alarm Contact
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
2.
3.
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 58 of 70
Relay Terminal
Injected
15-18
16-18
17-18
Mon Opt 6
LCD POS
2
3
4
Pick Up
Volts
Drop Off
Volts
Drop off %
Pick up
Low set
Level
Detector
PhA
PhB
PhC
Relay Terminal
Injected
19-20
21-22
23-24
Mon Opt 6
LCD POS
6
7
8
Pick Up
Current
Drop Off
Current
Drop off %
Pick up
Relay Terminal
Injected
19-20
21-22
23-24
Mon Opt 7
LCD POS
6
7
8
Pick Up
.Current
Drop Off
.Current
Drop off %
Pick up
High set
Level
Detector
PhA
PhB
PhC
Mon Opt 6
LCD POS
9
9
9
Pick Up
.Current
Drop Off
.Current
Drop off %
Pick up
Mon Opt 7
LCD POS
9
9
9
Pick Up
.Current
Drop Off
.Current
Drop off %
Pick up
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
4a.
5.
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 59 of 70
Reqd
Reach
Zr
Fault
Type
__
__
Zone
1
__
__
Zone
1X
__
__
Zone
1Y
__
__
Zone
2
__
__
Zone
3
__
__
Zone
3 Rev
__
__
Quad
Res.
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-G
B-G
C-G
__
Zone
1
__
Zone
1X
__
Zone
1Y
__
Zone
2
__
Zone
3
__
Zone
3 Rev
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B
B-C
C-A
Relay
Volts
Relay
Amps
Equiv
Z
Actual %
%
Error
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
KZ1
=
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 60 of 70
KZF
=
LINE LENGTH =
KZM
THETA M
MUTUAL
ENABLED/DISABLED
KZPh + KZN
KZPh + KZN + KZM
PHASE
COMPENSATION
* Location without MUTUAL
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
6.
PHASE
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-G
B-G
C-G
OPERATION TIMES
Zone 1
(ms)
Zone 1X
(seconds)
Zone 1Y
(seconds)
Zone 2
(seconds)
Zone 3
(seconds)
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
7.
a)
Zone 6 boundary
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 61 of 70
TZ6 Timer
Measured time =
c)
d)
ms
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
8.
a)
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 62 of 70
Voltage for
operation
Operation time
seconds
Indication
b)
Instantaneous operation
Indication
c)
9.
Switch on to fault
SOTF Indication
Trip time
10.
ms
ms
ms
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
12.
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 63 of 70
Zone 1 extension
Permissive underreach
ms
14.
Permissive overreach
ms
TD Time
ms
ms
ECHO feature
Breaker open time
ms
ms
ms
ms
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 64 of 70
15.
ms
ms
Blocking
TP Time
ms
TD Time
ms
16.
17.
DEF
Low set
Level
Detector
A-G
B-G
C-G
Pick Up
Current
Drop Off
Current
Drop off %
Pick up
Pick Up
Current
Drop Off
Current
Drop off %
Pick up
High set
Level
Detector
A-G
B-G
C-G
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 65 of 70
Is Pick up
mA
Operation time
Phase
Injected
A-G
B-G
C-G
Current
Injected
Curve
Selected
Expected
Time
Actual
Time
ms
ms
ms
18.
18.2
Trip test
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
18.3
21.
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 66 of 70
On load checks
a) Voltage correct
b) Phase rotation correct
c) CT/VT phasing correct
d) Forward directional check
e) Reverse directional check
Engineer
Witness
Date
Date
DATE
CIRCUIT
ENGINEER
SERIAL NUMBER
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 67 of 70
18 LFZP
18 LFZP
DEFAULT DISPLAY
CLOCK REFERENCE
TP
ms
TD
ms
BE DISPLAYED
TDW
ms
DEF ELEMENTS
LOSS OF LOAD
ACCELERATED TRIP
ENABLED/BLOCKED
ENABLED/BLOCKED
HIGH SET
In
TPG
ms
TDG
ms
DISTANCE
TYPE OF TRIP1 OR 3 POLE/3 POLE
ZONE 1 TRIPENABLED/BLOCKED
TIME DELAY TRIPS
TZ1X
TZ1Y
TZ2
TZ3
ALL G
BASE SETTINGS
ENABLED/BLOCKED
ENABLED/BLOCKED
ENABLED/BLOCKED
ENABLED/BLOCKED
ENABLED/BLOCKED
TZ1X
TZ1Y
TZ2
TZ3
s
s
s
s
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 68 of 70
KZPh
THETA Ph
KZN
THETA N
DIST G CHAR'STIC MHO/QUADRILATERAL
Z1 & Z2 SETTING
KZ1
KZ1X
KZ1Y
KZ2
Z3 SETTING
KZ3'
OFFSET/REVERSE
KR
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 69 of 70
KZ3
LENT a/b
ENABLED IN
BY
110s/0.2s
TIMING
ZONE 1
ZONE 1X
ZONE 1Y
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
TZ6
Z6-Z3/Z6-Z2
ALLOW/BLOCK
ALLOW/BLOCK
ALLOW/BLOCK
ALLOW/BLOCK
ALLOW/BLOCK
KZ6
KZ6'
LENT a/b
BLOCK AUTORECLOSE
ENABLED/BLOCKED
m
s
Service Manual
LFZP 11x
R5911D
Chapter 4
Page 70 of 70
DEF
LOW SET
DEF ELEMENTS
In
ENABLe/BLOCK
DELAY TRIP
CURVE
MULT *t
BASE SETTING
POLARISING
THETA G
MAG INRUSH
STABILISER
FAULT LOCATOR
KZF
LINE UNITS
LINE LENGTH
CT RATIO
VT RATIO
MUTUAL
COMPENSATION
ENABLE/DISABLE
KZM
THETA M
ENABLe/BLOCK
In
ON/OFF
SERVICE MANUAL
Types LFZP
R5911D
REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to AREVA T&D with the equipment to be repaired.
This form may also be used in the case of application queries.
AREVA T&D
St. Leonards Works
Stafford
ST17 4LX,
England
For:
Customer Ref:
_______________________
__________________
_______________________
DC volts
AC current
Frequency
_____________
2.
3.
4.
Yes/No
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
5.
continued overleaf
SERVICE MANUAL
Types LFZP
6.
R5911D
7.
8.
Yes/No
Intermittent
Yes/No
Time delayed
Yes/No
(Delete as appropriate).
By how long?
___________
9.
______________________________________
Signature
_______________________________________
Title
______________________________________
Name (in capitals)
_______________________________________
Company name
____________________________________________________________________________
Publication: R5911-D
AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com
T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/